Image evaluation lESI TARGET (MT-3) V m^x «^. ,^ 1.0 ."fri^ im II i '- lillM I* I u , 11111== ^ 111= yi iiiii_L4. 11.6 Photographic Sciences Corporation Q3 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) B72-4S03 m(^ iV :\ v^ \ « - 4lS 6^ ^v^ "%^ ni"^"' ^ LS ^ #;<'' . ^^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. 3 a CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. , Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic IMotas/Notes tochniqu^s st bibliographi quat The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which rnay significahtly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couieur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag^e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture rnstaur^e et/ou peiliculde Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes g^ographiques en couieur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couieur (i.e. autre que blaue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couieur D D Bound with other material/ Relii avac d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ Lareliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distorsion le long de la marge interieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors dune restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela itait possible, ces pages n'ont pas iti fiimies. Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppidmentaires; L Institut a microfilm* le meilleur exemplaire qu'il iui a ati possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m«thode normale dc filmage sont indiquAs ci-dessous. a n Q D Coloured pages/ Pages de couieur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagdes Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaur^es et/ou pellicuides Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages d^cotor^es, tachet^es ou piquees Pages detached/ Pages ditachees r~7j Showthrough/ Transparence □ Quality of print varies/ Quality inigale de (impression □ Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du materiel suppiemen uppiementairt I I Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible □ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have bean refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont iti filmies i nouveau de facon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqu« ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X y 30X 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X n 32X aire details ues du : modifier ger une filmage ies errata to pelure. The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of; O. B. Weldon Library University of Western Ontario (Regional History Room) The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impras' sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol —*>( meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc.. may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included In one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method ; L'exemplaire film* fut reprodult grace ^ la g^n^rositd de: D. B. Weldon Library University of Western Ontario (Regional History Room) Les images suivantes ont 6x6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nattet« de l'exemplaire film*, at an conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprim^e sont film6s en commenpant par le premier plat et en termlnant soit par la darnidre page qui comporce une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second pltit, selon le cas. Tous les autrea exemplaires origiriaux sont film^s en commenqant par la pramidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et an terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra ."^ur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbole — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE ", le symbole V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc.. peuvent §tre fllmis d des taux de reduction diffdrents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre reprodult en un seul clich6. il est film* i partir de I'angle supdrieur gauche, de gauche A droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m^thode. n 32X 1 6 PI CON' •% EEVISED E1»ITI0N 01 BULLION'S ANALYTICAL ▲IP PRACTICAL aUAMMAU OP THB ENGLISH LANGUAGE, ,*..^n TV AT^DITION TO OTHER NEW . ITTBR, A SBC "^^^^^^^ OP WORDS.. A VOCABULARY 'o;saxoTlatin. and greek boots; EXTENSnrB RELEOTIONS IN PROSE AND POETRY. PJRANALY. SIS AND A COMPLETE COURSE OP INSTRUCTION AND BXEBCISBS IN ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 1' SECOND CANADIAN EDITION, ADAPTED TO THE TJSB Or CANADIAN SCHOOLS. ! !' TORONTO : PUBLISHED BY ADAM MILLER, AND SOLD BY ROBERT MILLER, MONTREAL. 1866. t' Entered, according to the Act of the Provincial Parliament, in the yew one thousand eight hundred and siity-aix, by Adam Milisr. in tho otBce of the Regiatrar of the Proviuee of Canada. * "I Page «< .RRATA. 65. (3) After '' Neither, ''^ rend active nor pafsive meaning, 153. (516 clause) For <« He replied," read He said. 155. (527) For " Preposition" re&d prepositional. 158. (In the question ending " as examplen,") read Give examples. 159. (In Petitence aL,J form for parsing,) for '* telegraph,'* read telegram. , 165. (Connectives of manner) for '•'accordingly a»," read according as. 178. (156) Omit the last words " in detennining." 2.34. (794) For "Meir," read there. (Last paragraph of Part III) for "forester," read foreit: T^e-f PREFACE. Wb hare reason to oongratulate ouraelves, that Id most depart- ' ments of gtudy, Canadian Schools arenow supplied with excellent text book?, many of them prepared in the country by Canadian Teachers. Id the department of English Grammar, however, it is scarcely necessary to say that, among all classes of teachers the utmost diBsatisfaction ia felt. It is the peculiarity of almost every Eng. liah Grammar in use that, while it may be very good, or even ex- cellent, in some department of the subject, it either entirely omita others of at least equal importance, or is so inaccurate, or meagre, or behind the ti„e8, in the manner of treating them, that in many cases it would be better had they been altogether passed over. The con- sequence is, that a teacher who would make his course of instruction comprehend what is necessary to render it practically useful, and give it a degree of completeness, is compelled, either to depend on oral instruction to supplement the deficiencies qf the text book, or submit to the inconvenience and needless expense of introducing several diffeient books. To this, more than any other cause is, doubtless, to be attributed the fact, that the study of English Grammar does not occupy that position in our schools to which its importance entitles it. Whatever opinion therefore, may be entertained of the pretensions of the text book now presented to be the identical dmderatum, of this at all events, the Editor is fully assured, that both teachers and pupils will appreciate the attempt to render their labor in this department somewhat more pleasant and remunorative, and will cheerfully recognise whatever merit it may possess. lu undertaking the revision of Bullion's Analytical and Practical Grammar, the intention, in the first place, was merely to correct some of the numerous inaccuracies, and supply a few of its worst defects ; but the more closely it was examined with a view to this in the light of the latest improvements in the mode of treating and presenting the subject, the more obvious it became, that uuch mptrfictal changes, so far from satisfyii ^^ the reasonable demands of intelligent teachers, could scarcely be expected to allay tha existing dissatisfaction to an extent sufficient to procure for it even a temporary recognition. Such being the aspect of the matter the Jjjditor found, that he had no alternative but to abandon the project altogether or face the enquiry, what alterations and additions must be maue to supply a text book, such as is rcquiicd,— what must such a book contain,— and how should the matter be presented to bring it fully up to the standard of philosophical accuracy which late writers, especially Moreil, in his scientific treatment of the snbjeofc, has so conclusively shown it to be capable of. In prosecuting this enquiry, one Elimination, Alteration, and Addition, after another, was found necessary, till the original has undergone such an entire transformation, that like the miser's sfockinga, it may now fairly question its own personal identity. The ()pportu;iity of collecting facts and observing results, which X w 4\ m -t'!| PREFACE. an exteiwive acquaintance with teachers ond many years experi. eoee in teaching English Grammar, have afforded the Editor, hat convinced him that our best grammars are not sufficiently practical, — that with a text book adapted to ;he purpose, the grammar class ought to be made to contribute much more directly to the grand end in view, viz : readiness, acairacy, and elegance, in the UM of language. In order to remedv this defect, and render ail the nHBistanoe possible to teachers who would be practical, Examination Que»tiori» followed by thorough pracli';al exereitea are placed at proper in- tervals throughout the book, and a general exposition of the Principles of English Composition followed by a complete course of iS'zerv -ses designed to betaken up in connection with Analysis and Syntax, is appended. A glance at these examination Tests, for they are rather tests than questions, will convince any one, that so far from leading to " Mechanical teaching," they are designed and fitted to call forth the highest intellectual efforts of the pupils. The subject of analvsis has been completely re-written, and will, it is hoped, be found fully up to the mc3t approved standard. Piagram« to be used in conjugating the verb, and in oral and written exercises in parsing and the analysis of simple aud compound sentences, have been prepared, and will, it is confident- ly expected, be found valuable aids to both teacher and pupil. The Section on the Structure of Words, followed by Examination Questions and practical Exercises on each part of speech will supply a great want in this direction, and, taken in connection with the "Vocabulary of Saxon, Latin and Greek roots at the close, may be viewed as forming^ a complete and distinct text book of itself on this important branch of the subject. The Selections in Prose and Poetry, embracing a great variety of construction, will fur- nish ample exercises in analysis, and will be found suited to the wants of every class of schools, teachers and pupils. Most teachers will consider it a decided improvement, that correct and incorrect examples are mixed together in the exercises under the rules of Syntax, requiring the pupil constantlji to draw upon his know- ledge of the subject and to apply it as he proceeds. In conclusion, the Editor would express how much it has been a matter of constant regret to him, that he has been absolutely lim- ited as to time. Although this circumstance has not been allowed to interfere with the general features of the book, it has prevented that careful consideration, that might, in some instances, have resulted in greater accuracy or better selections, and compelled him to avail himself of the labors of others, more especially of MoRELL & Anderson, (to whom he takes this opportunity of ftoknowledging his great indebtedness) more freely than he would have felt inclined to do under other circumstances. EDITOR. Toronto, Canada "West, July, 1866. 6 G 1 I 7 I 1 8 INDEX AND TABLE OP CONTENTS. Grammar, Defioitiou aod DivlsioD of '^jj Pabt I.-ORTHOORAPHY. Letters, Divisioo and Power of i^ Syllables '.!!.'!!!!! It Spellintf, Rules for '...'.'..'.'.'../..'.'...." ig Capitals, Use of ."...!!"*.!.!.!!!.. 20 . PiET IL-ETYMOLOGY. Words, Crdoeral Division of ^ _ 21 Parts of Speech, »nd Definitions of ..,.......'.,,[ ,[[//" 22 l8T ExKRoiBic— -Method of Introducing the Subject ....... \.. 28 NoDM. Classification of !!!.'.!.*!.*. 24 2nd ExKRorsK— The Classification of NounV .* * .* '. '. '. '. '. '. .... 2" Properties of the Noun, Gender .'!!.'!*.*.*!!!.*!.' 26 8bd Exeeoise— -Gender ...'.','..'.'.'..'.'. 29 Person , .*.'.*.*.'!*!,*...!.* an Number, Genenil and Special Rules !!.**.'.!!..!![ 81 4th ExEiicisK — Number ... , 32 Nouns, Irregular in the Plural !!.!!.'! 33 Compoundr', Plural, how formed !.*.*.*!.*."..*! 34 Words from Foreign Languages, Plural, bow* formed .* .* '...'. 85 .^TH Exercise— Nouns, Irregular in Number 35 Plural of Proper Names !..*.!.'.'.'" 87 Case i .*.!!.!.*.'.'..* . 38 Possessive, Rules for forming .'.'...,'.'. ..'.'.' 39 Observations on the Possessive !'!.!.!!. 40 6th Exercise— Cases of Nouns !!'.*.!*!".'!! 41 General Examination Questions on the preceding! .* ...','.'.'. 42 The Adjec«ve ......' 44 Classification of Adjectives '.'..'.'. 44 The Limiting Adjectives ; a, an, the, Article ............ 45 Comparison of Adjectives * ' 45 Irregular Comparison .*!!!!.'!.. 48 Examination Qitestions on the Adjective .*.**.* 49 7th Exercise— The Adjective, Parsing, Ao ....... I 60 Pbonocn... ;••* go Classification of Pronouns 5j Personal Pronouns Declined ...!!!!!!'.!*. 62 The Pronoun it, how used, Ac .!!!.'!!!!.'!.* 63 Oomponnd Personal Pronouns !!.*!.!.*.*! 64 KzAMiNATioN QutsTioNB on Pergonal Pronouns ....!!'.!!!.'!. 4$ 8th Exkroisk- Personal Pronouua, Parsing, &c '.['. ^a III 6 INDEX AND TABLE OF CONTENTS. Relatire Pronouoi, DefinitioM, Ac R«Utiye »Aa/, Remarks on .*.'.' 9th ExmciBi— Paruing Helatire Pronouns, f{io«l Suhjeol I6t Oon»p«»und and Oonopl^x ModiflcAlion of th« Noun 156 Eitcndmi or LofficHi rr«<(lir»t« 186 Modificfttion of MiHJIfyIng Words , 167 KxAMiWATioN Qi't«Tn>Nii niid ExKuciHKii Oil th# PHmnry Elo nieuUi, And on the Modificatiouiof Iho Primary EUincDt*. 167 Ordtr of Analyi ing Simple Sentence* Ornliv 1 69 Foam for Wrltt«»n Kxeroliet in Analviing Simple Soncenoei. . 169 SiLtCTioNi in Proef and Poetry, for practice in Analyzing Simple Sentences ICO T«t CoMrLKx 8»iiTCN0«--Noun Hentencoi 162 KxKRC](«R ' n the Noun Sentence 163 Connectives of Noun Sentenoeb 168 Adjective Sentence , , 168 Oonneotivee of the Adjective Sentence 1 64 Adverbial Sentence 164 ConnectiveB of the Adverhial Sentence 166 K^iariSK on the Advorl>ial,Sentenee h\6 A»RU)OMicNT of Complex Sonteuocs 166 CoMi'ouND Sbntkncr 167 Copulrttlve Co ordination, Connectives 167 ripjunctive Co ordination, Connectives ; 168 Adversative Co-ordinatiun, Connectives 168 Illative Co-ordination, Connectives 169 Abridgment of Compound Sentences lt'»9 Oramnmtical Eauivalouts 170 Method of Anaiyiing Compoun* nnd Complex Seiiteucof Orally 1 70 Example of Compound Sentenoo Analyzed 171 FoiiM for Written Vjceroises in An dyzing Complex Sentenoo?. 17'2 Form (or Written Kxercisesin Analyzing Compound Sentencesi. 17.S Examination Qukotion8 and Exxrcises on Complex nntl Com* pt»imd Sentences 171 Sklkctionb in prose and Poetry, for Practioo in Aiialyzing Complex and Compound Sentences 175 Rn.Es OF Syntax 179 Ui!Lt I. Agreement of Ibo Verb with the Nominative 188 Explanatory Reni..rk8 re!*peoting the Exerciues on the KuUs of Syntrtx 186 KxiRcisK— 'False and Correct Syntax. Rule 1 186 llvLE II. The Subject of the Verb 187 ExKuciBK— False and Correct Syntax. Rule II 187 KULA III. Apposition 188 KxKRCiSE— False and Correct Syntix. Rule 111 18»» RuiK IV. The Possessive. . .'. 189 I I I F E E iWHEX AND TABLE OF CONTBNTI. 9 R««ciit-F«l«f und Correct Syol.x. U»l« IV 'twl RiM.i V. Adjec^iv* J": Conitruotlan of (JotnparnUTo and SupVriiltrvii .' ! .' ." ] " " " 194 ronltion of tho A«lj..ctlv« ,,,^ Ext»oi«i-Kal«o Hixl Correct Svntax' ' *Ruie V lu* J he Artiolenr Linuting AdjeotiTM, a. an,M#..".'.;;!;"" 107 E«»as»-l.al.e and Correct Hyntax. The ArticU .*..'; m Hulk VI. Proru.un nnd ita Anteoe Saxon Verb Roots i .!...'.*!*..!.*.*.' 288 Saxon Adjeetiye Roots ,... «q4. Latin Noun Roots -'..'.V. ...... ,.....'. 284 n I INDEX AND ."ABLE OF CONTENTS. U Latin Verb Roots pagb Latin Adjective Root^. .' 28& Greek Noun Roots. . . 28a Greek Verb Roots. 288 Greek Adjective Root*.' .* .» 28& ENGLISH COMPOSITION C01IP081TI0N, Different kinds, Prose, Poetrv JCE, it investigates tJio prin- cip es ol language in general : as an art It teaches the right method of applying these principles to a particular language so as thereby to express our thought 1S a correct and proper manner, accordinc- to establislied usage. ° _ 3. English Grammar is the art of speak- ing and writing the English language ac- cording to established usage. ° *■ Langunge is either spoken or wrillen 8. Grammar is divided into four parts • \I<..V''T"^'f ^'^^^^ °*' ^°"ers and svl- lables;* Etymology, of words; Syntax, oi studied at this staL'e. T\l.il?J}lt'\y.f\?' ^'^^ to i.^n heinK pa.ticularlv pas. over PAJiTi. lor the "pn'spnt." ""■^' ^"^^'■<=^«''»' »f ^^e thinks proper. 2 KM wi- 14 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 4« M f I- I PART I. oiitho"geapiiy. 10. ORTiioGRAPnT treats of letters, and of the mode of combining them into sylla- Dies and words. 11. A letter is a mark, or character, used to represent an ele- mentary Bouud of the human voice. ^ 12. There are Tm.nty-ux letters in the English Alphabet. 13. Letters arc either Vowels or Consonants. 14. A Vowd is a letter which represents a simple inartkulaU Bound ; and, in a word or syllable, may be sounded alone. The vowels are a, e t, o, u, and w and y not before a vowel sounded in the same syllable, as in law, bay. n. A Consonant is a letter which represents an articulate sound • and, in a word or syllable, is never sounded alone, but always' m connection with a vowel. The consonants are h, c, d, /, g, h,j, h I, m, n,p, g, r, ^ t, v, x, z, and w and y before a lowel sounded in the same syllable, as in war, youth. 16. A Diphthong is the union of two vowels in one sou:; 3 Diphthongs arp of two kinds, proper and improper. 17. A Proper Diphthong is one in which both the vowels are sounded, as ou, in out ; oi, in oil; ow, in cow. 18. An Improper Diphthong, or digraph, is one in which only one of the vowels is sounded, as ou in court, or oa in boat. 19. A Triphthong is the union of three vowels in one sound, as eau Id beauty. THE P0WBH8 OF LETTERS. 20. In analyzing words into their elementary sounds, it is neces- sary to distinguish between the name of a letter and its power. A ^l*-'^^-^ T"'."*^ ^ ^^"^^ '^ ^^^* ^y ^^•c'^ it 13 usually called : as A, be, se, de, (fee. ' 22. 'The power of a letter is the effect which it has, either by it- self or combined with other letterc, in forming a word or syllable. 28. Each of the vowels has eevejal powers. Several letters have the same power; and certain powers or elements of words are represented by a combination of two letters. ORTHOGRAPHY LETTERS. 15 as oonsonauts, single or combined. ^'P'^ates, represented by rnfi Z^fi^^u ""^ ^^^rticulate Bounds produced by the orffana of VOCALS. SUBVOCALS. A. ale, able. A. art. A. all. A. at. E, met, egg. I. «rc. I. in, 0. old. 0. move, ooze. O. odd. U. iur\"thoproductionof simple vocal «hii',V-/,^-"'-^-f -^''''''^-'''■^^ emniovf^fl tn «rfi..,'of« or jrrc'-v ' '''^^ "' ^ '"•■'^ '^"""*^- '^^'^^^ «>•« tJ'e tongue. lipH7teeth and JaTate!'^ 0«THOGRAi.„v— SYLLAIJLES. ir DIVISION OP WORDS INTO SYLLABLES OKNEEAL nULE. JI3. Place eogethcM- in distiuct »yll.l,|„,, ,b„,,. ,„„„, „,,;,,, „,^ up tbe separate parts <,r divisiona of u woni, a, L.ard in s c„r rect pronuneiatiou. "^ foltwilgr^' '''"'' "'" ^' ""^' ^^^"« - ^^'« «"^'i-t arc the 45. Rule 1. Two or more consonants forming but one elemen. tary sound, are never separated; such as, ck, tcU, tk, sk, n^pTZ t^os^ Ual, gon, g^an, geous, .ion, are hardly every divided- a. o-cean, ffra-ctous, na-tion, coura-geous, Ac. ' ' Jlan'^^'h ^??P°""'* ^^••^^"'•e divided into their simple ones- 48. Hule 4. The terminations of word.. xit»,«« ^k /• lable. are „,„al>y separated f.o„, bri^"^ T " «''" ..s.r;::„'r-ir,s.r.;r--''-"" SPELLING. 51. Spelling is the art of exDressino n word by its proper letters. ^^"^^^^^'"^S a ill ill IWJ|I|! Hi 18 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. OKXERAL RULES FOR SPELLING WO RDS. Co. Motioi-jlljibles Olid RUI-K 1. vowel ing Willi/, /, or g, preceded 1 y a isingl( 64. L'xceptions.^Of, jf ng, i„ ) past. thus, pus 55. Words ending with las, niJLK II. WHS, liis, ga.a, V(!S, tl lit", ue, double. l,er,„«Ue.tc..;„., .<,,„<./,«;,,;,„,, „.»,..•„;' ' " "'" ^ j6. ^«,;,„<,n..-Ad , „ . itations ,,eco^„« a, de;3at:!f;l''is'ttr„ra','r;irT'''''- itals. "■■'-''" '■ ■""' "° "'»".i«tio„ 0, are written iu cap- ». The first word of every line i„ poetry. «™emb.r this ZL'Sl:!^. f'^l^ijt^'^ -■ ^ Alw%» 9^ Commoo nouns when perscified ; as, " Come, =entle Sprina ' iage:> '' ^'""'^^^i/ , ituldsmiUi'a Besetted Vit- of the coranoSn """"' ''^'''J' ''"Ph.H.eJ, or ,he principal subject I ETY MOLOG y WORDS. 21 PAllT II. ETYMOLOGY. <,Jf!'„f^''™?''°i;''-*''^^*' "f *'»« different WORDS. h.^nL"^ ^''''"° '' ""^ arliculate sonad used by common consent as the si-n of an idea 82.— 1. Words, in respect of their For- Simple or Compound. ^pwdT^^i'triir;' """ '" """'° "-""f "-""^ ^or. I- "uiua, ^^, ^nanhood, horseman. are either Deohmhle or Indeclinahle. termed in G a2r S/X"' '""'"'• ""'• P™"" ' "»"»"7 ^^ amniar, Acoidmts ; as. man, mm; lov>, loves, lovd, are'ai5^^be1:catLl*'7^'''■'T■ ^""""' ""'' '•™"°-' I ; '\ ;,*, f. * -Am.ii M CNULI8II UKAMMAR. tt} \ ^'^T^"^*- ""^ Smificalion and Uw, words arc divided into eiyht diflercnt classes, called Parts of Speech. "'"^'^''"* 1 umor iverlij thy (iihcr nml ii,y mother." 93. TIic parts of speech arc :— wet to''Mo„treal._i.u^'.„r, ™L • ^ ''"" '" ^•"■°""'- «' tho'lgMs'tuire l„"brl^ '" 'I'T,"'" -^""""'i"". when word, and Pleted .heir engi^r!;.;.:^'^.^^;'^ -'•'™ •"'"" tbey have cem- tion „Tt2thr«;r'L''" rrf ""fr. without .„y co„„ee. 94. Definitions of tlie parts of speech. 1. A NO.., i, the n.me of anything ; as, Q,ubec. city, love. Of -n fnnr-nZ17r„r?i ^ay^li^-L^r '"^ -^"^ wh'.t?st,:i7er.--ir«^^^^^^ ETYMOLOOY WORDS. 23 ion and liilercnt )f thought. un»; those tribute no I when the as a name, i nn action > «'f '.vorda, fore honor y mother." %ble, book, or things; )r things . •eraona or of ftn act, i will go persona uto. He ords and Williarn ave com- connee- for the 5h. neauing ud; aB> n. «. A I'RKPosmoN }h a word uyi>d to oxiir#.K« ♦!.« «..-.« - *• i n"o:i','i;'rH;..r;,.',!''.,,:,r,,,c:r ""■"'-" '- '- ^- 7. A coNjuNdTtoN 18 a wor.l „Ht.d to cnnoct word. lihriMen or Hent-nccB ; mm, Ho ««,/ f must -o ; hut vo.i mav «f.iV %/ • / to I'i.n, «m/ through hi.n, aro all tlungl ^ ^^' ^^ '"'" ^"^ H. All INTKKJKCTION is a Word llSfd m«r«l«^ ♦^ - ^i>ho..t any connection with otlr^^^^^^^^^^^^ WuB there l" Alas I my friend is no more.' ' ** ^"" iHT KXKKCI.SE, The classification of words and the rcla- tions tJicy bear to each otlier in sentences nectinK them wi(h L (hi ngs pMlealj ul^h P»M«Mive., con. ing. with ench, its suhiMt Th!!. ', ■ ■" "" ""'•"> co'inwt- twin a '7««VU an;it:;5:a„:-;^ V:^C 7o oifthe^^ ^^^■ ^^ir; ?e?a ^h^;^ er,ainr^ P7nourwl^';h aT uaX; every prenodti^m mi st havf.' « n "^' ''"'' illustrating the fact, that it to\Ue a nse. glover /en?re^lr°"^".-^'P^"^''"^ "P«» ;5o.«7ions, and the noiinrnr LJ agam pointing out the ^re- then, aft;r expkinin^ h.f tl "' ^-'^ ^^ '^«''- ohjectivea; every insta.Kx'u Tfo cmnpSf tZ'T'"''' "?*^ ''^ "'-''^^ '« '"^ the proposition and its S !i . T^ "^ ''""« ""^^'^ ^«'d. connects, anfat ihllo ?ll^ <'°"J""«>i"ns, slating what each relative pro,;:L't ": nj !«:? ;H.el'''%r"^t"« ""^i' "f he.a™e page .ni,.|,t be iaift^™ '„"' ;,. 71"!",, .'j.^""^.''" °° t... r.lau.„ „,. cu.lruetioaof each word piloted 'out' ""''"'' I :f 'i^^U ^n^H r,..,i^H ''^^^^^H is :^^ ^liiil r m- ..:i|W I'M l! I' 11 •^^ I ill m 1:1 ^«. 24 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Thi'u, Imvinor -yplained and illustraipd wi,„f „ ..n/.;,c. is, and the 'distincli.n betwet 11,1' t" ^oT^r'''!; °^ propcsit...... goovrti-the piece a^ain to count off fiw '''^'«*'" an.; .Iisti„,n,ish between those that n^e prlS a^^^^^^ are dop.ndeut.. "'I.i8 exercise should be Si ued on p^ige till the class have a good idea of tL Xlfi f- '^ ^"""'^ and pio,,o.itiu.s and the gierardal^^o^ah '?//"" .f ^^''''^' umou^r them. Then, a new pie4 aSd bf / i ^'^ "'^."^ "^'«' Ban.e manner. While pioceedh .r wi'h^^l .» ^^''" "P ^" the the class HhuuM be called upon £ ^ usf if. r* '"' "^''"^'^''^ ^^ up by exun.ples of ^bd;rr:o;!"u' L^^arun^^ each lesson, a- exercise should be given out to nrpn,.?.! ;*'^^^°«® «^ day. The regular lessons in the book should not^h ' ^^',"'*^ the class ha^-e obtai.ied considerate flmi It" ^e resumed till ture of sentences and with the P^«;fl .• ^ ^7 ""'^^ ^^^ struc- tfon of words; and whi; th ^:gulaf Te^^ T"^'"^" c.«es of this kind should form parPof Ue y L.oTti . M '"';^' T" 18 ri^ached.--Ei>. ^ "" "" ^^® Analysis NOUNS. 95 A Noun u the ;^a/;^^ of anything • as tree, Toronto, kindness. ^ ^ ' ' 96. Nouns may be divided into three classes, I'roper, Common and Abstract. 97. A Proper Noun is the name applied to an mdiyidual only; as, John, London America, the Ohio. ' 98. When a proper noun is used to denote a whole class u becomes common, and generally has an article before if as "The twelve C<^sarsr " He is the Cicero of his age " " A ]>1; J tojudgment" A Ca.n.UU^ i.e., one of the Impbdlf "^' ""^ 99. Common nouns become proper when personified and also when used us proper names; as. Hail, Liber l^ ! The Pall. . 100. .V Common Noun is a name applied m couunon to everythin- of the same kind • as, man, cfutir, table, book. Common ^'ouns may be subdivided into — bolk. ^'"" ^'-^'-'-Names applicable t.' any one of a .l.es ; as KTYMOLOGY NOUNS. 25 dual p^lrrir^nx;^ ^"""^'"""^ -^^ --•'« -^ -^ '"^-^■ ^J^. Names of ...waber.. wei.'hr., moasu,.,, &o. ; as, .n ounce, ^ 101. All Abslnwt Nona is tJie jiame of anything vvliicli ^ve only conceiyo of as liaving a real existence; '.x^ ^joodness, rest singing, to sing. ' ' Abstnict nouns mny be divided into — o NZlVi'^'f''''"'' T''!^'"P^^'^i'!/' »i^^r courage, 8. Names of states or conditiong ; a,, poverty, sickness. 2nd exercise.* Albany, city tree nation, France, Philip, doa. horse «on 6r TI • ^'^^'"' ^^^^"^^^•g'^^I^«^don^i.e% Hud: son Ohio, Ihames, eountriea, America, England Ire- land, Spain, sun, moon, stars, planets, Jupitei yenu« Mars, man, woman, boj, girl John, jLe; Mary Susan, mountain, stream, valley. ^' 2. In the followinjr sentences, point out the nouns <^.^ ^t they are nouns; tell wlieti.ei- they ar« , mnl ? ^ ^^'^ Btract.and wi.y ; and (o whi-h clis of' f ' ^P"^^' <^«'»"i«». o^ «l>- «b.stract they Uug, and w y T , L ^^'^.^'uT ' ^7^"' "'" united together. "^ '''*'^'''^' '''^'^"^^^ '^ '« a name of a number thJhl^^^" ^«d Chairs in this room belong to John ■ !!!!i:!!!:!!!!l^^ books, to his brother.' properly devi.so.i. It s i ot o wi vor pT/^^ T"""' ^^' T^'' "^ «'='«'-e'*<"* «fiould limit iHMiself to th. se j^vrVv S^ '''" '/'•■""■''*' ^'''^^ tlu- Kmeiicr di'visesucl, now and various nu>tlmk-%,^l ''■''•''•' ,"l^'<^'>'<'"-^ to^cH-r will e}iKnCi.i, a.^ bosL caiculaicd to c/rmn ,w,7"fi " • '■" ''•"'i'ilrKnco jiiay '' ^ ^-^'-^ ^^ '•''"'-- -H"^soSng;^,/;i^;nSr' ""' ^"'^'"'^" ^^ :'!\ 4 M h4 » T|| 1 1 fffi r ' »' \l§ %s KNlilAUll GHA MM AH. They landea at Quob.'c .)ii Moiul country is diMturbo,). 'p| nv Tl> o pouco of tlu' fhoico. II in forb illoM(,. I boturl,t ., ^[ lis It* iron IM<' It i« I)1oj.h;,i,| Io |,,,,vt>| bv luoonli'.l / 1 1 1 1 1 > \ > > < . . I . . I . I . /I . ' . '"> onsioii was i-onuiUMulabK.. (\Mil(M".t o/.iMi pi'iu'ils (or lit. His fort lino (.\)inl iiniuitiont to (lopart. T| >f< I)ri)il(ic(>(l by iiiari "UMit IS tlio boat borsos. Ott ono of tho brii»lit('st roofs of Ii "' <'<».i('Iiiiia!i has ha MO nmmjilH. J mil niosaod tho nwaisth. c-apital of Canada. Canad iHM in t!i,> Uritish \ IH Tl 10 . ><>"sos aiv s(,m..iin....s (.ovorcd with sl-.f.. AOOIDKOTS OR I'UOI'KlnMra 0|.- TftK NOUN. 102. Tho accidi'iits oC nouns arc Gender Person, Number, and tWe. NoTE._Thcse „cci.le,,ts l,..|„„s al«, (o ,,r..,„.u.l8. wifh t ^"f ."'■" *' ^''" 'li-^t"»'tion of nouns witli ivyavd to sex. lOi.. There arc tlivee genders, Masculine l'em,nine,m\d Neuter. ^ ^cuunt, n« I?' ^'?""' •^^'""< '"S "lal.'s are Jrasculine; 10(). Nouns (Icnotin- females are lemln. nine ; as, icoman, gh'L ,1 ii. ' KTYMOLOOY— NOUNS— OENDKR, 27 107. Nou.is dciiotino. ,„,itl,or males nor females, ,. c., tl.i„ss «ith„ui sex, t^va Neuter; as, houisc, book, tree. J'l 17" 'f- "'', ''"'""" "''■'""■ '""'"» '"• f""""™' »""i' ■" f «-■- .o«e, .ua t„ b„ .,f c„„ «„„„.„,. ,,,„,„, , ,,_ ,,.„„ ,„„^^^,,;;;;^ ■ "». Wl„.„ ll,c./,-,„;„,-„, i, „„t ,li»H„,,„i,|,„,, f,,,„„ „,„ as, /ifro, hrrouir. ^ ' 110. Nouns Avliidi have difToront words lor tlic ^Masculine and Fcnnninc arc, Mim-ulhu:. FeminiM.^ Mtusbaud wife ^'^'"K (luocn l^orci (a title) lady Lad Man Mancic/inf. Feininin Uachulor iiiaid Hoar sow Hoaii bcllo Hoy girl Brotlior fcistor Bridegrooiu brido IJiick doo Bull cow Cock hon Drake dnck Dog bitch Earl countess Father mother Friar nun Gander goose Coutloinau lady Hart roe Horse niaro Ma^ter IMonk Nepliew Papa I^ani, buck Son Sir Stag Sloven Swain Uncle Wizard lass Woman misti-ess or mias nun niece nianuna ewe daughter niadatu hind slut uyinph aunt witch H 111. N^oims wliich form tlio feminine by tiie termination ''ess,'' ^ wA ■I a 5s KlVut. or Act Alu>s,H M,Ji»cu!int Arl)i« A nth or *tutn>. .'U ross croHf\ n >a.s.s{».(l,>r innh.uss.uli or iron .•nil h(M'(\HH 1..-U '<)H(»H8 Oount. cutmfcss VSH n,Mu>fiu>.(,.r l.tMiofjiot Oondnofdr oon,lih't '«>!U on or Khvf KinjXMor f'tu-li;int«>r < lOvonuM' Koir Hunfcr Host Tatron r»\«<8 a I (MM* Toot «lnoln'sa I'hM'ftMt'S.s «'1MJM*(\SS oui'liniilross .uianicss luMroHs hoN(,-,SH JOWCSH liotioss «naroliioiiv'v< u\i\\on\is. nt\«,M*O.SN J»;i<«M'ior Sli«>iih(oll!J.Htor '^iM'i'iM'Or Snilan I t!T«r Trail or 'i'uior Nisoounl V'oiarv rosw p«»rrofw pootoRM prioMi<»s.H priiuN's"* pn"or(>.s« prop|iot(v«H prt)t.>\M wliopJuM'do.is "ongsln^RH r snH;uioss or suf. i (an ( igro.ss tr.'utrosM no,ns«lMch|or„,(l...|.\M,.i,,mo . c: L,w,h„;,r,'~hvulurannr. -A,,,.,/, .l«o..,„l„,,is.?,-.' "^ " S""' • '"■'!' ■^•'•.•.■mlaiit OnSl:i;VAT10XS on- OKXIM-i' "i. Ki«nv ,„„„„„„„ „,„„„ ,„,„ „^, ,,„,,.,,.,:,„,„„ f,,„^„.,^,. ul. lOTVMoi.iM.V- IV01T NM III n<> : iiM loH»,hfiin, Nntnmt iMMiiifi hiivn uv • POl'oll, Oi)||V(>i((mI into (I "Hi'^ niiliii'idlv iiiMiIci ni<» <>((on, I) old 10 Ptlll, // K' iniiHiMiliiio or n.iiiliiino ; h.^. w) • '7 " «»f A nliii .S7» l!^ H.»|(lll;f ;" c.r Ul(> III OOII .S7/ '^fic hiiiIh. H'li wn Muv '' in »M'Ii|)N,vt| ;" or of 1 17. WiaiAKK.-- riiirt int mop MprcioH of |m'i ^oiiiljrali "ii;(na,.,M.. iw oUcmiis.'.I witli ^j,v„(, ,„.a„( 'o llli' Kiij;^liHli I niiiiiiiilion ,ui.| live Ihkhh i,, U,,, niyl '>»>. |>«'«'ijIiiu ,V <<» inipiiiJ (>!• pd'JSldllali '<» ocriiiiii nilo, lio Vio. wii.liniil nn,I,.,in/r i|, i„(lu(,.,) \V(>v«>r, <'iiii |„, MJv jToiulor nsMuin.'.l. oxoopt tl.al, noiii.H .lo.iolimr ,,} <'ii IN lo M) (I ^Vi,l:;:;";i::- 1:; :;:--;-;;^;i; -••:<-:«;'■. .^.- .^;f«. >«ri,m«i„/„,„,,Yii." (l,.Vl Tl ?■ ,"""'■« "•"■■"■■"kni.ly "10 l);ill oj /,rr ovo hiii!iI1 and loii-r ' ^ » uihwh Ul. U,ll,.o(,v,, ,„„ms, Ml,,.,, ,|,„ ,„|-„,,,,„,„ i, ,„ ,|,„ „,,„,,,,..„ " """ "■'"•'■■• «"■ - '.""7 -■ ■■ pirn. „„,|,o,, ,„, "t iX i."l,uJ...I», tl,c.j- l„l„. tl,„ K-.,.l..,- ,.r ll„. i„,||vi,l„,.h, ,.,.r..,.,eu t... Sou KXHIiOlsH 1. "/'"^ « //„■,/,.„„■«,•„,. ,,/-.K,,||,,,, ,,,)„,,,, fci„^_ if 30 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. I, 1 *l f meec, .;„„, nunt, boll.., duohc../ ...bb:" '..^^r' l,f™: nc. vilo, »,ster, mothor, hind, roo, ,„a o, Iion- , krrow widow, &-C.? "•*''"»'<■. qu< on, songstress, cou^r'li'r";' ■"■'•■'' "•'''' '■""'^''•> *"'"'""'■' ■notl-or, queen count, lady, k„,s, prince, castle, tower, river stone' hen goose, sea,„,tress, mountain, cloud, air 1; land foot, head, body. l„„b, lion, ti^er. mayir, countess _ friend, neighbor, parent, teache?. assistant Ru"do-8'un moo... earth. sl„p;-eat. mouse, fly, bird, elephant, hare ....pcTl' o7.h "";.",!;:rirx!.';.;""' "^ t^^'t^ -'p"""-* tl...>, ••My.A.M„T»Itton,^ • " "» '"""k* ■"'''.'tenoe ; PERSON. +ii^l" f ^^^"'^Ain Grammar, is the distinc- tion between the sjieaker, the person or sjoken'of • """"^ "'° P"''"'' "'• ^"'i- AaouaUin the >,t por,„„, wl.on it .ie„„te, ti,e ..poaker- a, 1, Paul, liare wriitoii it." ' ' '■ Oen. .viii. ;:i.. .. Will Tlu l";',' ul,,^ ""' """ '^•"•'' »"' ""g'y." ,.,. ^. . OISSEJIVATIOXS ON- PERSON". -4. Tbe firsi and ,he second per,oD can hdong „„ly to nono, J^uotlng person,, „,. ti,i„g3 po,,„„ified,. becan«. pL„„ 1^;^ a. ETYMOLOOV— NOUNS— NOMIIER. gj «p™k or b., ,p„ke„ to. Ti.o tkird pe™,n „,ay i„I„„g ,„ „„ „„„„, 1 ;?.->. A noun cim bo ti.e subjoot of a vt-rb on]v !,. n *u- c„,Ki ,.„.„„., „,„„„„, f,„. ,,„ ,„,,,. „f „ ; « ' ° iind somotiuics in llio Bocond Dcrsxm wHI,,,., «nipnaHis, 12«. A noun in M.e predicate is gcnorally. tho„gb not always '" the l/urU person, even when the subject h in ih.\ Z^ ^econ.I; hb. " I am Alpha," &c., "who ,V' So wi. n '''' /and //..; as. .'la,//.;. ..Thou I^ U.c I,;' "'* ^^""^"''^ NUMBEJJ. 127. NumtER is tlio distinction of one from wore than one. 128. Nouns have two numbers, tJie Sin. .gar and he Plural. Tlxc singubr deno :« l)ut one object : as, book, tree; the plural more tlian one; as, books, trees. ^ ' GKNEllAI, RULK. 129. The plural is commonly formed hr «'lding s to the singvdar; as, blTZL. ^ SI'KCrAL UULES. ihli^' -i^™! 1— Words ending in a sound that wd not unite with the 1,ound of * form their plural by adding es. ' Nouns in s, sh, x, and oh soft, ondin-> in a ril 'm /'"/^"^r"^' ^-th ihe sou^nd of *, lorm then' plural in cs ; as, .fox foxes ■ nuiMi, matches • rose, roses. "^ ' 131. lluLu 2.— Most nouns in o, preceded by a consonant form their plural in e^ as vargo, cargoes. ^ "aii.i.o, a», 'I iS.'. I jii! I iii ]m H ii 'Hi i If ■ ■pi: 1' , 'Mir S2 KNOU8H GRAMMAR. Excici;Tr<.NS.-.Cfl«/o, momenta, octavo, two, grotto, junto, portico, qiinito, usa, tyro, halo, an. I a U'W otbci oiins in // artor m conso. in the plural; as, nant, change y into />« /«(/y, ladies, 13ut Nouns in //artor a vou^el, and all proper nouns in y, follow the general rule; as day ^ays; the Pompeys, the Tttllus, ^c ^^ /•ni^l;-"^^'''^^'^'T?^'^'™ "^/or./^, change hilt' ^fff ^■^"^-^^^^"•■f. scarf, reef; brief, chief, grief, kerchief handkerchief, rr>.chi,f ; gu,f. turf. «urf ; safe, fif .^tr^e pro f hoof reproof ,,30 nouns in/; a. muf, ,nnfs ; except st^f'X' rnl «f«..,; but us compounds are regular; a.. //a,«/ J. ^a^iLs ^^arf has either wharf H or ioharvfs. i/.yyawy* 4Tn EXERCISK. !'«.. book leaf candle, hat, loaf, wW, " =. ,ex boi coach, inch eky, bounty, arniv duty, lau, ' (o "' cargoe, «He, story, church, table, glass, r °„lf' branch, street, potato, p™.h, sheaf b"oobv, ro .one house, glory, hope, ilo«e,-, city, difficultv,-distress, wolf] i'ay, bay, relay, chiimioy, journey, valley, needle en. emy army, v„Ie, „„t, hill, "sea, key, toy, monarch I'yro grotto, nuncio, punctilio, embvro culf ZtJnI' 7- ^^ W,; staff, .nuir. did; .m, cuii; ruf iee^s'lfe'tH; glo^bes^rlnwf T""^'T "-'.'""''• t''"'^^. Plo-'t, shrub, giooes, planets, toys, home, fanev, mosses, elas^i ^tite foxes, houses, prints, .poon, bears, lilies, ro^erchurc-hes; JSTYMOLOOY— NOUNS— NUMnER. 33 glovr, silk, skins, l,i]l , river, porch, glass, pitcher, valleys, mountain scones, stars, berries, peach 3. Tako pix of the fil ■each ; first in th )ov(! words, niid pny cam Honip 008 ? e sivffular, and then in the plural. iiig respecting NOUNS IRRRGULAIl IN THE VLVRA L .uch asl"'"' '"""" "■' '"''^"'"' '" *''« ^"'■•"'^^'o" ^^ l»'eir plural ; 'Singular^ M.ui Woinun Child Foot Ox Plural. men woniei) children foot oxen Singular. 1\)Oth (lOOSO Mouse Louse Cow Plural. teotb gceso mice lico formerly kiue but HOW regular, cows Siuffular, Brother (one of tJie same family) (one of tlio same .socioty) (a stamp for coining) (a small cube for gaming) (a man of genius) (a kind of spirit) (a table of reference) (a sign in algebra) (as a distinct seed) (as a species of grain) (an individual animal) (the species^ (a coin ) Brother Die Dio Genius Genius Index Index Pea Pea Sow Sow or svi'ine Penny Penny Plural, brothers brethren diea dice geniuses genii indexes indicea po.'iS pease .sows swine pennies pence (a sum or value) ;„„""'.',__'"' f"".'-P''"««. or two sixpcoe,. nwke a ,lul!- jn A new sixpence is heavier than an old one." i-' ■ I I, , . u 34 I' I EXCiLISH GRAMMAR. which hnv^ !\ ' ^ ^ ^^ •^"'^' '^"*' KP"ernlIy tho89 Sivyulav. Coimniui(lor-in-cliiof Aid-dn-c.'Miip lviti\L,'lit-urr;iiit Court-ijiiirtiiil °'"; '""r"''""^ ••' -- = ei.,l,t »; " .. „.. , ' ~ " "'■'-' ""' '" ll"o-"-" Four c'« •■'"' » »• — 9 » give place to O's." the wherefores l\nf t],;. ,• ■^'^'«;'py «,— the why's and ' v""-'^' ajUC tins 13 UllllOCi^qs-ifx- •...,] I 111 liK w 1 J , ^'^^^'^Oi ""u should be avoided b'uai pmral. As a general rule, nouns I fl. KTVMOLO«V~NOUN8-:VUM,,E„. 35 '» ^*'n or o„, |,„vo a i„ th,« plural. I c'li.'in ;,'«^ '»iiitof«; G,.t.,.k n„„ iifiii n.)iins ill M, ia th© ,,i„rai »>'»iins in ,1 c) '•iiiirf n iii(( l'»e plural. Tlio loll > "«liah lu(i,ir„.-,.'.j H8 to h "^ an) tlu. in.ist oorrinoti "iiioM use hftvc b intiii 'iH clmiigo a into o/a iu I" tho following tiiMo, tl some of which, 'coomo H, ninr-l, u p^i-t of tli,' iv« ul.a ti.e AV'VMormortl.opIuril. f^inijulur. Aliuninus Aluiiuin -AniJuiuiMusis An.'Uy.sis Plural. •iliinuii uluiniiai •'iiiiiuiuonaoM JiiiuJysi'H >e-^o arc indicated by tho letter U, ti'iignlar. ChryaiilJH Cn«i« Critoriuii Datuiu Plural. chryHiilicles criKt's criteria data . "...u^Bis Uatuiu Uata .mtitfK..os Diiuresis diaereses 'Mnces, K. EfHuviuiu appoudicoSjU. Ellipsis urcana Empiiasis automata, R. Euconium banditti Erratum bases ir„c„s boaux, R. Formula calces, R. Fmurns cherubim, I{. Genius Plural. genera gymnasia hypotheses igiies fatui Apex Appendix Arcainim Automaton Axis liandit Jia.sis l>eau Calx Clierub ^ivfjnlar. Cenus (Jymnasiuni Hypothesis Ignis fatuus Index {a ponih'r) i„a,^^^ Jndex {,n abjehra) indices Lamina Larva JMagus Medium Memorandum Metamorphosis Miasma Momentum Mon.siour Mr. (rna.'.ier) lamiine hirvje niaifi media, R. ellluvia ellipses t'mphases t'ncomia, II. epliemerides orrata foci formula) fiin^'i, funguses genii (145) Singular. Plural. Nebula nebula) Oasis oases Tarenthosis parentheses 1^ henomenon phenomena Radius radii Soholium scholia, R Seraph ►Speculum Stamen Stimulus 7 KJUIUJ UiU memoranda, R. Stratuu. miitaiuorphoses Thesis miasmata Vertebra iaomenta, R. Vertex messieurs Virtnoso me.ssis.(7/ia;<^e/i-) Vortex seraphim, R specula stamina, R. stimuli strata tlieses vertebra) vertices, R. virtuosi vortices, R. ■•1 % I u \) m 36 ENGLISH (JKAMMAR. ftTii KXEUCISK. ON NOUNS lUliKdULAR IN MJMIJKU. Give the Plural of— ^^hxn, loot, [XMiny, mouHc, ox, brotlior, ^'ooso, tooth ; — sow, tlif, court^ «jri-iii-lii\v ;— ciij)fiil, coaclirul, woman. child. martial, fatlior-in-hiNN aiitoii il'ul erratum, nu'ilimn, railius, Renins, lamina, laton, phenomenon, stratum, axis, ellipsis, stamoi.. index, olierub, seraph, iki\ Of what number m- Dice, areana, fisli(>rmeri. )?eo;e, dormice, alms, riehes, thanks, siiuHera, ton<,rs, teeth' woman, child, courtmartial, apparatus, miasma, jrenii' geiiiusea, indices, indexes, mathematics, iMatlhew,' James, Joha ? OBSERVATIONS UN NUMnER. 14». Some nomis are used in the Hin^nhr only. .Such m« the names of metaU, virtues, vices, arts, sciences, abstract qualitiet and thiii-8 vmgh«l or measured; m, gold, meekness, piety, idleness, tnteniperance, sculpture, geometr,/, msdom, flour, milk, Ac. Except when difforent sorts of thiufjs are exprc^saed ; as, wines, teas, sugars, liquors, ifec. 147. Some noniia are used in the plural only; m, annals, anti- podes, archives, assets, ashes, biillards, bitters, brccclus, clothes calends, colors (mViUxry banners), dre^s. goods, h,/sterics, ides, tntesttnes, literati, lees, letters, (litemtuio), minutiie, manners, morals, no)ies, orgies, pleiads or pleiadcs, shambled, //.//n^.v, thanks, vespers, vitals, victuals ; Also, thinga consisting of two parts ; as! bellow J, drawers, hose, nippers, pincers, pliers, snvjjers, scislors] shears, tongs, Jkc A few words us.mlly plural, viz., bowels, embers, entrails, lungs, liAVe sometimes n singular, denoting a part or portion of that ex-' prcseed by the plural ; as, boioel, lung, &c. 148. Some nouns are alike in both nunibei a ; as, deer, sheflp, swine, vermin ; grouse, salmon, tench, trout; apparatus, hiatus] series, congeries, species, superficies; head {in the sense of individ- ual), cattle; certain building materials; as, brick, stone, plunk, joist, in mass ; also fish, and sometimes Jowl, denoting the chiBf .' But several of these, in a plural serse, denoting individuals have thp r.^pnlar plural also; n?, snhnons, troufs, phcs. fovjls, Szc. KTYMOLOUy—NOUlVS—NUAmKH. 37 ly. Tl.« W(,r,lH 6r«... coupfe, pair, M', do,en, .cor., jros», nnudrr., thansan.l, a.ul Hon.e otLorH. af.or u.Ij«ctiv..a .„• „u,nl.or are e.tl,.r mv^nU, ov pl.ual ; u.., « ir.r.. a dozm, a hun.lreU ; two' */««, throe doz^n, nix /,mu/m/, .tc. Hut without m a.ljcctivo of uniiilier, or m oil.or coMHtruotiun«,aiul |milioulH.Iy alter h,, b,, Ac in u d.Btributive 8o..hu, inont of ti.eso wordn. i„ lh« plural, «H»ume' u plural for.n ; uh, " I„ An/r., u.ui duz.mr '« % «com uad hund- ruh. " Worth t/ionHauds" 160. l.~The A.lluwin^r words, ph.ral h, fonn, are Hotn.fim.s •iDguiar.biit mo.st coM.motdy plural in siiri.ification, viz ■ amends means rxchcs, pains (n.ea.wni,^ luburiuu. t-irort). odd.^, alms, wuge» • and the nainoB of cerUih. Hoioucoa; as. mathnnalicH, ethics, ouiirn avomtiCB, metaphysics, polilicH, pneumatics, hydrostatics, &o. 'L^Means and amtnds, rpftM-riu^^ to one object, are ninijular to tuoro thnn one, plural, Mean, in the slnj^ular form, is no«r uned to H.gu.fy thu .niddlo b.-twoen two extreme-. Alms {c.bnc,se, An- glo-baxon) and riches (richesse, French), aro really .sin^^ular. tho.igh now used commonly in a plural sense. ,Vews, fonnerly Bin-mlar or plural, IS now mostly Hin^fular. Molasses and mra.^les. though end- «»g like a plural, nro singular, an.l .o used. Outs \s g-norallv plural ;.9a//.«,, is both .singular and plural, though u di.stinot plur d l.jrm, gallowses, is alno in iiso. 151. The following are shigular in form, but in n,n8trufition vnnons; thu.. foot and horse, meaning bodies of troops, and peo- ple ino.unnv^ persons, are always construed as j.lnral ; cannon, shot »ad, cavalry, infantry, as singular or plural. People {ah. folk) roun"ir. th'"'•''^" '""T"'-' '^ •^"'^ '' P^'*«""«' •« - -^'««tive ^oun in the smgirlar, and sometimes, though rarely, take, u plurul lorm ; as, " Many peoples and nations."— Rev. x. 11. TIJK PLURAL OP PROPER NAMES 162. Proper names for the mo..t part want the plural • but- 168. Proper names with<.nt a title are u.ed in the plural, wh.n they refer to a race or family ; hr. '• The Campbells," «' the ^tuarts; or to several persons of the same name; as. "The welve 6'.s«r« ." or when they are used to denote character; a,, ihe Ctcvrosof Iheage." 154. Proper names with , he litle of J/r,. prefixed, or with any title, preceded by the numeral., /.,., three, ko , pluralize the nam[ 4 I :i I * 1 ;• . m 38 KNGLISH GRAMMAR. and not the title ; as. "The Mra Hou,ard^r " the two Miss Mor- tons ;" " the two Mr. Ilenrya." 165 But when several persons off e same name are spoken of .Ddividnally. and distingnished by a particular appellation, or when persons of different names are spoken of together, ih, title only, and not the na.ne ig made plural .- as, " Misses Julia and Mary Robn.son;" " Messrs. George and Andrew Thomson:" Messrs. Pratt, Woodford, A Co." Thus far, usage and the rule are settled and uniform • but- 156. In other cases, usage is still unsettled. Some writers, per- haps the majority, pluralize the title and not the name • as '' The Mu.e, Brown ;" " the Messrs Harper." Others, of equal Author- ity, regarding the title as a sort of adjective, or the whole as a compound name, pluralize the nam. and not the title • as "The M.ss i?ro«.„._;" nheMr. Harpersr This form is moi-e common in conversation, and, being less stiff and formal, is more likely to rr'^L'^ ^^"^ '"^V^'^V^'lY pluralize both name and title: as. The Mtsses Browns ;" " the Me.s^rs. Harpers:' 157 Names with other titles prefixed, follow the same analogy • as, Lords Wellington and Lynedoch;" "the lords bishops of Durham and St. David's ;" - the generals Scott and Taylor " CASES OP NOUNS. 158. Case is the relation which nouns ^^- t^^^^^^s ^^^^ to the Other words with which they are connected in sense. 159 Nouns in English have four cases, the JSominative, Possessive, Objective, and Independent.'^ used^asUie tuht?f?f ! is d^finedTbTthe best grammarians, to be.' " A noun John come Wo Vhn* "TV -""'''^ ^\",''« * """" "««d independently; as Kear?^fW iT ^ rfaj/ bmnj? cold we did not start.-The «roMe^s' Aiexa feSk 'Pir.;;' S' Flmt^ Ooodeuow. Ha«en. Goldsbury. CllapinM' ETYMOLOGY—ifOUNS— CASE. 39 ICO The Nominative case is the noun or pronoun when used as the subject of the vei-h • Hmf .•= ♦! " ^ ,.,,l!.''7!'r ""^ """" """'"g""" 'he verb «, 6, and Buch verba tadsfor tbe same thing as tbe subjeC, it is also i„ tbetLtT; t.ve,_a», .James ,s a good *„y." ■• Mr. Miller «s elected c^la."- 1«2. Tbe Pomuive case is the noun or pronoun, when used to ... obj:t:f?c;;irv::b':rTv;f'T" "'^" -^^^ - etudiea Greek^> - Tjln /.? f P'^P^^'^""^; ^^> "James lives r 'lie nr"'"" "'^^ ^^ ^^^^^^^^^ ^^ — ^ objee. to Hp'n. f ? ' '"'^ ""^' '^'•^"^^^ ^°^^ ^^'l''"'^-" " He sent to Henry and James and William." haw Joltn J"^"^' '"' " ''^ """ ^^^- "-^ 'Absolutely : «"n,llV . ^"'"^ ^^'^"' ^^ ^''» '^ot overtake him " There IS no terror, Camus, in your threats » "O f^ • of war" •' ,\lJil,.r'. n „ -^ "^ '"'^'^^s- O, tue w««enei "' w.u. iViiUers Grammar." GENEllAL nULES. adJSf; ^!!'' PO-'^f ««« singular is formed by 167. Wlien the plural ends in s the nos S-ls Vr?*^ V •'•dding an aUtroff • not e'nd in f 1 ;, P,""* ''^'"' «ie plural does •idiT. n ' *"?"' *''^ apostrophe and * are added J as, mmV, c/«"Wre«'.s. 11' I M A' m l! 'I M -<•■ •r"# "i'l 40 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 168. Nouns nre thus declined — Nom. Pose, Obi Singular. L:i(ly Lady's Lndv Plural. kdiea Indies' ladies Singular Man Maii'a Mftn Plural. men men'8 men Singular. John John's John 1P9. Proper nntnes for the most part wmit tlie plural. OBSERVATIONS ON THE POSSESSIVE. 170. The '« in the posse<^9ive case is evidently an iibbreviation for the old En.!^lish termination of the genitive in e.s or is. Thus, *' The king's crown " was written, " The Kin-is crowji." That « is not an abbreviation for Ins, as some have supposed, is manifest from the fact, that it is used where his could not be properly em- ployed; thus, woman's, men's, children's, book's. &q., can not be resoived into woman his, men his, children hh,kc. ^ The apoPtrophe (') after s m the i)lural, is not a mark of al bro- viation, but is used, in modern times, merely as a sign of the pos- sessive. l(s use in tlu^ plural is but of recent date. 1*71. When the nominative singular ends in ss, or in letters of a fiimilar sound, though to retain the s after the apostrophe is never wrong, yet, as a matter of taste, it is sometimes omitted in order to avoid harshness, or too close a succession of hissing sounds ; as, " For goodness' sake ;" "for conscience' sake;" so also " Moses' dis- ciples;" "Jesus' feet. 172. NoTE.--Tliere is considerable diversity of opinion and usago on this point. Some few insist on retaining .s after (he apostrophe in every position ; as, "Xauthius's stock of patience."--Z'7i'.s'« anfier k of short IL I " ''y**- (-"liimns, mvhes, nvnimid.-i : what in, o • ht"de,r o,-*tr™'', ''r f'^ '^""•^ «•"?-" , " r ;v' F'^-^^-''fcU ciiecrtuluesy to mirth. l'h«^ «„» mvingnsen wo departed on om- journey Ea e o/ tune, hfe, all wore squandered. L Mi the eountry fc Ml ',fl It., }6 ,- 12 E.VGLISH (GRAMMAR. tc . ...rni '1,.'' [f'ii I P' ten years ago. The AvorJcrs pros])erity ofteu brings in ^0^0^""' l^'' E^^'-cise again, and point out tlie Subject and Verb ^^^^ci^seiitenco, and give the construction 0/ each word. IsT EXAMINATION QUESTIONS, irp Iw?^ r • ? r^^"^ ''''*''^'' ^"^ ^'^'' «" example of each How or NOUNS. examnir^'^ f'^^^.'"'? "^""' ^'^'^'"'^ '-Define each, and give an example.--Into ^vhat classes are common nouns subdivided • Hva -ScHt ^^7^^-T^'?*^ ^^^* ^^^^««« are abstract nouns dMd^J — Pescnbe each, and give an example of each. What are thelV cideuts or properties of nouns. vv nai are tlie ac- OF GENDKR. T)I!T^ ''i gender ?-Why so called ?-What are the eendersf- Define each and give a reason for its name.-What are ?he d?ffe7 OF PERSON. wlfi !f P'^':!^^ J-How many and what persona do nouns have ? -What does the 1st person denote ?-The 2d ?-The 3d ? OF NUMBER. 178. What is number ?_IIow manv numbers are there?- What Gi've'tl.'e 1:r'' ?T-p-e the general rule for forming tTepfu J Ir neat r/ :^ "^ ""'"I' f1 ^"^™ ^^^^^ P^"^''^^ accoE fng to t M«»f- ^ It?— Repent the exceptions under each rulo?— SaU-MonH"""' tl^'^J^-fi-egala'rin the formation of tt SnrpS T,/r,% '^ n '^^'^ ^'^''•^'^^ significations, and a n „rnia a- each?-How do compounds generally form the te^fc?;? examples ^-IIow are letters, nuuTerical IZT. Z' their ih iairT.r ^"^ ^^r^-' '^^'P^?^ ^•'^'^ ^^^er languagesfoTm tneir plural ?_Latin words in um, is, a. us?~Give exanlples ?- i ^-- — .:>..-.. ;^ ETYMOLOGY— ADJECTIVE. 43 Greek wda in a iB.on?-Give examples ?_Give some nouns wbieh usnje is unsettled^, "rsta , ,r^ff:™"w.^!? f ?" ""• '° OF CASK. nom oat ve to a verb ?— \r..,r tv,^; i, -^ , ^"^ "^°'® ^"a'l one pendent case used ?-Form rsentene^w ti, , n "''".'•" "" '"''=• »i.e, an objective, and an"„dc;ctde„t Tnt. "°"""''""'. » P»»««- THE ADJECTIVE, 179. An Adjective is a word used to quah/^ or h„ut the meaning of a noun; as! ' Affooa 1,oy ;" « aad^o^ ;" « fe« doIla;s ;" we lound him 2)oor,'' 180. A „oun is ^„a/(;?.J or /^m^7.J by an adjective, when the other things of he same name. This is done two ways - uj wmcii the objects named are described or distin- .'vs, "A red guisbedj.™ otherrof ■■.r.rs.'rkS' as, -A „. "'ig , an. amusing story." Siieh ar*. n,Li;k' J tives. -^ '^^^^ qualifying adjec- Others merely Hunt, without expre.sin..r anv n.nlitv • «. ..f" ^^'n'^rrcan book ; '-« / J dolhrs;"-^^ week '' ^/<«« year*" "pixri/ fi«,r" f o / week; rf9?n4 adjective?. ^ "^' ^^'^ Such are /mz7e„^ or 44 KN<'MSII (.UAMMAU. i^n M V It! 181. Adjoctivc... m predicutos, may (juulify „„ imiiuiivo, a pro- noun, u clauHo of u .onlcnco usod as a hubatautive, »fec • m " 2i> W".V ia/>/.^.a.^"_'• ^at the rich ar. happ,, is not alwa'v« in..." la*.. hcvonil n^IJootive-s P.wuctinies qualify the same noun : ub a^ smooth, round atone," 1815. A.nuljo.livoiB sometimes uho.I to qualify the meaniut; of another a,ij.<.iv., ilio two forming a sort of con,pound adjootivo • ««. •• A brujht-ruU.\ov-^ "adark-blue coat;" " a c««/.,>.h ball" 184, \\ hou oUu..- parts of .poech are used to qualify or limit n cou! .noun, they perform the part of an a.ljectivo. and flhouKi i»nr>ed as eusli ; thus, Noun ; as, A r,o/,i ring; silver cup. sea water, a nfoue bridge. J ronourn ; as, A he bear ; a she wolf. Adverb.; a., Is the child «W// for verv nge ; the then kin... Prepositions ; as, The above remark ; the uuder feide. 185. On the contrary, adjectives without a substantive are some- times used... s nouns J as. •• God rewards the ^ood, and punishes the W. - ' Ihe virtuous are the most happy." Adjectives used m this way are usually preceded by the, and when applied to persons, are for the most part considered plural. CLASSIFICATION OF ADJECTIVES. 186. Adjectives are divided into various classes corresponding o the various ways in which they affect the meaning of the nouns to wluoh they belong, and the manner in which they are used he most useful general classification is, perhaps, into the two following : — uscdlrevnri' '^-^^"'f; "' '^'''^'^P^''^^^ including all adjectives usca to exp. e.v. . ,iuah(j/ or property/ of the noun. 188- 2. Limidnff or defining adjectives, including all words joined to nouns to dejine, or in any way limit, their meaning. 189. Under the general head of qualifying or descriptive adjec- tives, may be classed:— 1. Proper ndJ,c(ives,^Tho,e dtM'ived from proper uouns ; as Canadian, British. - . ""» , no 2. Verbal or par(ieip;al,~-Tho3o derived from verbs : as sceinr;, wrttlen, having seen. ' ' S. Adoerl)ial,~-Those expressinsr a oualitv ro.ulfiu'' rv^m ♦he ii^-iwu (.f the verb and affecting the meaning of both the KTY MOLOGY — .\ RJECTI VK. 45 //'•'■'•/'. • lie nil.l)..,i Mir .ihrr hri,;l,t:' nay he cIuH30fI :— "' ' I. On^.rrM...«.r./.-Thos., u..,(l in nu,nher)nr, ; first, second, a. /»rY«.7. ««.«.,«/.-Th..«e which do i.ot denote anv exact 4. ^^"^/j^/j/'V^rZ/t;. «,„/,.ra/.,..-Tho.o which indicato the repe- lilinn of tl.o noun ; n s, twofold, ike. ^ 5. m,triU/hj,.--Thuso which pr.int out .../m.a/./,; and Hineir tho objects that mai;e „p a „uudi; Th4 Zl earh «i>ery, either, neither. • i"«T «re, ear/i, to the exdn^ion of all others; They are, lc;s;^'' ""'^" "" "" allegory." ..take what r IrUerro,;a(he.-'Vh. words ^ohich and ../.af joined to nouns n nskinn. questions; as. -what hook ia tha ?' S horse will you hike ?" w/*«c/lt 8. ^arc/am« sooh words „s vmch, ="S. Such adjective's as', ,upen..r, -..firior, ..,„,■«■, »,rW„r, *c.. '//a 48 KNOLI.SH (.WAM.M.VK. Mur^h or many Late Near Far Forth (obsolete) Fore Old any nion. than such wunln as ;)r./Vru/>/. ^,r..;.. , .t . T h y ? ' v. neither th. f..,ai nor iW conHtruoli >f tf.e o..:„,.arative! ^ iriRIXJULAri OOMI'AUISO.Y. 209. Tlie following a(ljo(.tives ar(3 uom- pared irregularly, viz. : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. Good better jj^^t Bad, evil, or ill worse ^yorst ^^"^® less (wwef/mcs lesser) least "lore ,jj^,,t later (irrer/xUtr, latter) latest o/- la.st "^^''^^^ nearest or next ^*^*^'er farthest ^"^*^^ej^ furthest ^«""^e»' forenu,st or first older or elder oMest <./• eldest 210 J/.eA, is applied to things ^v-eighcl or measured ; >nan,, to things hut are numbered ; >nore and ,«o./. t<. b.>th. I^arthe/and farthes generally denote place or .li.tanoe; us, " The/arM.r thev went the more nUeresting was the scene ;" further and Ar//..^ refer to quanUtv or addition; as, ''1 have nothing /^.M,, to «,..• Older and oldest are applied to persons or things, and refer to age or duration; as, "Homer is nn older pool than Virgil-" "The pyramids are older than the pantheon." .^er and ekL (from he obsolete .W) are applied only to persons of the same famil^ and denote priority of birth; as. "An elder brother." Luter and lated have respect to time; ^a^f.r and last to position or order 211. Some superlatives are formed by annexing.- wosf somo times to the comparative, and sometimes to the wo ni Cm Xh up nether nethermost; inner, innermost, or inmost from in ADJECTIVES xYOT COMPARED. 212. Adjectives whose signification does ! i! II! ETlfMOLOGir AOJECTIVK. 49 not admit of increase or diminution, can not properly be compared. These are— 1. Numerala; ns, one, two; third, fourth, &c. 2. /'rofj^r adjectives; as, Evglinh, American, liomau 8. Adjcclivea tbnt denotu /yure. »hape, ov material ; m. circu. tar, nqnare, wooden, &c. ' 4. Such adjectives a8 denoto posture or po«t7,on • ds mrn^»,i: eularjiorizontal. ■ ^ "'''". tia, perpendi- 6. Definitives ; as, ^ac/,, every, all, some, Ao. EXAMIKATION QUESTIONS ON THE ADJKCTIVE Al'clV^^lfvit'Jf 'wh^t'cll:''"' '"■" '^'"""' ""-- ■•»'""' head of Qualifij.- ,„\S ve 7'G;r.5'r'' "'"'" •"«' 8«"«™1 ample of each ki„d Wha. a! ,-„. ''''"""'''"'"'"S "" "- head of Limiting AdjSjGi'"^!„f'''-"'' "'"'«'■.".'= t"="-"'' ample of eacb Wh«f „S- ? »"'I''"CC3 contiiniiig an ex- Wlfatistl^generalruefo! comlt/''r ■""■'' "/ ""'"("'•i.on ( Tl.e rule f.f oompa W aircT ?f ^ r°f °"' 'J''"''!''' Wlmt .leparture f^,m 1^7™ ea' j,l Si "n" °"' '^""^^'' ' How is a lower dear^ if L i • »" ""»""» lomake? 8nn « wi.A j!: ^^ .^'^^'/^ ^f a'jcct.vps d., lint nduiit of rom,,.. :_' « - • ^. u«. ucpuiiurc'B nom luis are authorized ? " -^-lyi- B >''■■' , 1/ " ? ./•"J 1 . fl c iin 50 EMTOLTSH GRAMMAR. !'< imi Irn EXERCISE. In th« followinjf (.fnlnneca pnrw the mljectiroa by m«ntionin« fu .. .'''""■<»'»''>«" th«;)ar/fc«/rtrclimH; thou ooinpiu* thorn • then the .logroe of oompftrigon ; then tho noun to which thor belong ; thm, " Some men are (aUer than others." .Sow« it a limiting ndjecllve. indcHnlte nnnioml, and belon«i to the noun m#n. 7alUr ia a qtialifying adjective ; oompaie.l, tall, taller, talleat ; ooinparativo dogree, and belongs to the noun men. Milton and Cowper aro poets of tho highest rank. The greatest men aro not always tho best. A benevo- lent man helps tho indigent. Each individual fills a space in creation. There aro seven ^^ova in a week. The long grass of tho American pr....ies sometimes catches fire. The distant mountain, seen through tho blue mist, alone remained. Toiling, rejoicing, sorrow- ing onward through life wo go. Heaven opened wide her ever-during gates. Children just lot loose from €chool. The first fleet contained three hundred men. Numbers are expressed by ten Arabic characters. Few young people like seclusion. I have some fine trees in the garden. He has a threefold duty to perform. He performed each part with the most 'consummate skill. Head this lecture four times. That book belongs to vou, this belongs to me. The former lecture was the best. What time the year puts on her bloom thou fly- est the vocal vale. Unto which promise our twelve tribes hope to come. "Which road did he take. What man do you mean. What havoc thou hast made, foul monster, sin ! He is never overbearing. This house is colder than yours. I saw her several times. The best fruits grow in warm countries. England expects every man to do his duty. Which of these large oran- ges will you have. ^ Go over this exercise again and point out the Verb and Subject ID each sentence, and give the cSnstmction'of all tho other words pareing the nouns in full, according to the form already given. ' PRONOUJS'S. "214. A PHONOTJN is fi wnrrl iiQArl in cnrkrilxr ii At men. Few ETYMOLUtiY — PRONOUNS. 51 the place oi' a noun ; as, ** John is a |^ood boy ; he is diligcMit in his studios." 216. The noun for which a pronoiiti is used, i« cnlloil its antt" cedent, becnime thn piDtioiin roft'r« to It as previomly mentiontd, or in lomo way uiulemtood. 210. Pronouns of the tliird person luo usod in writhijf and •peakinjr, to prevent tho frt-qiMMit nnd nwkward repetition of th« nonn. Thus, without tho pronoun, tho ubovo f xampio would rend, •• John iH ii f,M>od boy ; John Ih diligent in John't studies." A pro- noun is Bometimos UHed instead of nuother pronoun ; as, " You and / must Attend to our duty." 217. Pronouns may bo divided into Per^ aorial, Relative, Interrogative, and Possess- ive, I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. "218. Personal Pronouns are simple sub- stitutes for the names of persons and things, having a distinct form for each person. They are either simple or compound, SIMPLE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 219. The simple personal pronouns are J, yow, thou, he, she, it ; Avitli their plurals, toe, ye, you, they, 220. Of theee, /Is of the first person, nnd denotes the speaker: you 18 of the second, nnd denotes {ho person spoken to; he, she, it, are of the thud, and denote the person or thing spoken of. 221. TLq pronoun /denotes the speaker, and you tho person ad- dressed, without previous mention, or even knowledge of their names, the persons intended being sufficiently indicated by their presence, or some other circumstance. The pronouns of the third person refer to some person or thing previously mentioned, or easily understood from the context, or from the nature of the sen- tence. 1 ^}i' ?'^- '^f' *'' ""^ '''^^' '*''° frequently used as general terms in the beginning of a sentence, equivalent to " tho person." &o., without reference to a noun going before; as, "He [the person] mi loveth pleasure shall be a poor man." ••How far is it fthe uiSbiinC'ej to tiie city." . A nu.- ' 53 EWOMSH nHAMMAR. man.} " ^' l'"«'l'« * rencb on, or llle Gornao 224.. The Accidents of personal pronouns, like noun., are. Gender, Person, Number, and Case. They are thus declined •— 1. M, or 7^ I 2. j1/. or i''. fil/iasc. Fern. Neut. SINGUMR. He She It Poss. my your his her ita Obi nie you him her it Nom. We You Thev TheV They PLURAL. Pois. Obj. our us your you their them their them their them OBSERVATIONS ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS however, t.ke, :^ u^ tr 7o ' fntf7'^' ^' *^,' P^"'"*'^^' ^' «^^" ion of critics and m-omi!. 1 "'^^^^'' ^"^n^a'-J^e, and the opin- m. is thus declined L ^^« P'"^^^ ^^^y°" ^^ -Idom used. Nom. Thou SINGULAR. thy or thine thee Ye or you your PLUEAL. Poss. Ohj. „ . _„. you or ve ju„_-..'^' . ' '*'® simply the forms of the nnsa^^a.-v^ «..«- ^c iHc pui-sonui pronouus. ^ " '^'^^^^ "* The/r.^ of these views, though the one adopted by the author ETYMOLOGY PRONOUNS. 53 of this grammar, is, we think, obviously incorrect, and failheat of all from tbe Irutii. To the second view, there is ninch lesa ground of objection, but, in its practical application it is not satisfactory so far, at least, us the long forme, mine, thine, Ac. are concerned ; because these words, as used in construction, ahvavs represent a noun in tbe nominative or objective ca?e, so th.it, if they do inchule tlie jt)oss«fie>r, they certainly, ajso at md for, and include the thing possessed. If wu must choose which of the things represented by them, shall determine their character, surely their office as representing the thing itsefj, is of more importance in the construction of the sen- tence, than Iheir office as possessive case, which is, grammatically, but a mere aj-pcndage to the thing possessed. As well, indeed, might you call your house a door plate, because it ivclndee, the door plate which tells whose it is, as to call these words possessive cases, because while standing for the thing itself, they iaaicate the possessor of the thing. "We, therefore, adopt the third view, as being more simple, and according better than either of the others, ■with the facts and necessities of the case. The reasons for this coDclusibn will be found more fully stated in the Appendix, to which the reader is referred — C. Ed. 227. The pronoun it i3 used in a variety of ways:— 1. Properly it is used instead of a neuter noun, or any thing used as a neuter noun ; as, *' i'/e is short ; it should be well improv- ed." " James is a good scljolar, and he knows i<." 2. It is used as an indefinite subject of the verb to be, followed by a predicate in any person or number ; a?, " It is /;" " It iayou ;" " It is ihei/;* Ac. 5. It is used in the some manner after the verb to bo in interroga-? tive sentences ; b.'., " Who is it r What is it r Ac. 4. It is prefixed a^ an introductory subject to such verb as to be, to happen, to become, and the likef referring to an infinitive mood, or substantive phrase, which follows the verb, and is its true subject ; as, " It is an honoi' for a man "t H .'iouii, it is the objective 230 ^r T'''''''' ^'^^^^^AL PRONOUNS. t.c. ami are added to' heir r^.nec v "Z ^ ^^ *""' ""P^''- used instead of them • as " T .;,?;;?,' ^T'"' P'^nouns, or aro Tu the ohjeotive th y'n.^ »4Sf ^n^ '•' ';/^"»*^// «h«H come ' hewefh /urn out a sepulchre or^h "1^1^//"'' '*' "' ^* **>*' to ™ ™ ar Sir"- — ■•'••">!."..". •"«, Ac. • ''°"'" P"»noun ; as, ony ont, mnt mt, m QUESnoj^S ON THE PEKSOIIAL PRONOU.VS. • ?°"s°? p.™""-. i-iuto wS'iZ'^ff. r^"" "i" ^«>' fi'fi" ix_ -,. - -' v^^.u, jnu. used ; — iix^ni:^^ t _ . . ~ ""«w fwiamngfor a neuter noun what mavVC.'' •^■""' .«"« '-besides ETY MOLOGY PRONOUW8. 55 10 nnd (rip i>uld never >; without '' before a ! objective 'f//; itself »e called uses— th« eiupha- 8» or aro ill come," it is also elf." oy that reads;" "The dog that h^\'\i%\'' " The Z>w>Z: ^/t^/ was lost " (748). 215. TPliat is applied to things only, and is nsed when the antecedent from its indefi- niteness is necessarily omitted ; as, ** Take what you want." 246. What, .'19 used in ihU exitinplp, is by in:uiy fjnimmarians called Ji Compound lidntivr, equivalent in" thing which, that ii, including both the antecedent jviul the rcUdive. There appears,' however, (o be no necej=sity for resorting to such an expedient to explain the use of " what," It appears to be used when the thing referred to is too indcfiiiite to be named, and can only be introduced by using a clause depcribing it. The -whole clause in that case represents a noun in its relation to the sentence with which it is connected, and sliould be treated as any other substan- tive clause, or noun sentence, as such clauses niay properly be called. It misht be as^ked, what is gained by calling " what" a compound relative standing for " thing which T In \he example ** I hear what you say," the clause " what you say" is used as the direct olijective of the verb hear; and in the sentence, "Who steals my purse steals trash," the whole sentence " who steals my puree " is nominative to the verb " steals.^' Is any '* thing''' more required by either grammar, sense, or perspicuity ? Does not the flame principle apply to such sentences as to the following: Let us considei- (how nmeii depen^Is upon it) ; do you know (by whom that house was built); I discovered (who was neglecting his duty). In each of these sentenc(!S, the wh jje clause stands as the objective to the verb in the principal clause. To snpply the word thing or any othm* word, would seive no other purpose than to impose upon the cfgpeodent clause (he servile duty of describing the usurper of its own rightful position, inUead of occupying the |>08ition itseH. Why nut, on the same principle of analysis!, before parsing It, tarn the sentence, "I do not know who it can be," into " I do not know the persoii who it can be." 247. TI;: real question, with respect to "what;* as thus used, is whether itshouhJ not be cla-ised as an Lidrfinile Relative. It con- nects clauses as a relative, but has no teference to anything ia the previous clause as it^ antecedent. — C. Ed. A if ii'sj ■;.,^:. ft8 RNCJI.Isn (.KAMMAR. i watch •' '''''A.. >1so.,>.Hom,t !,,,,.« uBo.l inn, niuinornomly flimilni- lake w/MiA yod ploiiBo. •* ""•"". /^m J- .,Kn,H.n„on ; «., <• Think .rh.trvfr von plen.c." •■ H'W,./, th.nki.so .lo,>« Inn, ^n-oat injn.fico." "Soovo,-" i, .on,otimo« tjuMvo nn,l .n,ph„.lc ; hb, •• U7,„.o.,rr ^vil^ lot hin, c.V.'L now'^d':?;:" '• ""' •" "''* ^"'^^ ^'^ ^^•'''>«^«'' - ^^•'— «••. <- 250 In oUl w.JlingH, (l,o itntoro.lont wonl is .lomonmoH ox- proM..I ntl,o,- Wfore or nfto,« tl,o oo.nponn.l ,-oIative. for Iho .ako •hftll not he oHondoil n, nu\"— F»^. //,7;/^. .< ]V/,o^'- will l..f Ann take tln> watorof hf.." Thi.'nsnffo, low." ^ j,' W ofte,, nso( lH.fo,e .nl>« ant,ve«, as a sort of in.l.-tinito adjective; ton fllrL??"'^'' 'Z ^'^'\7^r ^^^'^ "^^^ ••>'•" " ^yfx^tfv/l- oonrs^ plHcea botwoon ,chot, Wa.A, or ,r/m... and ,ofver ; «.. •• 1^/,.,^ course *onrr "-•• I.^o wAow house «o«,-*r ye enter." 252. The ofllco of the rolativo is twofold : .l«!:c^' J? fo;;i«^ti»"^8 merely addiikr or descriptive, and conno (8 it. ttZJ'^' V .""Kr^''''V*' f^»>- 1'»« r'>'T'>He of ftnther deseri b ng, 7^Tvlril'::^ •'•;/*'"' "^^'^^' V ■^■^"'^"•^ <^«""cctive.nearl*; equivalent to and y,nh a perj^onal pronoun he, she, it,Ao.: as L ght,. a body «^A,M moves xvith gleat eeleritV 0< Light is a body, and tt moves with great eelerity." ^ 2. It is more co,nmonly restrictive, and connoctf its clause TTith the antecedent, in order to modify or restrict its meaning. Thus used, the relative with it« clause is equivalent to an adjec- tive; as, "Every thing which has life is an animar~''Kve,y /tV/na thing IS an animal." When use.i in this way, the relative can not be resolved into and with a personal pronoun, for wc can not say, ' Every thing is an animal, and it hjvs life." 26S. The relative >rho and v^kh .nre used in both ponses. ^'ThaC 19 used ID restrictive, more commonly than in addition clauses. '- . i,X^!JSS,^mzzr. i IP iimnnor rIoIo your y"iinilnr. olivfl UH, ind wlint, and ttuh- Whoever I'luotimoa (liHtri- •mo," fiQ. loever, {« U\\(\H ex- llio !>ako rhoxofver • will, let • you do, ever, nre Ijootivc ; r oourso inetiincs " What ►Ibid : nc (8 its scribing, , nearly ito. ; as, gilt is a clause cnuing. 1 adjec- Y living eaa not ot say, ThaC •08. iSm ETVMOI.OOY PRONOUNn, 5li 5?n4. Ill 1''hkIIsIi, tlip rolntire \m\ni nlwnyo Ito in Mn'»nfn»»HPnlnno§ uilh itn imif(»('il»'nl., mid, If lOHliiclivp, in oIuhp (Mumpidinn with ii. In liiitin, \\w r«'lutivfi linn oflcii ilB (intoopiJiMit, in n pu'ppdcinjf non lollop, mid oomu'otod with it. hy it oonjntioHvp forni, VVIioii tliin in the oHso, il pIkmiIiI ho roiidoipd into I'lntrJiuh hy ii doiiHni«lint| vn. or ppiBonrtl pronoun. 'Ihin dillliMi'ncp »»f idiuiii Rhoiild ho ciut'fullj tiintkod lij (inBPi«ttl utmJHiitn. vr»ft, In Buch BontPiiPPB nn the followlii|r -"Hhim Huph at nr« r|. oloun" — " Solid Buoh «i» you liuvn " — Huiim frnunnmiianH consi(i<»f lh« wonl (X» ft relfttivo: in lli« flvHt oxuinplc hr the nonihmtlvo to are ; nnd in tli« peoond, an tho ohjeollvo, Hjovprnod hy hnvf. ()lli«ri ro^iird It, in all nuoh Poiitpnoo<>, an a ciiiijuiiction, and the «xp^fl^. fiioiiB M elliptical— to ho Bupplii'd thun: ''Hhiin Buoh an |Mu)fli! v/ho) aiT) vioioUH." — " Hond Biioli fid | thoup which) ^uy\ liavf.." It. in of little itnpoitanco which view ia takon. If tnlien m h relutivt, tho ollipniR is lost Bl^ht of, an in many other cdiptical foinm of expiM. ninn, and the laiiguagn taken jiint an it einndn. 9TII EXE 110 18 10. Write on the blaakhoard or niato a list of noiinn, ariangpij In a eoluinu on the left hand Bide, and write after nieh itn proper relative ; thui, " The man— who ;" " Tlio hird—whixhr Ir. the following BcntencoB. puBo the relatives in the following nmniier, and tell whether the clause in which tiiey are found in additive or restrictive:— ^^ The hoy who itudieB what is uaeful will I improve." "Who" in a relative pronoun used in a restricti chuiBO, third Bingular, to agree with its antecedent "hoy," nnt noniiiiRtivo case to the verb " fltudioi."— " What " Ib a rcktivt pronoun, third, Bingular, to aufree with an indefinite aotpcedent and nominative to the verb is— the wliole clause being the objective to the verb etudiea. A man wlio ia gonoroua will bo Ijonoiired. — Qod, hy whose kiudnesa wo live, whom wo worahip, who created all things, ia eternal.— Tiint ia the book which I lost.— He who ftteals my purse, steals trash. — This ia tho boy whom we met. — This is the man that did it. These are tho books that you bought. — Tho person who dona no good, does harm. — Tho woman who was hurt, ia well. — This is tho cat, that killed the rat, that ato tho malt, that lay in tho houao that Jack built. Whoever steals my purse, steals trash. — Whoever does no goou, docs iiann. — ?? liatcvor puriilcH tlio heart, fortifies it. Whatsoever yo would that men should da to you, do ye to them also.— Whoever sins, will suffer. tm ■'fiji {J' ■-, . ,fi ■J "■ C m 111 OO riVriMMtl «Jlt4MM/\U. iHltt)'t Il.u,. v\l„M'v,M- lo\rH»nP. Now whivl.mu'vcM'Oo.l ItllMl Maid (o 1 1 n'O, ilo. il tit (ho lollow njr "JMid'HcrM, wliitiovri' it th»« n liUivo itttil imt«M«il,Mit lor il Ht «t» OOIII|HMIIM| ii'luliv |o ill nn-r wiih yrui ovory lliiujr wlnoli vmi HIM». MMMi iniHiiilonuiMl. who l,>Iil Huoh II nloi'v, Iwih'l ^,,.,,, thiiiji (luit i« uorth »l.mi^r al, all, {« sZviUd Any llmi^ thnt. ^liv^»H ptiiii lo otln'i'M. d iinnic of" ph'asiiro. Ilvorv oiio wli.v j, bo a \H)i\r mail. A ny oiu» oiiif^ wt'li. — OH(MVl»H not llio ovcH pl«M»Hnn», will 4. On ovt>i' Ih^N ixin-l MO M^-iiin himI iliHtiii.{iii^h ho» ««M»'»' «•"« «h |M'iii|,-nt pn>|.o.i!ioii«. nhow how (h.-y ni it«Hl pnm. ihii w..i«l« tn onoh in iho okUm- in whi,.)i ih III. !NrMhUO(JAnVM PUONtXINM. 25(1. ff /if), trhich, mihI W/rr/. wl wcoii tlio prill. oy nirt oounih'ldil. '}■ occur wiUi inier \n\ nsini N V(M'l)s irt nskiui;- (jurstiouM, nro callod ro Proffonffs: jin, - //7/f> is 1 lu>roP" -" //7/fr/f(li(ihr — ** Hyiich will you takoP a 1. II*Ao niul wAiVA. Hio ,lrrtliiu».l liko tlio rolulives. SA« III .^n^Rt)on^ wA.) !« I'qnivalont to Wm^ *tnl tP^int I j«'«'(iv,«»;ns, " Winoh h„olt wivo rt ,MMm lollovyoi^, ih^y .uonot |.ro.mu,i« I or ih i'A^». UV.o npplioB (o poraoua will yvMj i»k,> t ml 11(1- oil in<:». ly ; \nhich tiihl «?;*,«/. I , lo |M>rrtoni 9'>0. An npplio,! lo f^ for il IfA »0 tllniv j.htiil ; trfttlt. r»|' (lio ol ofsoim. «.!,„ ^nq.^i^r^ for Iho muno; wA,VA .1 wnM^ihat hooKr'-'«Mr. \V„h9t A'w.jA Wvlv.t 1 r. — "rt/ Id \U>V iiiiii«'t«M- or otuMipnIion > up rr"-~" U'AiW* of1,h.»int"-. lo\i 'irtl. Tl-c Piino pionoiiiH n'«o«l otvpiiphur. n «l» poll. <» it ol.iiiso, t-r in what io« pnnsivoly. In tho hojriniiinjr of in A way wiiidi. in mi inil.piMnlotit ol piopfily licit hot iutfrroijrtt IB imIUmI iho iiiiliuvl on in <» ti initio, wou M I ipU'WHUII (|,|». ;o II (In col ipuM- u port of tiilrfiuitf It iiii vunv \v«^ woul.l pr. for u, (,»!, f»yvi,or «T/„/i>f,». ill iho iimnl vo pron nil, ill), I |I,i^ i„ ,1 Woniii '• »rAr|/f»frr." it WiU lo ho.Ht t!!v5*«5att*l hy a 0.. usimlly onU.»| ixaiiipli' 0. n>» w.' hjivo tilioiuly Bjii.loitl «»inpoiin.l rt'lii(ivf.~ \ kiH>w ilio |u'i'«nii who wri'lo Mint |».|,tof ;" ilmk Ig, j jiiii ii*'<|tiiiiiiioirwiiii iiiiii. ftidf/tnU* Itifrtthir -."I lumw w7iii. lUrii KXKIiniSK 1. ruliil, out, ill wliiili nl" llin fiil|* Uio ohji'i-livM of lliii »* InuU. To vUimn did you j»ivo tliiiL binili f VVIi;.(. I do, Ihoii Jmowc^JiL not now.— Wlio yiui arc, vvIimI. you iir<», or to wlioin voir lu'lon/j. no oiiit kiiowH. Wlii'il. wlinil I do/ -Who biiilfc thntluiuHi'P Do you luunv by wlioui timt houH(» wiih Imill/r- In tluit Mio iiuin who huilt Lliiit houKC ? Whicli hook Iti youiH F Do yuu Know which book ii yotirH P i mw II l)ook whicli wmt nan! In ho yoiirrt. I know which book Im yoiirn.- - Whiil in mo in dink, illu muic. us crooked, can not bo matlc HJniight. VVIiiit \h What wanlin^:, can not bc^ numbered. What in wanted?— T know what itt wanted. Writ o PI iilciift-n, I'll! It of wlili'li pIiiiII ooninin oiif iif llioti) pro liHUim ill (iiif i.r (illirr i>t llir ■..- (lilV.'i «iil, n<>u-n<. ClnHmly (ii«'.n HiMi- (iMH'tB iiitii |niiuM|»ul aiiil iK'iM'iiilonl, timi give iIim ('..iMtiuolKm ot llui Wuiilrt III «'i((ili. roH.-^ICSSIVK I'UO.NoUNa <.}(*■> fV fhiiic, /i/.v, //rT.v, ll|l'i. 02 KNUMnil UHAMMAH. EXAMINATION gUKsriONM ON TIIK HKLATIVh' INTKUUOOATIVK I'UoNlJllNS. AND -To wimt ,, (hnt nnd tr^.w npplifcl ? -I„ (|,o ■..nt.M.r PrU wlinf «,v. A word may express aof/«;, or luing^ n.id not iru verb ■ or AND r.TYMOMMiV VKHH, «i.') Wm w«, for iiiMiiiiRf, " I x^Uli »,M Wfirk." "'I'lm l.uy'n HHiniiiTof rf«///»(/; ifl Imil." "Tlint luMfc rnnniHtf Miitnigli fli.. ndd \n n ihii> luilmnl." " Onll Hint \my nildnif liy lli« winihm," Ato. In l,h«i« «>xi)in|il<r «lir«M(t,|y or |iirl)M, in respoct of tlin Honsr^ thoy oxproHs, an^ dividnd into two kinds — 7Wm«i. live and Infranmtivc. 2()7. A Transitive vorb is ono vvliicli ex- presses an action that passes fromtlio aj:ifont or door, to sonn^ person or \\nn\^ wliicli stands as the object of tho verb in the Ac- tive Voice, and the sii])ject of the verb in. the Passives Voice ; as, "* Jiimes struck Wil- liam."— -" William loaa struck by James." 268. It will ho Bern by the nhove example, that thnre nro two wnyH of expressing tho nnmn idea, in tho first, tho doer of the act— "JnmeH " — standH as tho snhjcct of tho Verb, nnd tho porwrn to whom thenotiH.lono— «'WI!llnm"— stnndH ns tho object of (he Verb. When this form m used the Verb is in the- Active, Voice. In the second, the i)erPon to whom the act h' done.—" William"— stands as the ■ubjoct of the Verb, und the person who does the acfc,—" James"-— BtandB connecte(l^ wjth the Verb, as the object of the preposition " by,." V/hen this fu: ui is usthl the Verb is in the Panhivo Voice. 269. Voice, then, can only apply to tran- ihm m i .kit m r ii ■■■ ,t>Wf'iil 64 I'NOI.IMI <;UAIVfMA t{. r sWrn /v*r/;.s as it is iiuM'oly a. lonn iisrd lo (lisliii-uish iH'Lwoon llipso two methods of oxF*^ssin- 11,0 sMniP idoa. In tli(» ^,,/^,;^ f^oice, tho subj.^ct is ivpivsiMilcdas acting upon tho ohject, and is, tlun-clbiv, tln^ a"ont- m tin, Passive Voice, the suhjeet is repi-c^son^ •te(i as heini,- acted npon hy the i\o,r J':';:il' n» l.y tl.o M'lirto cxpifSHirl. / »"yo'»i. an well, . prl'lm:-"'"'' "''^''"'•"»^'"' "'•'^" ^""" ""-' 'V.O fonn« of ok- 1. Wo onn, by {!,« ^rw alone, .iiic.t ..ttoMlio,,, rl.iollv. rifhor l<> * u; o./or. <.r U. (hat, which i. «./.,/ .//..N-to thn |o„n V hy uh „ mmt; tho p,.KMve-^"| he w..ni.n wan crrnfJuy iUuV' ' ^ 2. l?yinoM„H of tho pasmvo voice, wo nro ul.Ie to Mnto « firt rrt^'^h^ln;^;;^'^''"'^""'^ -vi.o„..o.ei;:';^ir::ri^l;;:: «. IJv thi« ,„oa„s. n!so, vo hovo a variety, h,m1 of cotirnc, nchoioo oxpn s.,«„, nn.l n,ay. at plrasm-... „.c tint which to na a,^ei .« fluMuost, pcivpuMious, convoniinl. oi- rlr-unt appeal h J1]. Some ir nsitivo vo.hs, nio eomoiiinoH lu^cd to .>xnn>«H an r tl.o objc t- as "Jh,8 Heutoncu tloos not ren.l well"— "Tho uoithoi- n.'/;„^ ... : ^ >»('anin<,' m such siMitonccs. ia ^; ' 'Tv"''"' '^ '<'/'"-vs'../..,7H i. ,Ho<| toconvovm. a iyo nuS j- »Dg; a^. \ oar alter year it steals till all arefrd- 212. An IniransUive Verb h one which makes an assertion, witliout expressing ac- ion as done to anything; as, -The horso / i rrvMoLOGY — VEun — mode. 64 KXAMINATION QUESTIONS. Wbftt in u verb?— Why i* it not Hufliciont to my, a verb in n word which nii^nifit!H to b«, \o do, or to Hiifftr /—(Vivi' fX'trnph'ii of woi(h in N«nt<'ii you under- Htiifid th« wordi nsntrt and njfinn, nn usod in the dofiiiilion of the vcrbl—IIow will you distiiiKiii«li between n vorb and a vorbnU— • hi roHppot of Iho tmliiro of th.i lu'linn, into what chiMscs do you (H- vido vfibsf— How do you define « trniisitivo veib /—How many Tvayn two th«?io of prespntinij tho u!,'ent or (h>or of an not expicsaed by ft hiumitivo veibt— lilu.tinto thin l»y nn cxanipUv— How ninny vrayn arc Ihern of present in;,' lli(> ihirij,' to whi(!h lluf action oxpreBg. od by ft tnuiHilivovorb is doiu'?— Iiluntratothi(4 l»y an example.— Jlow i» thiMiijent anil object prcaented in the .'Ir^f/ff Voice, and how in the 7'(M,«ii/* Voici- ?— Why cannot ftii Intrmisitivo verb be Uiiod in the raanivo Voice /—What h always uncd with the vorb to l)«, Co foini the TaMnivo Voice ?—(Jivo an example.— Giro an exftinploof ft vorb, used in ft Bonse, which ia properly neitliur Ac- tive nor I'asBive.— (live an example of u verb in the Active form, UBC'd In ftl'ftasive Pcuae.— Of the passiue/orm usal in ftn ftciivo BcnBc* 11th EXKRCISE. 1. In tho words expressing action, distinguish between verbs and verbals. 2. DlBtinguisb between transitive and intrnuHitivo verbs, 3. Stato which of the tranailivo verbs arc in Iho Active Voice which in the Tassivo. ami which have an active form, and pftHsive ineftning, and which have, properly, neither. Ho^ Htruck mo. Wo ought not to complain of our lot. They wore secMi by us. Ho sat by llio waysido. I teach my Hiator muHic. Tlio wine tastes aour. He wishes to do light. I have been oflcred a situation. Let our friends know, llomulus built Kome. Who read last? The sun is rising calm and bright. The serpent having devoured his prey, slept. Ho undertook to thwart me. I am happy to answer yes. Homo is a place which must bo loved' by all. ^ AVnto ft sentence containieg a transitive verb, and nn intransi- tive verb— 11 verb in tho passive voice — a verb with an aciive form and passive meaning— ft verb used in a sense neiLher active nor passive. MODE. 273. Mode is a term used to denote the *f^: 'H k ,t> mi i; ?? i : I ■ '■' J I m Jil I'i ENGLISH GRAMMAR. manner in which the verb is employed. 274. Verbs have five* modes ; the Indi^ cative, the Subjunctive, the Imperative, the Infinitive and the Participial. 275. The indicative mode is that which mdicates or declares, or asks a question; as, He can learn ; Does he learn ? Can he /^arw ? 276. The Indlcalive Mode has two forms; the cow- wow form and i\\Q potential form.f «,.!L!' ^^^ ^o^^rit^n form of the indicative mode is that which ^rXt-'-'TS^^^^^^^^ ^^ '"^ interrogation; a,. "He .'.. .«.^!^i '^?* Po;«n«a? /orm of the indicative is that which expreg. MS a Jeclaration or asks a question, and also implies possibility, itbertt/ power d^ermination, obligation, necesaity, etc ; as, «H« can walk ; "-" We must return; "-« What would i\xey C^ef - ^ofJif^^f ®^*^'°^/^ *^® common form of the indicative, it will g*. tiorf!?^^! "" ^^'IX^"'^"/ {o employ merely the term indicative tTe%^:inxSf ^ *'^ p^'^"'^^^ ^^^-' ^ ^-^--*« ^^ - « aI^^'^T " «o™etimea used for trou/t/ be or «Ao«/rf 6^; as, Ah 1 what were man, shou ld Heaven refuse to hear ? " « The potential mode is also rejected by Jamipson W w«r" ^^o-tlr '^'.rf- in? J P wllson Wi'lwS h'oP'1^^ Pearce. Ross, Nutt- Sfe Cardell S«r K^ Dearborn. J. Flint. D. Adams. Judson, j-ue, varaell, butler, Balch, French, Spencer, and many others. ETYMOLOGY — VERBS — MODE. 67 280. Had is also occasionally employed for would have or should have; us, "Had thought heea &\\, sweet Bpeech had [would havel been denied." — Young. "' 281. The subjunctive mood is that which implies condition, supposition, or uncertainft/; as, "If he had the opportunity, he would improve rapidly ;"— «' Take heed, lest any man deceive you.'* 282. Every verb in the subjunctive implies tvro propositions ; the one principal, and the other subordinatei The subordinate clause is usually preceded by the conjunction t/,— subjoining it to the antecedent, or principal clause, on which it depends. Thus, ia the sentence, "I will remain if you desire it," the dependent clause, "j ju desine it," is preceded by the conjunction if, which subjoins it to the principal claupe, " I will remain." 283. The condition of a verb in the subjunctive is sometimes expressed by transposition, without the aid of a conjunction : as from • "'* ^°"°^*^ ""^ inend^B, he would have been saved 284. The subjunctive mode, like the indicative, admits of the potential form ; as. " He might improve, if he would make the ne- eessary effort." 285. The subjunctive mode does not differ in form from the in- dicative except occasionally in ihe present tense ; and in the verb to be, in the present and past. vvS'w P-iraing that only should be called the subjunctive mode, which has the subjnnctive form. When the indicative or potentia is used subjunctively, it should be so stated. potential 287. The Imperative mode is that which iS used to command, exhort, entreat or per- mit; as, " Go thou. ''Stud^ diligently.'* '' Forgive us our trespasses." " Depart in peace.'* ^oo. xiie mjmitive mode is a verbal noun, usually distinguished by the sign " to;' and expressing action or state, as a thing ab- ' 'it 1 ^ ^4 08 ENGLISH URAMMAR. Hf ft:r ■ Hi. l!'< stractly considered ; as, ** I love to skate,'* ** To attempt it would be vain." "A desiro- to learn is praiseworthy. 289. The infinitive activt by nn anomaly not uncommon in other lnngUil^;o8, is soniotimos naod in a passive houbo ; uh, "Yon aro to blame" (to be blamed)—" A Iioufo to let"—^' A road to make"—- " Goods made to sell " — '• Knives to grind," fee. 200. The Part icqnal mode embraces those forms of the verb called Fartlciples, when used as verbal nouns and verbal adjectives : as, " There is a boy amusing himself.'* "i>c- voted to study, he soon excelled." " On seeing mo he tied." " There is glory in dy- ing for one's country." TENSE. 291. Tenses arc certain forms of the verb, which, serve to point out the distinctions of time ; or, more correctly, Tense is the change in the form of the verb to show time and state, 292. Time h naturally divided into the pm^t, (he present, and i\ie future. The pafit includes all that goes before tho present; the /luwrtf includes all that comes after the present; and the prtsitit, ftiiotly speaking, is the point in which tho past and future meet, and which has, itself, no .space or continuance. In grammar, Lowever, tho present is not regardoil in this strict sense, but as extending to a greater or less ptriod of which the pass-iug instant forms a part, ; as, this moment, hour, day, week, tkc. In each of these, an act, Ac, may bo expressed, either as going on and im- per/tct, or hs completed and pcrjWt, and, hence, there are nix .Teufes, three to express time siiuphf, and three to expres both time and fitale. 1"h > simple tenses— that is, the present, past, and fnlnre, arc used for tiie Hrst, and express mertly t. e time of the act; the other thre?,— tho pre.sditpcrfect. past-perfect, aiu\ fuiureperfcct, exi)re3S both itsf and 6tat<\ 29". The time is shown by the auxiliary verb have. Thus, in tho present perfect tho present o'f ''have" is used—in the past perfect, the KTYMOLOOY VKRB.S TJKN8ES. 69 pnH flf havfi— /W ,R imod. and hi ihafutnrB pcrfoof, tho future of have-.- »hn/l hme ih u,e,|. Th« nlaU i<9 Bhowti hy the »cr/iw« p(trticiplitmper/e,t or perfect, niir.l heuce chesw n;irLiciplei may b»' used in a Beutfiice which dcnoteB any time. Tlius wo ■©• how a(hiii.HbIy tho anxiliaiy and and tho perfect participle aro iKluptfd to forming the perfect tcnumi. ' ar(3 : — lime only. Iiavo walked *' — 21)1. The six tenses r resent, '♦ I w;^//j "-- TreHent'iJcrfect, " I time and state. /"««/, ** I loalkcd "—time only. Pasl-perfect, *M Jiad walked"— time and state. Future tense, '' I shall waW—ihno only. Fature-perfeot, ''I shall have loalked'"— both time and state. 25)5 Bosides tliesQ six grarnmfttical tenses, there are numcrouB other distinctions of fimo, which arrt expressed by various modi- lymg words and phrases; ns, "I will go n/j»»«(/ «iilrt»lvo linto ofn nUnto nHion. (I»M \n, ..f mm „.Ml..|i fHUn-inUlhn lln).» of ».p.« «lii.«|, will lio |Mv».,'tif ivl, i||,< timp nIVnic.l ♦<>; nn, •• \Vlun wplt'oinn" *" JVo «hn!l «.'< »Miv l.'ttf»^« n<« nomi «« tho p>wf, rtfHf'i»»''--" lio will lUl i'V«»n ono I \vl\oiu) lio mff/«,'' ,Vo. " No l«i>r mourn foi- mo wlu«n 1 t?m .lortn( forms n pjirl ; ns, " 1 hnve sold my IvorNo'* -««| havf> frry/^rr/ mix miloM io- dnv" — 'Molm hiis h<>(*ti lumy Mum \vook '' — "Many good lun>ks hav(* Arm pH^ilishvii i\m ooniiirv«"i ft/ S(^9, Th<» ^Itti, of tho tUTBont, piM-root U uavw - Inn.M'lo.l in (ho «iH>nm>on ntjle, Artty, Anrc, Ati«, nml (n Iho «o/..mf» M,vl»». Ant-^ A,i,«^ *««A. •' «0.1. Tn ihn n«0 of lhi« t«>n«o, it ninHoin not how K»ntf w^v, ih«» •«»t. rof.»v»-«.a lonmv hnv0 hoon |>oi forniotl, if it wrtH in u i>oii,u» rwiohijijr to nn.l «>nihinoinn iho pivnont, of n jmuI ofwhiohiflnot ypt i>«»t I M. " Mnny ,npoovpvl<>« in Mm mtn Art».^ Wn m.i./^ hIoop th« ,lftv««f m«on." (hnt Ip, in (h«> porioit lonoltinji t^oin Ihut tiinr Jo tho pvo»Pnt. t^n tho oth«i- hnnd. if th« \\n\« of nn m num- liottP,t ii. pn»|, una «h<«»9 not inoht»U» tho propont. tliin tonwo oau not U \\P^i\ hoxvov0«« mnv tho tin»o nit\v ho. Thnn. wo o.\n nol, pvo- l>i»ily »r\v. " I Aftf* mn your lV;on»l n nunnput. niro i" but. " 1 mu your tViouil,'* »(i>. ' S04. Th»» touBO i« n«p,l to pxproM nn not cv ntnfo oontinupit ihn>ugh ft ppiio.l of tiuip rortohintf to tho proKont ha, " llo A.i* •WfW grAmmur «ix nuMithn"-" llo A,.i bttn nhnonl; Inowl nii y«*rik.** ' ' SO.N. 11 \n mi\\ to oxprpss nots Um^ «iuo(» ooinplotiMl, whon (!»o »efcr<»n Art.< u^riitfH orutiouw" -" Monpa /),ii t0lt If thp thiujtr «NMiiploto«l thtiR not now oxiol, or 11 the frfci-^hrt' is to tho rtot oj f\^l^h^t^J. nnil not lo tho pro«out oon- Ununm-'o of tho thinj? lh\i«ho«i. thin tvnno o;ut not bo u«imI ; thnn. we CAu not »Ay, •• Ciopiv ha* H^riHtH potMus," bi'oauna no luich pr«»- K!TYWOt.(MJV - VHmiW I'MNNIOrt. 71 IMT ••lolioiH iM.w ..MMMiM. No., "Ill 1,1.0 h.Kh.nihK (in,\ h„n ,',mh,t I .1)0 |HM»V..M«. iHM.m.BM l..r,MIMMM. h .Hlly I.. ||m i.ol of (h,.| h(, |i fllr. • »lM pn-l 11m.. lii.tiniliMl l.y I),,, w..hk " |i, ||m lH.tf|M„|„„." JKHI. It, |« iifli»,| I,, (|,„ ,„„„. „„i„„..» fin »,lu. i.ii.«on(, iiNlciut (if tJiM iiltH'} iiK. " lli« (!nok hIimII ii()t,ot«>wiill {\umluutthHh,l iM«tli,lre." ..»iM.M,.. nf il„.i of wl,l,.|, iho v.Mh ox,,r..M,.« tl.o <.Mmpl«M',h. J ,„',nr' •'""' •'"""*^ ' '""""'"«• ^''''' '" ""^* ni.iHlH.tl~-" 1 my yoii.i^ M(\S. Tlin IV\Mr {m\m (^xpnvM.MON what, took I rlmMM'n/m////mr'; mr, "In (Jin Im^inning, ( hn\ ovf^ofvil i hn Ikmivoiis."-™" Uod «,,,,/,/, j,„f, MuMH> l)(^ li^hl. "----" Tim Hhip/^ff/W whnir Urn iniiil itrrirrdy \m, Tl.o ll.u.. .x|.r..qH,..l l.v thU imm in .i.i4„nUvl m mtirdv p^Yl, Mi.-I. l,.Mv..vo. iiniir to \\m p.o^niif, il. doeN iiul, iM.ih.'m.« it, ■ J I «.•»' yuiii' filBii.l u itiomoiil, iijro" " I wroh yontonifiy," ' «'«|n In fltiol. rxi.n.RuloiH „« "| ,„ro/- M/i, uuiruhn,"—" (hi, "-rrA,. p^AMf/..,.r.',V.... I,li« ..../.MOM... In (,„ h point ot time mm .'iH.ir.-ly |m< in iIi..a*. yiW nnfinUlin.! |H.ilo(h. 5111. 'rhi« j,,.„«,. in „M,,,| to «x|ire«fl wimfc war r««/«»mrv In mni time ; iw, " Hlio ,xtUn,M diuiol. i'«,». ./cyrr' tho lUMil arrivcvl. ••I.'<. "I'l'o Bi^n of 11,0 im.t-porn.ot h lu.i; intlootod, l,„(Um,k liiul in llio iH)niinon Hlylo. ."Ml. Tlu^ r^iJTi/HK f(^nH(» (vxpivsHOH what u ill liilui ])Imc'o in fn/nrc Umc ; as, " I f?)//^ .vrf von anaiii, and your hv\\vl>^,Hlmllrrfolnc:' *^ '' .^i ;m 72 ENGLISH ORAMMAB. li Htt: 316. The eigos of the future are shall, will. 316. The EuTUKE-PERFECT tense inti- mates that an action or event will bo com- pleted at or before a certain time yet future ; as, "I shall have got my lesson by ten o'clock " — " He loill have finished before you are ready." 817. The signs of the future-perfect are shall uavb, will have. TENSES OF THE POTENTIAL MODPl 318. The Potential mood has, properly, tix tenses — the Present, the Present-perfect, the Past, the Past-perfect, the Future, and the Future-perfect, 819. The Present potential expressed present liberty, powsr, or cbligaiion. 820. The signs of tha Present are tnai/, can, must. 321. The Pre/entpcrfect, in this mood, does not correspond in meaning to the eume tense in the indicative, but more properly «xprefl8P8 present pombility. liberty, necessity, Ac, with respect to ao act or state supposed to be past; thus, " He may have wriMen," means, It is possible that he wrote, or has written ; " He must have written," means, '• It must be that he wrote, or has written. 322. The signs of the Present-perfect potential are, may have, — can have, — must have, 328. The Past potential is very indefinite with respect to tiine^ being used to express liberty, ability, pnrpoie, or duty, sonietinies •t^th regard to what is past, sometimes with regarrl tt» t"hat is pre- icnt, and sometimes with regard to what is future ; thus — Past — "He cohW not do it then, for he was otherwise engaged." Present — "I would do if, with pleasure now, if I could." J^'ulurc^—" U he teould delay his journey a few days, I viighi [could, would, or should,] accofpafiy him." tm 'm3- ETYMOLOGY VEHBS TENSES. 73 824. The signs of the Past poteutial are, might, could, would should. 826. The Past-perfect potential, also, ucver corresponds in time to tlie past-perfect indicative ; that is, it never rep-eseufs an act, Ac,, as completed at a certain past time, but expresses the liberty^ ability, purpose, or duty, with respect to the act or state expressed by the verb, as now past and completed thus, « He could hav« written," means, " He was able to wrile." 826. The signs of the t-perfect potential are, might have, tould have, would have, »h> mid have. 827. The Future and Future-perfect conjugated affirmatively with •'«;///" in the first person, and - ,hair in tl)e second and third, express a promite, determination, or authority; they are therefore properly Potential, and are here placed ns tenses of the Potential Mood, TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 828. The Subjunctive mood, in its proper form, has ou'y the Present tense. Tlie verb ^'tobe" has the present and the past. The indicative mood used subjuuetively furnishes what m.y be called a second form of the present subjunctive, and the only form of the other subjunctive tenses. 329. The Present subjunctive, in its proper form, accordin^^ to present approved usage, has always a future reference; that Fs, it denotes a present uncertai.ity or contingency respecting a suppos- eJ Afurs action or event; thus, ''If he ««r//.," is equivalent to " If he should write," or, " If he shall write."* * 830. Uncertainty or contingency respecting a supposed present action or state, i. expressed by the present indicative used subjuno- tively; as, "If he writes as well as he reads, he will succeed." 33 1. The Present PKRFKCT subjunctive is only the same tense of the mdicalive, used subjuuetively. Such expressions as "If she have brought up children." &c. (1 Tim. v. 10), are now obsolete. 332. The Past subjunctive is used in two senses 1. It is used to express a past action or state as conditional or eoLUngent; as, •• If be wrote ihni letter he deserves credit, and ehouia bo rewarded;" •' If he via^ :,t home, I Old not know it." y«f i i'^i Hi 74 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 1,1 > 51 hk 2. ]r, expreH^ei a Hupposition with respect to something present, aud implies a denial of the thin<; suppcsed ; a», " It I had the mouey now, I would pay it," implying, I have it not. U:?ed in this way, the verb "/oAc" (and of course the passive voice of trauiitive verbs) has a eeparate form of the singular, but not in the plural, viz., I were, thou wert, he were ; for I xoa», thou watt he was ; thus, " If my kingdom were of this world, then would my uervantg light," implying, It is not of this world; " that thou wert as my brother," implying, " thou art not." 338. In this way, the Past subjunctive seems to be always used when the conjunctive term is omitted, and ♦he verb or auxiliary is placed before its nominative ; as, " Iladst thou been here, my brother had not (would not have) died." 834. When a supposition, ~'^ I wished to go"-- Apt to teachr 840. The sign of tlio present infinitive is, to. 341. 2d. After the verb /o6f, the present infinitive if. sometimes used to express a future action or event; as, •' He ia to go ;" " If he were to po." 842. The Perfect infinitive exprep-^ea an act or state as per- fect or completed, at any time referred to. expressed or implied • as " He 18 said to have u,rittm-^already-yesterday-a year ago,'^o[ 843. The sign of the perfect infinitive is, to have. 844. In the use of the infinitive it is necessary to observe, that the Pregent must never be used in circumstances which imply a completed act ; nor the Perfect in circumstances which imply an act not completed. Thus, it is improper to say, "He is said to v,rite yesterday," because the language leads to regard the act as finish- ed, since it took place in past time. It should be, " To have zuritten yesterday." Nor can we say, - I hoped--I desired-I intended, Ac—to have written yesterday," because an act regarded aa per- feet or finished, the doing of which, of course, is past, can not be the object of hope, desire, intention, Ac. Wo should say, ♦' I hoped to write yesterday." 345. The Participial Mode has two forms, one expresses an action or state as incompleted ov imperfect ; as, loving. The other, expresses it as completed or perfect : as, l^ed, '^ .^^® perfect participle, when not used with an auxiliary, and taken as part of* the verb, has the construction of a verbal a^^ective; as, viewed in that light I assent- ed to the proposal. ii ■-M\ i 76 fCNGLISII (illAMIVIAII. !■' 1| m Tli(» iiupcr/'crl partiriplo when not used with an aKxilia?*// and tak^n as part of the vcrh, Ims iho construction of either a verbal adjcchrr, or a rerhal ^umn ; as, ** lie loving hi.s work pcrlbrnicd it.'* ** Ajler defeatiufj the army ho ent(»rcd the city.'* The perfect partici])k^ oi* a transitive verb used with the auxiliary verb '^ to be,'' in all ity nunnis and tenses forms i\\o. pnsfi} ce voice ; and the ])erfeet parli(Mph) of any verb used witli the simple tenst^sof the auxiliary '^liavc'' forms tlie jxnMeet tenses of the active voice. The imperfect ])ar(iciple used with tlu^ auxiliary verb **to be,'' fc»rius tlie proi^res- sive of the active. " Having," — used with tlie perfect parti- ciple; as, hailing irrlfteii,'^ expresses both time and stale, and is properly a perfect tense of the participle. The form of tlic infinitive is som<3times used as a future participle; as, "In the time to come.'' NUMr.Ell AN'D PERSON. 340. Verbs have two luimbcrs and three persons. The persoii and number of a ver# are always the same as the person and number of its subject or nominative. 347. The subject of the verb, in the fir>t person singuhir, is aiwsi^s /, ill ihti plural xce ; in Ihe tsuuond person singular, you lu the common stjlo, and thou in the solemn style; in the plural, tfou KTY MOLOG Y — V URBS — TJCNSKS. 77 \a the common B(,yl«», and y« in tho (Solemn >trle; In tlio third ptrton (ho Bul.jcot is tho imino of any pernon or thing Hpokcn of, or a pronoun of iho third porson in iU stciul; or, it niiiy l)» un i'nfi. nilivo mood, a clause of a afutence, or iiuy thing of wliich a per- son CfU) lliink or fponk. JJ48 In thoHimph, f,)nnoftl!0|.-,.8o„tand i..mt indi.mtivo tho aeooud pemon wnfjnhir of tho koIcvui, »t,jU v.iuh .f-mvj.w 78 R\nt,tAII UHAMMAIl. ■M 1) I or AN o1Iip1l««nl for " ^l^iv." nr, " /.,/ fhy nutnc ho hiiUowod "— •• iM it Ih« oniul«?«l "— '• \.o\ it l)P rt..," ,tM. EXAMINATION QUKSTIONM AND IIXKIKMRKSON MODK, TKNSi;, NIIMIIKU. AND THUSON. ^Vlmt in nindo f n»iw innny inN Imvo v(»rlm f IVfiiio fho in- fllcnlivo. How mnny foiinii Iihh IIw imlioftlivo ? DnIiiiH vuoh, mid givft n «pn(pmM« wilh ii verb in onoh. Dolliw Mio «nl»jniu'iive. (J|vt« an t'xnmplo illu«tinling how llio r«iil»junofive in einnloynd. iJivo nn oxiunplM ol" n voih in tlio miUJMnotivo wiMiniit unnif^ (he oonjutu'lion if. Htnip in what lomn'ctn tho nuhjiinclivo a^i o«'h with (h« iiulioativp, nml in what it »lin'oin (mm it Dolino tlio impora- tivottuMlo. (Hvo tin oxuniple of a v?h the present perfect tense in the connuon and solcnm styloi. Oivo examples showing four «"Bon ninirular and plural ? (live ex- &i2|.%H:.le;JT »--^-"-' byau'xilian... i«t'heverboJ fn.!!r'!'"~'* '"'"*' questions aro, purposely, close to tho text, they ^uch. howev.;r. upon nothing, but what an advanced cla.. Should know tiuestious that nuiy bo thought too n.inute ,my, at 6rit bo paB8e.l over to bo taken up at a.BubBequeut revival ' CONJUGATION. 359. TJi(3 CONJUGATION of a verb is the regular coml)ination and arrangement of its several voices, moods, tenses, numbers and persons, 360. Most verbs have two forms— the Common and tho Pronresswe. 1, The Common form expresBcs tho simple existence of the fact- ni, " lie fpeakg "-«' She «;7i7m"— "Thev talk." W . » ..H i,*' ],r-< 80 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. if '^"i:». In ''» . I % 2, The Progressive form represents an action ub begun, and in progress, but not completed. It is formed by annexing tho imperfect principle to the verb " to be,'* through all its moodft and tenses ; as, " / am writing" — "7 was writing, dfc.^' 861. The Progressive Form of the passive voice is used, when used at all, only in the present and past of the Indicative and Subjunctive ; thus, " It is being done." " It was bein^ done." " 1/ it is being done.'*" If it was being done." 362 The Common and Poiential forms of the Indicative in both the active and passive voice, may be conjugated in four differont ways, namely, — Aj^nnativelif, Negatively, Interrogatively, and Interro- gatively and Negatively ; thus : — Affirmatively. Negatively, I love or I c/o* love. I do not love. I am loved. I am not loved. Interrogatively, Interogat. »• oteerved ' ' 'P'"'"^' ^"''^^« rau.t be oarefullj AUXILIARY VERBS. 367. AiJxiLiAiiY (or helping) verbs are those by the help of which other verbs are inflected. They are, do, be, have ; shall, wiU;~may, can, must. Except have and be, they are all used only in the present and the past tense ; thus :— Prtntnt. Dg. Khnll •mnj Past Vi\,\ u ,1 ;. "''■>'' <^a"' niuefc- 868. Be, do, and have, are also principal verbs. Be h used as an aux. hary in all its parts. Have in ihe present, past, and future. ^ M lu affirmative smimcts, shdl, in the first person, simply toretells ; as. "I *A«/; write." In the second and third persons, ^haU ,8 used potentially, denoting a promhe, commaud, or dctermi- nation ; a., - You shall be rewarded ;"-" Thou .halt not kill •'' -"He shdl bo punished." Will, in the first persor., is used po- tentialy, denoting a pro.nj.e or determination ; as. " I mil go. atall hazards. In the second and third person.. ^iU simply foretells ; as, ' You mil soon be there ;"-'' He will expect you." STO. In interrogative sentonces, ,shaH, in the first person, may either be used potentially to inquire the will of the party adclre?«ed, as ♦' Shall I bring you another book ?" or it mav simply ask whether 3 certain event wil! occur, as - ^hall I arrive in time for the cars?" When shall is used iuterrogalivoly in the secon denotes, futuritv P'.T as, " bhall you be in New York next week f ^Ml, employed interrogatively in the third person, has a poten* ifti ^m If^i-;;; •WV ■ J. ■'■'/."■I ! -.<| 88 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. .:«»' tial Bigtiification, anil is uscrl to inquire the will of the party ad- drewed ; as, " 5/ J ^.1 r 1: f t: ., .li ^d'*'," ■"•t^ .. ^ Hi 84 £NGL18H GRAMMAR. POTINTlAI. INDIOATIVK. B!i 1 Hingular. I. Should or would I f S. biiuuUl or Would you f 3. iShoukl or would he ? 1. Plural. Should or would we f •Should or would you? yiiouid or would tliey t 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 8. SUBJUNCTIVK. HIMPLK 8UBJUNCT1VK. Singulnr. Plural. U 1 ehould 1. If we ahould If you eliould 2. If liu should 3. If you Bhould If tlu'V ehould POTENTIAL SUBJU.VOnVK. Singular. If 1 would If you Would If he would Plural. 1. If we would 2. If you would ;{. If lliey would 87l. Ill tho solemn style, thou, with the teiniiiiation it, would be used iiislead of yhUf iti ll.e Bccoud pcisou fiiiigular. Will, naed as n priucipiil vtrb, is coiijujjiUcd regularly. Correct Examples. " Yea, my sou, I vsill point out tho way, nnd my soul xhall guide ywjrrt in (he use* -t ; for we mil take our iliglit together." — Gold- smii/i. *' 'i'he life of a Bolitniy man will cei tivinly be inisorjibks but not ceilaiiily devout."— /.)'/< »tw«. "The luaii who f^^ela him- •flf iguoniut, alionld at h not be modest.' —//>/(/. " llo that tcould be »upt'ih)v to extern:il influcncoK, must first beoonie appeiior to bis own pani^ions."— /tit/. " Jlomu shall perish—write that word," «tc. — Vtwper. " By oppressions woes and puina ! By ynur sons in servile chains! • We viill (iiain oiu' dearest veins; But, they c.'tall bo free ! " Jiurnf Incorrect Examples. ** What we conceive clearly, and fefl ^tronivly, wo will naturally express with clearness au/i .!treiigLh."-/>r.i/r. " A limb shaU ■wing uj»on its hinge, ov pl.iy in lis socket, many hundred times im an boiir, for sixty years togelhei. without diminution of its a!^ili(y.> ETYMOLOGir VERBS— CONJUQATIOi^. 85 oourae of lectures shall close." «• Ye ehall know thera by their fruit."— ^ Dtbh. Now, iu an enquiry into the croiMbility of Liatory, ibe fiiet question which we will couaider is, «fec." Ar- nold. 12th EXERCISE. 1. In the following sentences, whi^h simply foretell, and which exprcHs delerminationy command, &o. : You shall hear mc -You will heap me.---l shall go to church soon. I will defy l,m. He will understand me. Thotnaa will obey me.— -They shall hear from uh again.—Our friends will soon hear from us again. 2. Correct the error in the following sentences, and give » rea- son for the correction :— I will be a loser by that bargain. — I will be drowned and nobody shall help me. — I will be punished if I do wrong. — You shall be punished if you do not reform.— It will probably rain to-morrow.— If you shall come I shall ecmo also. — I will oe compelled to go home.-— I am resolved tlin.t I shall do my duty.— 1 promised that if you would come home, I sh^ld pay you a visit. — I hope that i will see him. — Yon promised that you should write me scon.— He shall come of his own ac- cord, if encouragement will be given. 3. In the following, tull which expressions are light, and which .ire wrong, and why : — It is thought he shall come.— It will be impossible to _ t -;iady in time.— Ye will not come to me.— Ye shall have your reward. — They should not do as they ought. — We are resolved that we will do our duty. — They are resolved that thej should do their duty. — I am deter- mined that you will do your duty. — I am sure you will do your duty. MAY, CAN, MUST— MIGHT, COULD— TO BE. 875. May denotes present liberty or permission ; can, present ability ; and must, present obligation or necessity. They are used as auxiliaries in the present potential, to express these ideas. ''ttf i(yM Ifi ,ki f^^'m ■•*' I*; ^u < 1, ' - ■.,1 5^7 A ni rant Of\rw\f\ >;. J„ 4., -M.Mfl S6 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 878. Can, in poetry, is sometimes used by euphony for caml' as, '• Thou trees and stones can teach."— iJayiM. Z19. Might and could express, in past time, the same ideas generally that are expressed by ma;/ and can in the pi-esent Ther are used as auxiliaries in the past potential. ^^^iV-'*?^'*'' ^®^''''® ^^® subject, is also used to express a wish • as, "Mtght it but turn, out to be no worse than this !'' 881. Sometimes, in the English Bible, might is used for may • as, " These things I say, that ye might be saved."— /oAn v. 84. * 882. Combined with have, these form a new series of compound auxiliaries ; thus, shall have and will have are auxiliaries of the future-perfect indicative; map have, can have, and must have, of * the present-perfect potential; and might have, &o., of the paat- perfect potential. ^ 388. But though mar/ denotes present liberty, may have does not denote paH liberty, but only the present possibility : thus •' He may have written," means. It is possible that he has written. So also, must have does not denote past necessity, but present certainty; thus, "He must have written," means, There is no doubt he has written ; it can not be otherwise. 884. The verb " to be*' in 4\ its moods and tenses, is used as an auxiliary m forming the passive voice ; as, " I am loved ;" •' He was loved," Ac. Also, in the progressive form of the* active voice ; as, " I am writing ;" « He was writing, Ac. 885. All these auxiliaries are sometimes used without their verb, to express, by ellipsis, the same thing as the full form of the verb, tojrether with its adjuncts, when that is used immediately b«fore, either in the same or in a different tbuse ; thus, " He writes poetry as well as I do /" •' I can write as well as he can ;" •* If you can not write, I will ;" " He will do that as well as I can ;" •« James can get his lesson as well as ever I could;'' "He envies me as much as I <2o him." 886. The verb do (not auxiliary) is sometimes used as'the sub- ■titute of another verb or phrase previously used ; as, " We have not jet found them ail, nor ever shall dof'^MiUon. " Lucretius wrote on the nature of things in Latin, as Empedocles had already done m Greek." — Acton, ' ANOMALOUS USAGE. SSY. Several of these auxiliaries are sometimes used in a way which it 13 difficult to explain in a satisfactory manner, and which may justly be regarded as anomalous. The following are a few of these : — ° 888. Jlad is sometimes iisp.d in r>nof»v fni> tnr^.i^ . ... or t.„j rather,' " . had as lief," for, «' I wouM rather," «' I would ETYMOLOGY — V£RBS CONJUGATION. 87 as lief." Sometimes it if? used for would have ; as, '* My fortune had [would have] been his." — Dryden. Some- times for might ; as, " Some men had [might] as well be schoolboys, as schoolmasters." 389. Will is sometimes used to express what is customary at the present time ; as, " He will sometimes sit whole hours in the shade ;" " He will read from morning till night." 890. Would, in like manner, •<» sometimes used to express what was customary in pa«i time ; as, " The old man woxdd shake his years away ;" « He'c? sit him down." 891. Would is sometimes used as a principle verb, equivalent to the present of wish or dedre ; as, " When I make a feast, I wotdd my guests should praise it — not the cooks."— *' Wheu I would [when I wish to] do good, evil is pre- sent with me." 'I'hus used, the subject in the first per- son is sometimes omitted ; as, " Would God it wer* even,"=" I pray God ;" " Would to God,"—" I pray to God." 392. Would, with a negative, used in this way, is not merely negative of a wish or desire, but implies strong opposi- tion or refusal ; as, '' How often would I have gathered thy children — but ye MotWt^not ;" " Ye would ncne of my reproof." 393. Should is used in all persons to denote present duty, and should have, to denote past duty ; as, '♦ You should write;" ^'1 should have written;" "The rich aAowW re- member the poor." It often denotes merely a supposed future event ; as, " If he should promise, he will perform." It is sometimes used in an indefinite sense after that ; as, " It is surprising that you shmild say so. 394. Should and would are sometimes used to ejcpress an asser- tion in a softened manner ; thus, instead of saying, " I think h!ja insane" — *'It seems to be improper," it is milder to say, " I should think him insane " — " It wmild seem to be improper." PRINCIPAL PARTS. 395. The principal parts of a verb are the present tense^ the 'past tense, and the perfect participle. They are called the prin- cipal or radical parts, because all the other parts are formed from them. Thus ; — ill ¥rl: c ^i\ F'as.'f f ■■".'1 % HP '( i '■l ii!: BJl rr'- 88 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Present. Past. Past participle. Regular Love, loved, loved Irregular Write, wrote, written INFLECTIOJ^ OF THE IRREGULAR VERB •• TO BE." cc .^^7^- ,F^^ irregular ^nd intransitive verb to be, ]s used as a principal verb ; and al- so, as an auxiliary in the passive voice, and m the progressive form of the active voice. It is thus inflected through all its moods and tenses :— Pre*., Am. PARTICIPIAL PAHTS. Past, Was. Perf. participle, Been . INDICATIVE MOOD. PEKSENT TEN8B, Sinyidar. p^^^^j^ UtPers. lam i. ^^^^^ c. , PAST TENSE. Singular. p^^^^^^ 1. o I was ( You were (com. style.) \ Thou ' - ' 1. We were 2^ ^ you were (com. style.) wast (aol™. sVle.) 2' | Fe were (»„ta.rt^e:) o. liiey were 1. Singular. 1 shall be FUTURE TENSE. Plural ETYMOLOGY VERBS— -CONJUGATION. 89 1. 2 Singular. PBKSENT PKUFKCT TENSE. 1. I have been You have boeu Thou hast beeu He has been ■Plural. I. We have been 2 j You have been I Ye have been 3. They have been PAST PKRFEOT TENSE, Plural a. ;..{ Singular. I had been You bad been Thou hadst been ^ He had been 3. FUTURK PERFECT TEVSE. Plural. We had been You had been Ye had been They had been 3. Singular. I shall have been You will have been Thou wilt have been He will have brien 1 We shall have been 2^ ( You will have been ( Ye will have been 3. They will have been SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PUKSENT TENSE. — Subjuuctive Fovm* 1. Singular. If I be o j If you be -"• } If 1. 3. thou be If he be 8. Plural. If we be If you bo If ye be If they be •{if HYPOTHETICAL FORM.f Singular. Plural. If I were ; or, were I I. If we were ; or, were we you were ; or, were you (If you were ; or, were you . ,, thou wert ; or, wert thou ^- } If ye were ; or, were ye 8. If he were ; or, were he 3. If the y were ; or, were they * This form is used only when both contingency and futurity are implied; as, " If he study, he will improve." ^ tS98. This form of the verb to be is commonly used, in the sub- junctive mode, to express^ supposition or hypothesis. When em- ployed m a negative sentence, it implies an affirmation ; as. "If it were nnt an T nrnuM koxr,^ *^1J -„„ » ixti i • ^ ' m 3'1 4 t I ' * <•: art < 90 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. ,?"' J ! it: i ♦..,., 899. The paat subjunctive of other verbs is often employed in a similar manner; as, " I would walk out, if it did not ra n ;"—•« If 1 had the power, I would assist you cheerfully." The SUBJUNCTIVE MODE in its ORDTNARY FORM is the same, except in the use of shall and will, as the Indicative; as follows : ' PBBSENT TBN8B. 1. 3. 1. 2. S. Singular, If lam If you are If thou art If be is Singular, If I was ' ( If you were \ If thou wast If he was 1 2 8 PAST TBNSE. •I Plural. If we are If you are If ye are If they are t 1. 2. S. FUTUEB TBNSE. 1. 8. 1. 2. 3. 1'. Singular. If I shall be ( If you shall be ( If thou shalt be If he shall be 1. 2. 3. I If we were If you were If ye were If thov were Plural. If we shall be If you have been If ye have been If they shall be PEESKNT PKEFECT TEN8B. I Singular, If I have been If you have been If thou hast been If he has been 1. 2. 3. I Plural. If we have been If you have been If ye have been If they have been Singular. If I had been PAST PBEFEOT TENSE. 1. Plural. If we had been ETYMfiLOOr — VERBS CONJUGATION. FUTURR PEBFECT TENSE. 91 Singular. If I shall have been Plural. 1. If I shall have been 1. If we ahall have been 2 i JJ yo*! shall Imve been „ C 7f you shall have beea ( If thou Shalt have been "* \ If ye shall have been 8. If he shall have been 3. If they shall have been t 400. The potential form of the subjunctive mode, is the same in all the tenses except the future, as tho potential form of the indi- cative, shall being used in all the persons in the simple eubjunotion, and wilt in all the persons iu the poUential subjunctive. See the oonjugation of thall and will. INFINITIVE MODE. Preient, To be Perfect, To have been IMPERATIVE MODE. PBESBNT TENSE. Singular, Be. or \ ^« {^-^ Plural, Be, or { ^« ^^ PARTICIPLES. Imperfect, Being Perfect, Been Perfect tense, Having been Synopsis of the verb To Be, Present, I am Past, I was Future, I shall be INDICATIVE. Present perfect, I have been Past perfect, I had been Future perfecty I shall have been SUBJUNCTIVE. Present tense. Subjunctive Form, If I be Hypothetical form, , If I were, Ordinary Form^ Present tense, if i am Past tense, Tf I was Mm ^^»J tff i.' •M ■J ft-;t' «ll i.-i' ■m W ' if] ■■..«-• V i o ® IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) V. /> / V .^J^ .V ^" < % § I.O I.f 1.25 6' [22 2.0 1.8 U. 111.6 P> <^ >• ^^^ # /a ^ #' C*^ oS, / ////// Sciences Coiporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTE9,N.Y. 14380 (716) 872-4503 Q y.^ V" «^- t/^ 92 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. »./f INFINITIVK. Present, To be ♦ Present perfect, To have been IMPKEATIVB. Present, Be, or Be you or tboii PAET1CIPLB8. Imperfect, Being Perfect, Been • Having been. ® CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB TO LOVM IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. W. J.- Present, Love Singular. 1. I love 2. You love 3. He loves Singular. 1. I loved 2. You loved 3. He loved \ PRINCIPAL PARTS. Past, Loved Perf. part., Loved INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT TENSE. Plural. 1. We love 2. You love 3. They love PAST TENSE. PluraL 1. We loved 2, You loved 8. Tiiey loved Singular. 1. I shall love 2. You will love 3. He will love FUTURE TENSE. 1. o 3. Plural. We shall love You will love They will love PRESENT PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. 1. I have loved i. We have loved You have loved 2. You have loved He has loved . 3. They have loved 2. 3. -m ETYMOLOGY VERBS CONJUGATION. 93 1. 2 3.' 1. 2. 8. PAST PERFECT TENSE. Singular. • Plural, I had loved i. We had loved You had loved 2. You had loved He had loved 3. They hud loved FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. Singular. Plural. I shall have loved l. We shall have loved You win have loved 2. You will have loved He will have loved 8. They will have loved SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. ^The Bubjunctive is the same throughout as the indicative, but when both contingency and futuVity are implied, the present tense is thus declined : Phiral. 1. If we love 2. If you love 8. If they love INFINITIVE MODE. Present perfect, To have loved 1. 2. 3. Singular. If I love If you love If he luve Present, To love IMPERATIVE MODE. PRESENT TENSE. Singular, Love, or Love you Plural, Love, or Love y«u PARTICIPLES, Imperfect, Loving Perfect, Loved Perfect tense. Having loved Synopsis of To Lovr. INDICATIVE. Present perfect, I have loved Past perfect, I had loved Future Perfect, I shall have loved INFINITIVE. Perfect, To have loved IMPERATIVE. Present, Love, or love you. PARTICIPLES. Imperfect, Loving Perfect, Loved Perfect tense, Having loved 401. In the solemn stjj^e, the Verb would take thou instead Present, I love J'ast, I loved Future, I shall love Present, To love t jf4 m • . 94 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. t' '■ Of you in the second person singular with the termination "«<" for the verb, and - eth'' for the third singular termi- nation of the verb; and ye instead of you for the second plu- ral; thus :-I love; Thou l jugating the verb to be through all its moods and tenses, numbers and persons, with the perfect participle of a transitive verb; thus: — PASSIVE VOICE OF THE VERB TO LOVE. I am loved You are loved He is loved PaBt, I was loved, *WMre, I shall be loved, m m •107. SYNOPdIS OF TO HA Vh\ USED INTERROGATIVKLY. INDIOATIVK. Pn, Have I; or po I have i Pren. perf. Have I had I last, JIu. I : or. Dili I hiive i PaH pcrf. Ha.i I hud? tut. Shall I have* Fat. perf. Shall I Imve had ? NEGATIVE FORM. 408. A verb is conjugated nej?atively by introduoinff the adverb not III connection with it; ne, I know not, or, I do not know I did no< know ; I shall not know; I have not known; I had kot known ; I shiill not have known, <.tc. 40P. Caro must be taken not to confound the parts of one verb with the parts of another. There is special- danorer of this with some verbs which are sijuilar in sound and sense. Tiie intransitive verb lie, to recline, is sometimes confounded with the transitive verb lau • and the intransitive verb sit with the transitive verb set. The parts are corrpctly used, thus : — THE INTRANSITIVE, LIE, Principal parts, Lie, lay, lain. J* resent:^ I lie Past, I lay Future, I bIuiU lie Pres. perf. 1 have lain Past perf. I had lain Fut. perf. I shall have lain TOR INTBANSITIVE, SIT. Principal parts, Sit, sat, fat. Present, I sit Past, I sat Fhture, I shall sit Pres. per/. I have sat Past perf. I had sat Fut. petf. I shall have sai THE TKAN8ITIVE, LAY. rriuci})al parts, Lay, laid, laid. I lat/ I laid I shall lay I have laid I had laid I shall have laid THE TEANSITIVK, SBTT, Principal parts, Set, set, set. Present, I -^f Past, I t Future, I shall set Pres. perf. I have set Past perf I had set Fut. perf. I shall have set 410. It is quite unnecessary to occupy -nore space in conjugating verbs. If the conjugation" of one verb is understood, the conjugation of every verb is understood. The only verb really irregular in its conjugation is the verb to be. The other verbs called irregular are only irregular in not forming their ;?a5^ tense and perfect par- ticiple by adding ed to the present. The thing to be ETYMOLOGY V£K1JS CON/UOATION. 97 t specially obacrv«d in coiiju^'ating and UMin<^' irregular verbs is tlmt ihcform for iho pant fense muxt he used only in ihepast tense of the Indicative and SnhjunctivP of the Active Voice; and theform for tho picufkct ivvutioii'Li; must bo used with the verb to be in forming,' every part of the Fassive Voice, ond with tlie propei^ aiixiliarios in forming all Pkupect Tenses in every mode of the Active Voice, and nowhere oKse. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 411. A Defective verb is one iu wliich somo of tho parts aro wanting. Tlio Ibllow- ing list comprises tlie most important. Tkey are irregular, and chiefly auxiliary :— Presfnt, Can May- Must Ought Quoth Pant. could juii,'ht • •& •fcj «} «>> i ft. ,^ "5 e O, ?> ^ «« 1 a, a. c? ETYMOLOGY VERBS — CONJUOATIOW . 99 p4 o >. "HI'S •ai^s'Sa^-g.ss-s «:^-sr i^ gf>a i a- S O C O V V -ea i -^y ► 4) - h H OS '"^ *Ti •-^ rt o o a J4 fe P n S-spI-S ^-(S^ a >^ r. « - fn 53 S "^ ^ " -^ - .P 9-S a k S ^ a o a ^ ® f.l?ji^5|-;?^i a a a «M es ^. ft. 1^ V. a u •& V fts a. i < K* ft. t I I [9»0J *aao|<{ SAUOKflfang '3PK 'spoH 'epopi ^ .fv.v j|fi i\4 ■».• UM) KNQhinU GRAMMAR. klZn * A "' ,\'"^' **r^"^T' *"' '^»'«"« known. I am not l,oi„g known. Am I hoin,? known! Am I not hoinc known I Tak« y.rh« throuffi, all the pornon. Hnd numbori of »II tho Jl f«r#.vin tlioHam«. nmnn^r. with a vi«w pnrtUmlHrly to (|,o proper U.0 of ./„i// fliul wtll Oivo H ►ynopHiH of a Vorb tl.rou^rh t L Af. firmat.vo ordnmrv form, notivo Toir...~l'aH«lv« voioo.-Thn.n«h t.h« In .m»«ut.ve. nn.t pro^r^.lv form., nctiv voioe.-PaMiv« voico «i>o promptlT unv permm, numl.o. , nu„lo or ti-nno of any voico or form that may ho onllcMl for. IM-.paro a DiaKnun «imilHr o tl.k nllinjf up «uoh purfa an may b« dirooted. i. ili^'ViriT'T "" ^^i" '^'"'^'■""^ '''^''^•'" '""'•^'y ^" ""^''^'^l* I'ow it IS nut'uu«»d to bo U8«d. I!| ■ •- IMPKRSONAL VRRHS. 417. Impersonal verbs arc thoso wliioli assort tlio oxistorico of sorno action or state, but refer it toino particular subject. TJiey are always in the tJiird person sinj^nilar, and in Enghsb are preceded by tlio pronoun U; as, " It rains "-- It hails "—- It hehoomsr &c. •tl8. To this clflM of words belong (ho cxpr«>88ionP, wcMin/t*, mfthought ; mesennn, mesenned; aomotimes used for, "It seemt to me "— " // appears io me,'' &o. 410. The pronoun it preceding the impersonal vorb ub its Bub- ject, is the Bubi^titutoof eonic unknown and general, or well-known cnuio, the action of which is exproBsed by the verb, but which can not, or need not, itself be uaiued. EXAMINATION QUESTIONS, AND EXERCISES ON THE CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. How is a verb conjugated in the progrrssive form f In what tenses only is the progressive form of the pa.SBive voice used? Conjogate the verb <» numhorB nnd forms of the future, Hirnf)Io Hiid potentlnl in tli« •am« wriy. Do tlui Nnttio in the pamHivu willi llio v«rb for- a:0t. Tiik.f Mi.i v«>rl> arine thronnh all tlio pciHoin niid numbers of th« prPHont. p!ii.t. nntl Uiiwvo, jjidlcntivo, »vUmm stylo. Take it throuKli tho hhioo tohHHs, A-.c, iiolemn ntylo, int«rrojM ir; Do iwed an nn ftuxdiary vcrl)? Uivo oxampUiH. Vuv what pur|)(m« in ll« UMod as Hn nuxdiary? (livo i-xamphH In wlmtpomon is shnll uned an an auxiliary in HJmpln indicative, and whit d(w it oxproHH? Give an examplo. In what p«!rH()n in $hiill uMod in tho potuntial ? Hive nn oxanjplc. To (upross what. Im nhnll umoiI intoi ro^jRtiv,.|y in tlio Himph) and in tlio potential indioativi,? What diffor- onoo of nu'iminfr is th«'re bptwocii th« fntnm of th« sim- pl« imiioativo and tho potonlial indioativo. Conjnpito ithall and will BO aH to oxpreHH this difforenco of lueaninj^'in each. Wliat does tho futnroof tho rfimplw Hubjunotivw and pot«Mitial Hubjunc- tivo each rospnotivoly (^xpioHH? C< ■V--C- 108 ENGLISH ORAMMAH. Present. Past. Past participle. Stick stuck stuck Sting 8tung stung Stink stunk or stank stunk Stride, be- strode, strid stridden, strid Strike struck struck, strich'n . String strung strung Strive strove striven Strew,* be- strew strewed, strewn strew, 66- strowed • strowed, strowii Swear swore, sware sworn Sweat sweat, R. sweat, R. Sweep swept swept Swell swelled swollen, R. Swim swam or swum swum Swing swung swung Take, he- &c. took taken Teach, mis- re- taught taught Tear tore, tare torn Tell ' told told Think, be- thought thought Thrive thrived, throve thriven, R. Throw tlirew thrown TAust tlirust thrust Tread trod trodden, trod Wax waxed waxen, R. Wear wore worn Weave wove woven Weep wept wept Wet wet, R. wet, R, Whet whet, R. whet, R. Win won won Wind wound, R. wound * strew and shew Bre iiovtr jiving way to alrow and show, as they aro nro- nouncfcd. Pregen'. Work Wring Write ETYMOLOGY ADVERBS. 109 Past. wrought, li. wrung, K. wrote Past participle. wrought, 11. wrung written ADVERBS. 421. An Adverb is a word used to mo- dify the sense of a verb, an adjective, or another adverb; as, "Ann speaks distinctly; she IS remarkably diUgent, and reads veni correotlv,^^ ^ 422. An adverb is generally equivalent io a modifying phrase or adjunct of the word to which it is joined. Thus, iu the^rSe-' dmg example, " chstxnchf means, in a distinct manner; " vemTrl ably, tn a remarkable degree. So, "no«,» means at this time- " then," at that ^m^ &c These adverbial phrases may be fur he^ expanded mto adverbial sentences; as. "The boy studies dili- gently, :^in a diligent manner=^as a diligent boy should study. 493 . Our Dotious of thmgs are expressed by nojms. and our notions of the qualities or attributes of things are expressed by adjectives and vabs, hence, just as we use an adjective to qualify a noun, so we use an adverb to qualify any word expressing an attribute and as adverbs are themselves, attributes of adjer.tives and verbs' they may be qualified by other adverbs. * 424. The subject of the verb is the principal noun in every sen- tence, and the prmc.pal attribute is contained in the predicate. The principal use of the adverb is to modify the whole sentence through the principal attribute, and its secondary or subordnaL use 18 to qualify other attributes in the sentence. """'^"^^a'^e 425. On the same principle that an adverb modifies another ad- verb, It sometimes also modifies an adjunct, a phrase, or a sen. tence; as, 'I met your brother far from /tow*"— "He will b<^ here SOON after mid^day''-^'\Ye shall go muKviATKLY after the mail arrives." /i-e/ w.e 426. A few adverbs are sometimes used as adjuncts of nouns, and pronouns ; as, x , . 'y [that Is, /, and no one else] am escaped alone to tell thee."— '^ The women also were present," that is, the women as well as the others— in addition to ths others. .^m r* -•■■■■ -I ■;i» ,r>. H.'. ; -C,; . , •■ ■' ■%■' » uj •y^ ;■ K* i.* no ENGLISH GRAMMAR. "I . \ I . i:^i CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS. 427. A(!voib8, nroordinpf to the nature of the modifications which they denote, iniiy be divid«»il into variout classes; viz., Adverbs of 7\me, Place, Number, Quantity, Manner, Mode, Cause, Interroga- tion. " 428. Adverbs of Time are such as answer to the question When ? They may be subdivided into Time Present ; as, Now, yet, pre- setKtly. Time Past; as, Already, lately, since. Time to Come • » M, Henceforth, soon, hereafter. Time Relative; as, When, then, after. Txmo Absolute ; as, Ever, always, never. Time Repeated ■ as. Often, seldom, rarely. Adverbs of Place are those which answer to the questions Where, ivhither or lohcnce? Wltere ? or, rest in a place ; as, there, here, within, &c. Or, Rela- tive or Indefinite Placf; as, above, below, somewhere, anywhere, dtc Whither ? or, motion towards a place ; as, unto, hence, hither die. Whence* or, motion from a place ; as, thence, thither, forth! dc. Adverbs of Number are those which an- swer to the questions Hoio often? As, once^ twice, &c. ; or, In what order? As, firstly, secondly, finally, &c. Adverbs of Quantity are those which an- swer the question Roic much ? As, much, little, scarcely, &c. Adverbs of Manner are those which an- swer to the question How ? As, well, ill, wisely, &c. Adtferbs of Mode are those which from the nature of the idea they express, can only be used in connection with verbs. .juch as Adverbs of Affirmaiion ; as, yes, aye, indeed. Qt Neqa^ tion ; as, nay, not, nowise. Of Doubt; as, perhaps, possibly, pgr^ chance, Ac. Of Cawe ; as, hereby, consequently, whtrefore. : 1 :i ) .*' ETYMOhOQY — ADVERBS. HI _ Adverbs of Interrogation, are those used m asking questions ; as, Hoto, tohy, Sfc mere is. jn all auch oases, there s a mere exnlpfivo it „^ i nothing to the sense, but still, it servesTo varv the fn-m If ' pression nod to soften the abruptnes: XhVould oUiet 'e" 480. 7%n«?pleB to7hoTh7j"dvcS m^ 'liji. '.■-r» «VfJ .'•'■"•";>t^ ..'1;^ .t J^H *^ / .' '' jI^I ^^•r" ■ "£ v^^^^l ' '"B^^^^l ^. ! * J^^l 1 *-^^H ( ^ •h,, ^H '•:! *^^^l Ji'il :<;,:- « •• ' ', < '^^H /' ^^B r*^. ,- ^^^1 . y^l^^l •::Si;»i| 112 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. i p "♦" be expniidcd into ndvcrbiiil plirnsep, find info ndverbinl flonUno.^H. Into wlmt jfoiHTiil cl(iHH««8 ar«' itdvcrbs dividod ? Jnto what cInBsew nro those of time eiibdividcd ? Kopeat tboso of euoh chws. InU» "what daises are those of phico subdivided ? Repeat those of each clasB. Into what dnsaen ace thone of miuiber Bubihvided? Re- peat those of each ehiBs. Tboso of quantity? llepeat them. Thopc of manner ? Repeat (lieni. Rop«'at tlioso of mode. Re- peat (hoBe of interrogation. IlluBtrate, by examples, the two U3©« of (ho adverb therr Give exainpb'g cf tfien ami note, not uwod with reference to time. What are conjunctiva adverbs? Give exampU'8 to illuatrute how they are used. How nro adverbs com- pared if KXERCISE ON THE ADVERB. I. Vatbo tlie adverbs in the following? Rontences, by Btatin^ to what general and partieuhir class they belong, and wliat they modify ; and jjarse the conjunctive adverbs by atating to what class they belong, and what they connect and modify. I Imvc not seen him lately. I huvo not called upon him yet. Tiiey Ijave almost all their wants supplied without labor. He looked quite ill. The weather was oxeeodinjrly stormy beK)w. They often call to see me. The news arrived early in the morniiif:^. AVhy, my frieed ! are you here ? AVe shall probably return to- morrow. Perhaps you will return early. We are far from the city. You will first let mo know. I hear much of your success. Twice two is four. You may possibly be mistaken. I will return when you send for me. lie discovered the mistake whilst on his way homo. He was preparing to leave as I entered. I have been here since morning. I believe I have seen you as often as was necessary. I went wherever you wished. Whither I go, you cannot come. Return from whence you came. He talks as if he meant it. The more you talk the worse you make it. 2. Go over this exercise again, nnd pnrpe the Nouue, Adjectives, Pronouns, and Verbs, in full, accoi-ding to the order. :« ll -r.-^' PREPOSITION'S. 133. A ^REPOSITION is a word which shows the relation of a noun or pronoun ET¥MOLOOY— I'RKMOSITIONS. 113 (lepcndiiig upon it, to somo other word in the senttmco ; as, *' The love of moncfi''^ ** Come TO me,'' •134. 'J'l.e pn'iKMition most froqiu-iilly hIiowb (lm rolali.n, of n "OUM to an mainn; an. " \ travdlrXon tl,n ear.^ t i , nom. 4;5fl. Tho snmo wonl not unfreqiunitly has Bororul M.li.inctH- as Also, the nouu or pronoun in the adjunct, nuiy b , linihml Lv om, or .noro H.ljunots-the whole forming « cornfu.ur. u nc^-T It 8 CONSISTENT mth the rharacterZ/ arnanof fo P liZ' of honor IS the ad unct of n,an ; - of „ man of honor "u a com a mon oj honor, is a compound adjunct of connutent. 487. In the natural order of a Hontence, the udiunot folh.wH \\u principal ; an. " JIo withdrcAV after supper r It is Z, oo vcn.oi^ fiowovor, to arrange the adjunct firstf an, " .1/^.r ."Cr ho l.-S. drew with h.8 friend who liad called for him/ 1^7^ le 11; sense cannot 8o well be given by pluoing the adjunct .VfteVZ per," anywhere else in the flentenoe. *' ' P" 488. Concerning, exceptivg, regarding, respedina and touchi.m were ongmaly present participles active of tnind? ve veS and a8 such required an objective case after them. IW !nav f.^ quently be bo construed still. During nuvy bo regarded ns^rii?: i.aJly the present participle active, of an intransitive ve?bhavin; ml ^ZZ "^rTT •" ^''' »«""""tiveca8e absolute ; thus, "Dur nf lite, means life durnig, or while life remains. NotwitLtandina u compound of no^ and the i.nperfect participle vnthJ^nT^^^^ be explained in the same way. Wheli usedf however, as pfei S \JZ 1 ?^ J""^ *''"'' ^"'■^ originally imperatives. Out ofrn^v as 3,tri« foroo of ft propoaitioh in hucIi oxproNHJoiiA m ..«c*«l ^s«il ■^- w •^K-.;A IIG KiVGMSII GRAMMAH. was running ilirough iho |)«i8tiiro ycBtcrdiiy. I Imvo roHigiiod oil account of my IumiIiIi. IIo W(>nt on iriMtoatl of roturnin/^r homo. Wo uro liablo to hucIi tliin«,'H. Ho Iui8 » luMirt of iron. Do you »till mlhoro to that ojn'nion. 1 nuiHt l.'iu'^'h at your comical attcmptH. I lioard tlio Htory of tho cliilj. On Friilay lawt wo wont from Tor- onto to Hamilton by tho lako in two hourn. It in on that acct)unt not uonHiMiont with tho profoasion of Hin- cority of purpono. 1 am uiu'aHy about him. Tho lottor wttM Avritti-n by hi:* brother. Lot us walk around tho encloBuro. VVo wcn^ ovortakon by a storm. Wo toilod on from that timo until wo woro out of danj^or. 1 sup- poao you aro accustomed to such things, lloavou froui all creatures hides the book of fato. 2. Go ovor tluH cxeroiBO n^ixin mul pnrwe acconliuf? to the ordor tho nouns, pronouns, luljectlvoH, vorba, u(lvorb« imd pr(>i)OHitiua«. n ■■•.. ■■■■■ <\ CONJUr^CTIONS. 4iiS. A Conjunction is a word which connects words, phnisos, or sentences ; as, "He and I must go, but you may stay.'* " Of Jiim, and through him, and to liim, are all things." •149. Tho (liatinguishint;; ofHoeof tho conjunction is really to con- nect th<» dUroront olausea of an extended senteuco ; but fow of the nutnorous family of conjunctions aro ever used to connect wordn or phrases, and, in many instancea, when they appear to connect only words or phrases, they really connect clan ■ i. A classification Ot conjunctions must, therofore, be based on tiio vaii'us relations which tho difloront kinds of clauses bear to c;h-l> otin :, for it ia the meaning of tho word used to connect them that determines this relation. The full exphu>ation of tho use of conjunctions can therefore bei,'iveu only in connection with the analysis of complex and compound sentences. 460. The following classiflcation will be found sufficient to dis- ti: _, , -_ii _.i.v .. ,.»(n.;j„ i vitii.tT.'ijc mat caisl uci,\vci;il cy-OrUi- B v,a ' oin-ises, and between principal and subordinate clauses (' RTYMOLOC4Y— rONJtrNf'TrONs. J p n/n?r'' •■■•''■""' C''".i>"'ction is ono which uuiics iiu3ir moaning. "nil.. q„„„,i,i„, \Vy ^^LZTafr'm "" "'" "'"" <+> P'- T1.0 (!0Nri»i„Tivi< nro W,",™ J.w', !„ ' ^"'"^ •""•'-"r./urll,,,. tlion,lvorhi„l kind to H, r. ,™.„, ,r ' r"*"'-''"'"!" ••I"t.»i'. of .•ntr„d„,.„,i ,„, .„„,i;,:r;;r ™i ; ,";• "r,;":",;':v"- r'l'''" "'7 "™ wlSh" wLnf-f"':''"'''! Conjunction is one wn.cl,, wlnlo It joins two clauses together disconnects tlicir meaning. "'ecuitr, through. Or nan That Nor ' <« i( whethtT, either. inore or less. so. neither. if, than, otherwise. U: ."'"■'•if J J .' ta't 118 f^NGLISH GRAMMAR. li'ii '1i ■-I i I ^'m EXAMINATION QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTION. Define the CoiijiiDCtior. What is the distinguhhing office of the Conjunction ? On what must a classification of the Conjunction be bused? In connection with whut subject will t!ie Conjunction be best explained? Into what two general classes are Conjunctions divided ? Define the Copulative. Into what classes are the Cop- ulative subdivided. Define the Additive. Repeal; them and give examples to show their use. Define the Coutinuative. Repeat the Cop'inuative and giye examples to show their use. Define the Disjunctive. Into what classes are the Disjunctive divided? De- fine the distributive and repeat them. Give examples to show their use. Define the Advoisr.tive and repeat them. Give exam- ples to show their use. Which of those in the list of the Contiuu- ative are Conjunctive Adverbs / Repeat the Compound Conjunc- tions. Repeat the Correlative Coujuoctions. Give examples to show bow they are used. EXERCISE. 1. Parse the Conjunctions and Conjunctive Adverbs in the fol- lowing sentences, by stating to which class they belong and whut they connect. It was not the teacher but the pupil who was in fault, I will accompany you if you call for me. We had no sooner started than he became ill. The fact is so evi- dent that it cannot be disputed, I know that you are quite in earnest. Tou cannot tell because you were not present. Either James or William is to blame. Precept is not so forcible as example. Time flies rap- idly, yet it appears to move slowly. He believes you because you never deceived him. Love not sleep lest you come to poverty. And when the day was far spent we went into Jerusalem. You have great reason to be thankful and contented with your lot. He was indus- trious but irritable. Nevertheless you must make all the haste in your power. He lives but eight miles from the city. Think before you speak. JN'either labor nor expense shall deter me. She is not as diligent as her sister. 2. Go over this exercise again and parse the Nount, Adjectives^ Pronouns, VerbSy Adverbs, and Prepositions^ according to the order given for each. 3. Write sentences connected by the various classes of Continu- ative Conjunctions. :*» ETYMOLOGY INTERJECTIOJVS. 119 INTERJECTIONS. 456. An Interjection is a word used in exclamations, to express an emotion of the mmd; as, "Oh! what a fall was there!'' cal connection w^ith the..'^ sL"SeT?t^ral^"a\TeS"n?i^^^ of a sentence sometimes in the middle, and sometimes it^S! biing'spol'ef ^'"""^^ ^^^^ ''^ ^'-^ ^« admTon^^trrd: A LIST OF INTERJECTIONS. 468. I^e following is a list of the interjections most commonly Td Jndlfi'^ ''''''' ''"■''"' ^'"^' '^ *"^°"°°«' but in so vague and mdefimte a way, as not to admit of accurate classification :- So! adieu ilc. ^''° ' '''^''"y ' ^^ ' '" ' ''«1'=''"«' ' called interiectionB. «a 1 manner, to express emotion, are also come! &Q. •" ' ^ '*^^*' ^''^^^ *^»'' done I tael- be'*p?;fixed o,av to Hon'' ' ^''^ ''^ "" exclamation, and should " O VirfMoi », ^ *u,°"". *"■ P'^O'iouD. m a direct address- as th^wo d with': St^i'f f °? n-' " 9'* '« "^^^ detached from' wor? It Ti^pliesT eltfonT/''"- "^^'^ '^^ °^ "^^^^ ^'^^ °«' "OA/ what?sghtT8heTe " '^ P''°' '""''^' "' «"^P"««' ««' GENERAL EXERCISE IN PARSING, WIAH A VIEW B«P«crALLT TO THE APPLICATION OF THK OEXEEAL BULKS OF SYNTAX. fhel'SnVIl'can r::l3rt^^^^^^^^^ ®^"*^" «'?^ ^^"^^ -^ ^--'"^ the prooer rule tn f hJ^ f following questions ; and then apply E^rcTse construction of each word in the following 1 <(«^" ' . I i:y 120 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. *i ■ f Ml if Utl 1st. A noun or pronoun usednstlie Sudjecto/o Verb. — 'ind. As tlie Objkct of a verb or prepoHition.—^ui. la Aiu-osition with anotlu'r noun or pronouu.— 4tb. After tho verb 2h Be, &c.— 6th. In the PossKHSiVK cftse.— 6th. Tndkpkndknt case.— 7th. The Infini- TiVB.--8th. The rAttTicii'LK.--9th. AoRKKMKNT of PronouHs with thmv Antecedent)!. — lOth, AdRicKMKNTof a Verb or Pronoun, when /wo or more ningidar nominatives or antecedetits denoting different objects are taken conjointly.— 11th. When two or more Siuffular Nominatives or nntecudenta are so connected that the verb or pro- noun agrees with eaoh, skpaeatkly or one bxclusivklt. — 12th. ADJEOTivE3.~18th. Adveubs.— 14th. PaEPoamoNS.— 15th. Oo.v- JUNCTIONS. EXERCISE IN PARSING AND APPLTINO THE EULES OK SYNTAX TO THE OONSTUUO- TION OK WOUDS. Give tl>e construction of each word in tho following sentences,, and apply the proper Rule of Syntax ; or, parse tho words in full, and apply tho Rules of Syntax, as the teacher may direct. On yourself deiiend for aid. It was I who wrote the letter. He had the honor of being a director for life. Your being from home occasioned the delay. He did his utmost to please his friends. Calm was the day, and the scene delightful. They are much greater gainers than I by tliis unexpected event. Ho was in Paris last mouth. Will you lend me your knife. The house is thirty-six feet deep, and twenty-five wide. I like to see you behave so well. Whose gray top shall tremble, he descending. The prophets ! Where are they ? William, call at the doctor's as you return. I am come, in compliance, with your desire. The old house is fallen down. Proceeding on his journey he was seized with a dangerous malady. By what means shall we obtain wisdom. Whatever is worth doing at all, is worth doing well. Foolish persons are more apt to consider what they have lost than what they possess. What cannot be prevented must be endured. He who is a stranger to industry may possess, but he cannot enjoy. He is a friend whom I greatly respect, i saw who understood my remarks. They tauglit him and me to write. It was not I, but I know who it was. fitVMOLOUY PARSING WORDS. 121 They whom luxury hns corrupted cimnot relish tho pleasures of lit'o. The iiKjiiisitive jirc much to be pitied. I (iispatehed the letter mvself. lie injures himself bv his aiixietv. They gathered t!je ilowers fchemaelven. Hope, th'.* balm of lite, is our greatest friend. Temperauce the prt.-server of health, should be the study of all men. Ilia meat was locusts and wild honey. He was the life of thi' company. We have been attentive to our business to-day. Th(!se streams are deep and wide. They wailed for a tit time and place. A steady, sweet and cheerful temper alfords great delight to its posssessor. Before piiteriii}; on tlio in'Xt bu' j ■ct, tluTc ^liMuld lie a <:»>iHMal rovisal from llio l»t'!i;im)iii!x. This run lie v«'ry )h irmn^lily dotK^ by the aid of thr, « x iiiiiiiiKidii qirHtionH tiiid i x>'i<>is<>s mI llic cIohi; of each part. In ^(tii)!^ over tii<' rX'ic nc-i, it iiiiiv !>« only n ccssary t«> require thu const) uclion ol tlic wurdd uiid tiie ajip/nalion ot iba JlilieA of Syolux. 'as. iM "3^ m The follo\vin<^ Ibrms siionld be carefully examined and Ibliowed in parsing the exer- cises: — ." 1 ^'*'«i ORDER OF PAliSINa WOKDS ORALLY IX FULI*. MUUN, Com. y Noun. ]■ >fuml.or. ;"":''• ' ^'^'^^ 01>jc. Alwtr. Plur. Lidi'p. J Rii!e, 1 *-» '< ' ' ! » fi-<. t *"»•! '*?•"* "\. ■ >. / %• M-Ul. .J w /■'.I 122 XNQLICH ORAMMAK. o Pi o »4 I ill D H ->bi c 1, PL, >4 a ea a u 1-1 w eo ji § a o a> a S3 ^ a M ^ p J 4> O U i4 0) . ^ s § ^ 3 o o a PtOoo •oiOA •^ a O ^' a g O •a ? s * u o a © . o .._ ►H 03 |5 — -A .0) li^ a aS -A '. S> «* 3 «- a 3 aOi Ph li, Ph p4 fe a . ' ^ o . MOT ft, O •a08J9J « ^ is i ss Adverb of- ▲DVEEB. f Time, -j Place, j Number, | Quantity, y Modifyio.^ the 4 Manner, Mode, Interrog, fVerb, Adjeotire. Adverb. ETYMOLOGY — F\RtING WORDS. 123 pi It. I CONJUNCTION. M n Copulatire. \ j^^^.l''^®;. '^ ( Continuatire. Difitrlbutive. BiBJunotive ^ Alternative. Adversative. OOD- The words, Ac. The phrases, <&«. nectiog J The principal prope., Ac. The Bubord. props., Ao. PnKPOSITION. f Place, Direction, Rel. position, Time, „ • ., , . repoeition of -{ Agent or Instrument \. ^'^P^'^^^Hg the relation Cnuse or Motive, OppositiuD, PoBBessiou, Exclusion, bytween, Ac. FORM FOR WRITTEN EXERCISES IN PARSING, •" The minutest plant or animal, if it is examined attentively, affords a thousand wonders, and obliges us to admire and adore that Omnipotent Hand by which it was created." *The minutest . . . plant, . w .,, . animal. »/ it is examined, attentively . A limiting adjective, belonging to plant or animal. Descriptive adjective, superlative degree, belongs to plant or animal, according to Rule. Common noun, singular, nominative to affords and obliges. Disjunctive conjunction, distributive, connects plant and animal. Common noun, singular, nouiinatiYe to affords and obliges. Copulative conjunction, continuative, connects adver> bial clause, &c,, to principal. Personal pronoun, neuter, third, singular, (to agree with its antecedent, plant or animal, according to Rule, " Pronoun must agree, Ac.) and nomi- native to «3 examined, according to Rule. Verb, regular, transitive, third, singular, present, in- dicative, passive: agreeing with itg nominative it. According to Rule, "A verb, Ac." Adverb of manner, modifying the verb is examined.' '■* n , ^im \ • y ■ I' s ' u ■ '■ "'*?< i. ,'- 'ii 124 ttffords BPrOLISH GRAMMAR. i.wunand. teondera. obliges u» to admire . and adore it Verb, r^Milar, trHnsitivp, ihhti, sini^u'nr, prpsent. lu. fliDUive, Hf,M(M.ii,.r ,viU, iu pou.i p/ant or animal. nfoor.lintr f,, F{,i,,k^ •« ^ y^,^.\^ ^^u A (lifinitive ajlj^ciive, belonging lo (hoin^and u)onder$, ns one whule. Limiting ndj.Mtivo, rardlnnl, numera', belonglug to wovders, according to Rule, " Adjectives belong, A noun, common, plural, objective to affords. Rol» ''Trnnsitivo vo»bi!, Ac," ' C.^pulaMve conjunction, additive, connecting the co- oiMinate propositions " Tiie minutest, o/8ive. agreeing wiih its nominative it. according to Rule, " A verb must agree, &c." hand which uaa created. ETYMl»LOGY STKUCXaHE OF WORDS. 125 FORM FOR WKITTK.V EXKllCISES WHEN TUE CON- STRUOTIOX ONLY IS UEQUIUED. ♦"He was very poor, and begged earnestly for food." was . very poor and • • • • < begged ... earnettly . . for....... food. Personal pronoun, slanding for, &c,, and nominative to " was and be^^ged." A rerb, third, singular, to agree with its nominativ* " He." Adverb, modifying adjective " poor." Adjective, qualifying " He." Conjunction connecting the compound predicates "WM poor and begged." A verb, third, singular, to agree with its norainatiTe " He." Adverb, modifying " bepged." A preposition showing the relation between " beffgad" and " food." A noun objective to " begged." THE STRUCTURE OF WORDS. Th« following section on the structure of words is taken from More!! B Oramtnur. 1. ROOTS AND DEBIVATIVES. 463. We have already given an account of the different kinds of words in the English language, and of the various inflexions they undergo; the next thing is to show the sources from which the words are derived, and to follow the processes by which they are formed. 1. A simple word, of whose origin we can give no further account is termed a root. English roots consists of such words as father ton, love, strong, come, go, tree, and most other monosyllables which convey a simple notion or idea. 2. A simple word or root p.oraetimps undt.o'oes an alteration of form, either by changing ibe vowel eound, or by modifying the con- •onanta. Thus, strong becomes strength; shake becomes shock; I f^^tffei:! K( *!l 'i M Ill ■ •, '■' 136 KNULISH UHAMMAR. Vln..^ hcH.»,n<.8 ylaz., ,lo. These wc tenu primary derivative, or 3 Fro.M M,o primaiy (lorivutivoH, or Hton.H of the l.M,f?unKC. olhrr becomes .m,.r/,/.„ ; ./,.;c;- \H.n,„..H *A„rA/„i, ; a/aMSo8 '. . 1 vfo or more words nr« Hoinetinio« joino.i toirother to exnroM ^ht:»o we lanu compound wordi. '»p'«/«ma»t, Ac. 2. HOUKOK or KNHMSU WOBDH. 46d<. Tho principal busis of tlio English teu^^''' '', ^^'' Anglo-Saxon clement. Of ^b,000 Avords it is reckoned that about 28,- 000 spring from this source. Nearly all tJic simple roots and primary derivatives are 01 baxon origin, and a large proportion of the secondary derivatives and compound words also. ' ^ nnnnUfin^'^f'!?' *=""^^""«^^ '"«^''« «r lefl8 witli the oriclnal Celtic T^pulnt on of th.8 country, they naturally adopted a cerSn num- ber of Celtic roots into their lang«ago. These roots haveZcoZ ^ZT-'' "' «fr»\»^t«d to the^ Saxon form anrpronuncia?bn io «« '" r"" M v'"'^ to recognise them as coming f^rom a fore gn tTeThiol" '"'^;'^^"/« "'« "'^'"^^ of mountains, rivers, and l3 ties, which are to a larger extent Celtic, wo niky adduce the fo ri'nl' slTdl ""f' T:^' ^''^^ ^"- be^enlSlau/to EDgltlKl!. ''''*• '^"^ ^''"' ""'"« ''"^^ »»t« *»^o modern fZ^f ?,"'"P- Smooth. 1 rat. Tarry. Dun. i;"-. I^a'»ty.. Glen. Cnbm. Daru. Crng. Cobble. Pail. jj^ Quay. Pitcher. Lass. ma;' Fronni? "^''^tJ '^ ^"^'"'''"'^ ^^ ''^^ Novmaus introduced the Nor- IheVl^nn '"*« t'f ,««""try. As the Norman-Freuch was one of idfom moTnjV'*' ^'"""^ ''r^"^- ""' °^ ^'^^ prevalence of the Latfa Lrafll „ ^^"^"'^g*'^ 'ts introduction prepared the way for Sve Fi?i r^! T^tr ^^^"g'^'^IIy I^atin wori upon our prim?- St°?-.''i-'^;'?^-. ^""y «^™« i'^^li'-^^^tly throuS, theF?enTi. iatin w.t.r. ^i:;!^.:^.!^'^! «^ ^^« French ori_gin; but as was the learned language of Europe all through, and even Ac. KTYMOLOOY— STRUCTURE OF WORDS. IjJT beyond the Mid.lle AgeP, n still gronter number of wohIh wcr« gradually n.troduccl directly from tl.o J.atiu by Kr.gU wrH^Jf Latia roo/fl have in ecoroely any instance, been brought ov«r in tbe.r »,m,,lo form int<, the Kn^iiHl. language, but c.ulyfnth. form 01 Bccoudary derivatives. Thus, we never siy to po7, r to mit ^^ cisj:;.;r'" '-'''^ ^-"^'-'^ -^ -^ ^^ unLffh'T'^*'/'"' philosophy were first cultivated in Eurone or Jesi under Greek masters, the terms and nhrasea ot the (Ireek Ungungo became naturally introduced into the scientl angua^e of Europe. Hence most technical terms in mathematics 'pKifs mechcme botany, as wel' as art and philosophy, have ben Crow ed from Greek sources. These tecl.nical terms with a f«w nthl: words which have gradually come into more Jommi; use form tl!i P'-fent Greek element in the English language ' 4. A few words in addition have found their way into our Ian CT/T/l'^'"/'"°' '••« Spanish, and even Z Hetew *„ J tltnZ-l.l'a ^^'''' ^n '^'^'J^ ?"«'=^«^«^ >» becoming thoroVhly naturalized as a part of our modern English. "'"uguiy 3. PREFIXES. 465. Most cf the secondary derivatives in our language are formed by putting a sylla- ble either before or after the root. A sylla- ble put before the root is termed a prefix, a syllabic put afie?' the root is called an affix. wcnls^it wnf r P'7,". ^'''\ '"^P«''t*"t pari in the structure of wcrds, It will bo useful here to give a list of them, classified ac- cording to the language from which they are derived. 8AX0N PREKIXES. ^, signifying in or o»j ; as, abed, ashore, i^*, formmg transitive verba out of intransitive, } as. bespeak or adding intensity to the meaning, f besmear For signifying the contrary ; as, forbid, forbear. J^j!^' before : as, foretell, forebode. jjij, ' middle ; as, midway, midshipman. \l *' failure ; as, mishap, mJHtuke. ^' not ; as, never, nor. Yf^^p at'ove ; as, overlay, overdone. '» excelling ; as, outdo, outrun. ■ u 't: '4 ■ t M ** >:J' \ •i. li ./' 128 ENOLI81I GRAMMAR. 81 -*.. ^vf-^.. P»»t not ; MB, undo, unnldllcd. ^|S ...... lliiH ; n«, U» lUy, to-iiiKlit '*^'*» MBniiul or iiwuy ; ni., wllli«(niul, with- UMtur, Ix'iuulli ; an, iiii(l«t», di. npnit ; n«. «li«lodf't; nc, oloct, ixpoi t. •W'"« ...J... «'qnully ; iiH, otjiiitliHtnnt. *"''<'. l)«'y»'ii) in or into; UH, induct. in (do. adjfolivf) not, ; im, iimlrnjant. |"'**''» hot weoii ; ltd, intiTliida. 'j'''<*. •iKiiifying wilhin; nn, intioduco. ^''"i not ; iiH, iiondoHoript. Ob {of, op, oc), nKuiiiBt, or, in iho wuy of; ai, olifliruct, occur. ■^*''t lliroujjjli ; an, pt'i npiro. ■^*'*'» nltrr ; UH, poHtpono. / r«r, pr«, lioforo ; «•!, pie-onlnin. •^*'**^*""» bi Hido. pftHt ; a«, pi'«t«rn)lt. •^''**» f«'i th ; HH, pnijeol. ^*' I'lU'k ; HH, it!iuit. •j^*'''"*'' l)Hfkwunls ; iiR. retroipectioo. *'• npnrt ; as, ■oitiiiiite. . Sub, (tuf, auc, #Mr) undir ; as, pul.jjct. ^"'''"■» • undcnioiitli ; ii», Pubtt'rfuge. ^''P*""* ovt»r ; n». Hiipci tluUB. 7r«i«j, . across ; as, iinnsport. ^"^('t beyond; as, ultittinontane. aDKRK rai'.rixKS. A or ^» (a, ok) not ; as, nimrdiy. Amphi {ajx(pi). ...,=, both • as, up.pil'.ihioMS. Afia{apa}, up ; as, unutomy. Antt (oKTi), against, ; n», nniiohriatiau. ICTVMOl,0«.lf-.H.|,|,;CTUHIC OW WORMP. ffO /v./^ ; "''^"; '• "••If ; nil. niilnoiMt JiaV!T^ 'l-wu.MH.nilM.lropho. v:V;;-^' ;''-.c^l. : nn, ,li.u„.!,.or: yL- / /'• . '" ; »«. <'nliiinn.iriIo. /J,(t\ "I"»» ; ft", rpiliipli. ^" ;•;>; , ^V«II; „H.n,,,|,u„y. j/Z\f\ f '•^'"' • ■"• '•vp«rrri»i,.nl. Ifr.i \ """«•"•; »^l.y|.oll„.Hi.. / ara (7ra;,a). |„.H|,k, ; „«. pimufox. *''J'«. •»//. 'Vn (n'U.) with ; „,, «y,„pm,,y, „y|I„^|,„ SSXAMrWATlON QlIIWriONS AND KXKRCISrH ON THF HTKircrniKK OF wouds. wonu'tr'T'" '""'] ^"V"''' ''"•;^".' "'^^^ "'"'"'Plo^ of roof.. Wl„it m.uy .lcr.vut.vp,. Ivhut wo.-.h .no ,..,.„,„,| ,rcnnUar„ d rival iV»f (3.VO .x:u,,plo« of „o«o„.lury .IcivalivH. Wl„.t wor h ur„ , Xl oo...pou.,,l w<..-.I«» (}iv« ..xM„.pI,.g of oompo... .iTv ,«/ What ^ tho„p„,| wonlH .„ oo.n.no,, u^« i,- th« K..^;liKl. Im..^„u^„. how mar y ar« ch.nv,<| (.„„, rh.M „,„„,,. » Whut «h,«Ho„ of wo. it F.o.n what ofh«r .< urL have a il!:"".*!.''. ^''■'"'•^'' "'''"'•. ?^" l''« «'^'"i'loat,ion of oacli of th« •-.-.. p.CiixvB n.'o.>mpai..r«l wiU. an oxuniplo (,o illu«trato it Uowmany L„t.n p.vr,x(.Ha.o tho..? k,.pJu th.-m. (live the ».gn.ficat.ou of each of the Latin prelixca. uccomp«"ieci^lIth an li'^'U I *" \M) VNtlfjatI iiHAMMAn. ♦•»*mpU Us illnilrM(«« W. ll.nv mnuy {irt^tk |iii>(|ii Hioy nn« Ji»rlt»'il K«»ivwmn. iiuMirpion, pnvinK^s, ohlnlion, irprovp, i«i« Irnol. iiiihMl\i,M\ iui(otMi\lon, fM»linmMlJHinli»mnlii, illicil. iniiUBO, nl»i«lrftol, iioimmU'. lunplMhioufi, wilhMiniul. oir- iMunl.MMilion, opimM>piu'v, ivvi», prolinil»\ rohnmn,li», rpilrtph, mitlwny, oit-t'llon, oppuwo, inunvliy. luo'iolvpo, ouphony, luMnixphiMo, oul«hs rrMnin, mipiM«n«|«», mil»Ho- tpiont, rtniilmpliHi. l\i'loro^tM»poui«, bipoil, Kubd'irugp, ci»- inoidf»niM», upoimuI, inwatinMo. 4. HTinurniUR o\f THK NOUN. '10(1 Kn^'llsh nouHN nn» oilluM',— 1. Ori- ginal II(u>r HiiMUs; l\, JSfM'ondnrv IVmmvmUvon or Hrnn- ohovs; or, 4 Compound Words. "^ 1. Th» orlfflnn) N«itm turtr* of lhi» KnHlinh liin^nnKn ooniUI of H\«» »mh><»n of nU thtt «vmn\on uhkotn ofnnhno nixl luitimn llfo »iNMn>.l m ; B\»oh Mi, Shh, wrtim, «?iif, «#»i. nhme^ nwk; hill, frtthtr, f*<»*, «>», «N»ff, lA^jH, iA»j7, irlf, Ao. Tl»<«i»«> wor«1«, nn»l olhorn of \ho bi\im«» kind, Imvo iloiornddil to «• llwonch ouv Smxoh rorofKtl»«»« fioin ii pi^rlodlyln^ Wr.nwl nit VMOh of iUtlorionl lo onvoh. hnvlnH; »iH.lrtiH:oiH» only \mWh\ olmiiiiPg ill •i><»ninfj nu«l pi'on.mv>lrtlion, wltliout lU, RinoBinir thoir niiuU. S. KnjiU»lv nomn, winoh csmmo umloi- tho ilMrt of ifiWmfirv f^rivfi- ^♦•w, ftt-* hIbo, with fi>w «»xivplion!», of Hnxoii orluin. 'riicv nrrm<>vUii foUrtWB;— O.) Uv mofUfVinp iho vowwl oftlin mot; np, /?/<•»«, h!hi ^ /w,/, /iW.- iiN«i Ao«,/. knit, !«,>/, Mi.<; «t7, W.I/. «iMir, liono ; (l/wA^ {"i) l\v modifying: «'»<> flnnl <>on«oniM\< of tha root, or mMini? «fnv*, rff-^/l .• ji»»i»7<(, w«i7A .- ^W«Vv«', Af-/i>^'. ^>»*ot'*, proo/. PITVMIII.OUV — NTHUtTUNU OK fttWii. 131 iW'rIvptI frnin rurhi. hnrivAil fr(»m iiiiunw. / »»,) fly IIHHllfrlllK l«oHl fnWMl nikI OniiaiiMnMl; NN. Hvf, lift, ht*, n. KiikIIhIi iMMiiiM, wltlfh (•MMiii uiulni ilm IKIh nf »0>mn>Urf/ tttri i'rthvtf, Nm fniiiiiMl liy n citimliliMKlilii viiilMty nriini*n«. A HiiRoti iit>ilvnllv»*« nil' nMiiiiMl liy llm UAUmUt^ nniiMn ~ (1.) Kifff^ifyinij nf)0nl or it>i»f. nn, ll«», ilni . MM, ill lull, iliiiMlinnl , liiKtf, hrnKK'it-l t(M, pIMI, llMIIHlor. M, »H'«IM, f(l'(Ullnfr»»M nn, iliiric, itiullii^. riM, liiinit, Initiliklti. nn, liill, hilliiok. M, Mi'PHIll, HilciUlllnl, ; rtiiwm', (Itiwwrnl. (».) IfpnnUnff nhtrrtfl hitnt, nwh n» Hlal0, CcntUUim, AeHnn, ho M, frlmiil, rilPiiilnliip, UN, nmn, itmnlKHiil n«, kiii^, kliiKilmii nn, rIavo, ulnvdry na, till, llllii((a. «% Uiitfli, lniitflik(>r. M, wed, wmiriKik, ^ • f llfM. (4.) Ittnntiny Inatrumunt, (kn, n\n{, girilio. M, dliovfl, nliovfll. nn, hnt'k, lintolint. tl Tjntin mill Kreiioli ilerlviillvfl« urn f(»rm«il l>y Uia followlnt{ AfTixflH : — (I.) •%wi/vifi// iiH oin Laiin words in tas ; i' as. diguitas. j From Latin words in tudo ,-■ aa, nmllitiid'). j From LaMii words in ura ; ( as, tiuctnra. C. Greek derivati es are formed by the following aflSxes :- ( 1 .) Signifying agent or person, en flp, musician. . From Greek words in «o. (M- »*', a?, sophist. iffT (' ip\ ite, as, Israelite (patronymic). ',\\\\', ZZ{ites) (2.) Forming Diminutives. "'' "'*'"«'^- From Greek aar.p.aKos. (8.) SIONIFTINO ABSTRACT 1DKA8 itk, '. yi •«w, sm, M, epitome, anarchy. From Greek nouns ir. n (e.) "" ''•■■— (From Greek nouns in lafios ot i KTfia (ismoH or itima.) j Fron. (;ree|{ adjectives in im. - ( a. -01/ (koM, a. 07i.) F'om G enk nounsin ^o (ma.) Prom Greek nouns in on (sig) mti^Tr:*:"' .""""! of Saxon origin e:ti8tlarf.ely in (he nr«s!,„» Xin_.!.„ .n, gu.iiif. and are not linfMqnentlv coined' na n^ni^aif "" in a, *if, as, deism, as, arithmetic. ap, panorama, as, hy|.oth«8i8. ETrMOLOGY— STRUCTURE OF MOUN. }$$ * C^'mpoond words, derived from Lttf in ftnrl n..«»i, l in tl.e.r c ..n pound' foun fro.nThosf wl?! 'v '' *"'''"°^*'* •oiued only for «c.eotific purposes ^^"^"^oes. N«w ones ««, BXAMINATION Q^ESTIOXS jm THE STRUCTURE OF to tn<.8e dr rived from a(IY'e(ivH^t ni^^ »k ^ ''«^'o-^« wmcn TC/ G,ve e«.„|'l;-sof n„u„s of this kind f„,™,d du'ectlvlrura «.i;rb"'r ' :::;r'T.:;;.' :::;id if"c"r ":; ''«"'«?"•"'"' oritfii. I Give ..vUnl^r Jv. / of compound nouns of S.ixoa EXVAiClSK ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE NOUN ieLe^l7 «>uf aliBf of tea noun roots, ten ;.W,«ary derivaliree tea »ec > 5. STRUCTURE OF THE ADJECTIVE. 467. English Adjectives, like English Nouns, are either,—!. Original Eoots; 2 Primary Derivatives ; 3. Secondary Deriva- tives; or 4, Compound Words. 1. Many adjectives derived from the Saxon are roots, inasmuch as no simpler form of the word can now be assigned from which they have originally sprung. Such are, good, bad, long, short, high, inin, thick, white, black, d:o. ^' if 2. English adjectives, which come under the title of primary derivatives, are also of Saxon origin. They are formed, like the noun-stems, from verbs and nouns, or other adjectives, in the following ways :— (1.) By modifying the vowel ; as, fill, full; wring, wong- pride, proud; string, strong. " v>f ' (2.) By modifying or adding a consonant ; as, loathe, loth; four, fourth. '' ' (8.) By modifying both vowel and consonant ; as, wit, wise; five, dertvattves, are formed by a considerable variety of affixes :— !>';;-' 4 i ETYMOLOGY— STRUCTURE OF ADJECTIVES. 155 A. Saxon derivatives are formed by the following :— •n, foid, /«^ lett, tome, ward, M, left-handed. as, wooden, as, soutliern. ) as, fioutherly. J ns, fourfold, as, truthful. Participle form of adjectiye. Meaning material, i . . . direction (used with the points of the compasn.) repetition, full of. 1 as, whitish, boyish, -j * ' * ^^iJi-«r (diminutive) and , , ( eometiiiies likeness. as, houseless, as, lifelike. ) as, lovely. ) as, winsome, as, windward, as, mighty. without, resemblance ov fitness. . . . possession of some quality. . . . direction!, to a place. '"' / £ V ••''»""6"Y' '''lie adjectival form of a noun un (prefix), as, UDgocfly. Meaning not. B. Latin derivatives ire formed by the following:— o^ as, equal. i ^^'^"^ I^ati" adjectives in alias; an as, human. i ^^'°™ ^'*'»° adjectives in anus ; ( as, ' - as, egualis. Latin ai.^ I uo, humanus. ant, ent, as, elegant, eminent, -j ^'^^^ ^^*'" adjectives in ans, .,(preced--) ^ ««« ; as. ./«^«n,. ed by a I _„ conson-p^'™*''"®- ant), J J^«. as, horrific. ferous, as, carboniferous. ible, able, »«, visible. il, He. olent, cse, ous, Tile. hh. as, timid. as, fertile. as, violent. as, verbose, copious. r., V •pit, Uuuuio. I From Latin adjectives in nu$ •j (preceded by a consonant); ( as, marinua, j From Latin adjectives mficus; ( as, horrificus. ' From Latin adjectives in fer and/ ^;^^ . tort/, Bory, ae nigratory. as, triplex. From Latin adjectives in toriuty sorius ; as, migratorixts. 'I, ii' i-:'.. \ 'i-.it, ■■kH-U- \$Q RNCJMBll <4NAMMAR. im It* I rtw iia, cnptiv(». J Fnmt hniin notir(«^ in tivui ; . I'Voiii l.iitiii ndjoctivpii in mmi ,- HP. ardntm. . I'Vnni liiilin «tljcolive» In ywui; Yj m, hioroKl.vpl.iji. ( From (Jr.vk n.ljMivti in i^o.: U.inf?'^'"""!^ HHj,.HiT..« rxiM, to ft lary,. „,H,t |„ M,„ K. Kll.1, RXAMINATION QtlKSTlONS m THK HTKUOTURK OK TllK ADJKUTIVK. U\ Info how mnr.y .>ln.Boii «ro Km^IihI, n.ljrotiv,.. ,lividr,l nrror.finr th«ir sliuoturo f ()iv»> oxan.plcH of 8,,xon mljootivoH wliich nro oriKuml root,. Im'.iu wl.nt nourt'c do n.o .uljoohto^ Mmi aio pij- mry (lonvHhvr. ron„. \ Kron, wl,,»t mo (hoy iormnd !• Il„w U hoyfomuM V (Jiv. .^xmnp|,>« of n.ljod.voK •r„rnM.,l in ..hH, way. <;iv« Um uflUoc on,plov,>d |„ fonninjj; H,o S.ixon eooon.lury tlorivu. tiv*« Hi«.tM.t« (ho Myrnitimlion <.f n.ol. by an oxMn.piV Glr<. hoMKxcH ..mpoyiMl ,n forminir tlu^ L„li„ flvoon.lary .U'rlvativM. JIIu»trato one I by an oxnn.pUs HOJinw; from what IwiUn a.lj.oliv. It m d,.nv«.d How nio (ho (Irork a.ijootivr, of (|,o oiu„ of WrtbLrT"'''''' '"l'"7M . »"-tr"i« ouch by an oxampl. Wlmt IR Raid ot comjKumd adjootivos? SXMUCI8K ON THK STRUOTURK iW TllK AD.IECTIVB 1. Write or give a list of ton original roi.la. I. Write prinuuy dorivativoR from the following words:— Siring, dif, htal, htat, trow, »w>n<;, ptule, fnve. 8. Point ont (ho nffixos and give (hoir nioaning in (he following •♦oondary doiivativo* ;— ' J)mtf,, mouHtnmoH^ «^rAr«#, /rtMV/"../. Aa;„r,mrc/. carhvniftroMU ^rn. mtnfold, tdibh, eatnhh, 0m then, bhrki,h, ko.. i. Write ont a li«t of twenty Saxon derivativM. nn.l *»-«!, li«tui uoiivnnvoH, and stato what ihe atlix of taoh impliof. BTTMOLOaY—llTRUCTURR OF PBONOtlUf. 157 fl. HTiiuanniK of tiik imionoun. 408. I'ronouns uro (jiilior.—l. Original Koots; 2. JJerivativ(^8 ; or, 3, Compound WordH, All of Uhmii RIO of Hiuon orij^in, ixcHpf, " otie." 1. Tli« pronouns wliicli may l).» rflunt0, Objpotlvo form from tfinn. Originiilly u (IhUvg f»»rm fnnn Mio muMo. /»# Niid lUMit. hit of tliu HuxoM Aff, fif>o, hit, (li«, alie. U) : now nil jti<:tivo inimo. OrlKinallv a rcminino iluUve and noBsesiIra form from tlio Hnxon hto. OrigiiiHlly n dativo form from lh« Hnxon that. roiiBi!Mive form from m«. • • • • thou. 9 him, Iltr, rh, Oar, Yuur, Their, Mine, Thtnt, Iftfru, llin^ Onm, Yonrt, 7'heira, Jilt. Whom, What, Oh9, One'it, Which, • • . . toe. • • . . j/ou, • • • » they. • • . . mif. . . thf/, • • • • her. hit. • • . . our. your. • • • . their. • • . . it (mo(lorn). Objectiro form from who; originiilly datire. Wtuler form fror.i who. Doiived from - viBtion o( hofnnie. I'oHBOBMive f»irm of one. A <'<»niponml form oriRinnllr from %aho and like t ... «i.- L.< 1..! I !• I r...> 8. 1'hi \Ui Utv. o compound irordB ««// nnd own, pronuuuu ; ui Cyi,iii;n «i}ii«ot w/iUfc), pronouns aro Uiobc ftrnud by the union of the with varioiiB of ih« p'lBonal «nd pof^Bessir* fyael/, nty own, themnelvee, vne'/aeif, &c 4 ^1 lub MNUI.INli intAMMAH. EXAMINATION miKXrioNM ON TIIM HTmniTlfUI'l UV THM I'UONOUN. h\U\ how nmnv ^^n^n,^n mo |moiiimiiiii liivMpit Nooniitiim |,o fhoh »lo»lvnMt»n UM.I «tnio»nr0 f 0| wluit nH|>rln «n» Ihoy » Wlilrli m,. Uirt |M-oitoun« wliloh b.tMumiiitiil fonun nit* .liMivHlivon, iu>ii f WliHi ii* nitl.i of (1)0 oonipoiiinl proiiiMniH f J H f-f •too. I'liglish mm'Iks nn* (^il(i(%-- 1. Ori. ^innl Hoots; ± IVimnrv l)orivuliv(^N ; or, •M. Hivoiulnr^v Dorivntivivs. Ooi«pou«a Vmlw otth lumlly l.« inM f,, oxlul In il,« lil„tf||,|, u„. I. All ih« KntfH«h vj.lv. ,.| 11,0 old f'oim of ,nm|nirnt,l,.n i*,-^ nf w\m»;:'''"' " ' "^ ^'""' '*'■'" "^'•''•""' '-'« ''<^«i", i<],;u;;; - ,,^jr"'^lT''''' "*I'"'*-!'"'" •»*'"^'' v**''!*. whlol, ,„o „ow m»nlnKnli».l mwh UK to . ho ,no,|.„. form, worn ono. con|ug«t..l nooonll. i to h« K«r.l^,l MR or\^\m\ ^^^^^u of tl,o I.u«KviHKo. jj- R«»Rli"h vorim Nvhi,,h ro.o*. n.ulor )h« riKin. (^) •I'l''' «• Ht inj( both vowoU.ul oon«onm,t; n«. ^trink, drmch : }fiit»9, piASf . A(»N«»/, Ann/ .• f/TiH(;, ♦/'» Uj prefixing,* or i ; «», aMfi,«^ I'lliMh „lu,„|,,„-i .... fr,,fnmt,Hh, f,m<». ••«. lMIIM,hu.|ll«l,} .... ',,,,Woii«). ink ": "a::il*' ;::: tar""-^"™ < • • • • t • • • 111 O.Mlf. Itnlii, Hull,, T.. .hy. To «..M.|. 'I'm imIii. 'I'o mII„ ««ni .lay. MHuy p,h,|, v,h„ |,„v,; „„^' ,„„ a. m ,il 11 1 I), linllii tlnilvftlJvfl«m'i» roiriiod— (1.) Ki'orii Hid roi.f, of Mm voih ; hr, fl'iiin l)|«o(>ni, (JoiHMIf, (Ntiiilflhuj, Di'fmitl, <• M I) II Ooiioiiri'uin. ('0M»l»»»I.H(irM. Mpfflmlrttn. liirtinHwi'o. (a.) l*Voin tliti m\)\m (»(' tlio verb; hh, Aot, Aihljf, AfUM'Jlf,, OiPol»i(,imi, AdVol.iiii. iMVOBlijrii 1,11111. Kxp«(lii,iiiii. »»{»*♦ >i V .'I '^l^f ; ' >'': 140 JCNULISH GRAMMAR. ff/^ ■II EXAMINATION QUESTIONS ON THE STRUCTURE OP THE VEKH. Into w lint cla!?gos nro Eo^'lish verba divided acnudingto their oriijiii and Htiuetiiro?— Which verbs are oiij,'iiml roots f— What is their origin I— What is tho origin of the prinviry derivutivfa? — How nro ihoy formed ?—Uivo oxuniph-s yf primary dcrivntivon formed in eacli way ?— How are tho secondary dorivativeg formed? —Give tho nfHx<'8 used in forming the Saxon Hecomlary deriva- tives f—llhistrnte tho signification of each by an example l~Give •xamnles of Saxon nonnsand adjectives turned into vorliH, witliout any change wl)atever f— How nro tho Latin secondary dcrivativei formed ?—Oiv^ examploa f— How nro Urotk derivatives formed! EXERCISE ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE VERB 1. Give a list of English root verbs and their principal part. 2. Givo primary derivatives from (ho following roots .—Fall, rite, will, atrno, hound, rush,J{i/, drop, draw, breathe, ait, lie, blood, melt, waah, ahake, dr^y, 8. Point out tho nflixcp, if any, of the following words, and de- <«rmine their meaning i—Scatfer, whiten, harden, imitate, clamherf prattle, exist, assitt, linger, ahujjle, bully, baptize, sitapect, terminate, expedite, inhabit. 4. Give a list of twenty Snxon, twenty Lntin, and five Greek de- rivatives ; exphiin tho force of tho affix in each, or bIiow where an affix is wanting. ^H ^^! i L r v 8. STRUCTURE OF THE ADVERB. 470. English Adverbs are either — 1. Ori- ginal Roots; 2. Primary Derivatives; 3. Secondary Derivatives; or, 4. Compound Words. 1. The original adverbs of the English language consist of a few monosyllables derived from the Saxon; such )x», noio, then, there, here, o/t, well, til, not, so, thus. Oba.—Then, there, thux, and here, have now been traced pretty dearly to genitive, accusative, and dative forms of tho Saxon de- 2. Primary derivatives are formed — (1.) From numerals ; as. bno^ propositions of the Englisli languatre are Uie^ following:-^!/, hy, for, from, in, on, of, till, to, through, up, Iiemark.-—A6 prepositions are relational words, and always ap- pear later in tlie devtaopment of a language than words coru'oyiuF«r6a/ prepositions are simply the imperative and parti- cipial forms of verbs used prenositionally ; e.g., Concerning dur- xng, regarding, respecting, touchivg, save, and except. All the prepositions of the first and second class are of Saxon ongm ; those of the third, of Latin. 10. STRUCTURE OF THE CONJUNCTION. 172. English Conjunctions may be class- '*i>. ETYMOLOOY—STRUCTURIC OF CONJUNCTION. 143 cd imdcr the three heads— 1. Simple; 2. Derivative; 3. Compound. 1. The nitnple conjunctiong of the English laoj^uiufe are.— ^nrf or, out, I/, a«. o -o I , 2. The derived conjunctions are ■uch ai-JV^or, niither, fithsr, than, though, whethtr, evenjor, that, $inee, ieeinif, except. 3. Compound conjunctiont are Buoh as are made up of two or more other words; m, Howbeit, in at far a»,neverlheleSs, moreover, wherefore, whtreai, although, Ac. M.I ^ ^1 ™^}{J^^'^^(^'^ QUESTIONS ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE ADVERB, PREPOSITION AND CONJUNCTION ,f^T "? W"u *^T®'''* ^'^'^«^ according to their origin and structure ?-0f what do the original adverbs consist f~Repeat eight or ten examples of them t-What is said of then, there, iiue\ How are the prm.ary derivatives formed l-Give examples of pri- mary derivatives formed in each way J-What is the origin and use of this class of adverbs f-How are adverbs belonging to the class of secondary derivatives farmed f-Give examples of ad verb« ad-^tivesT '° ^^^'^ ^^^ '~^'^® examples of compound PREPOSITION. How may prepositions be divided according to their origin and structure f-Which are the simple original prepositions flwhat formfi'i^'n * ^ ""°5* origlnf-How arc derived prepositions exam 1 * examples.— What are verbal prepositions ?--Giv« CONJUNCTION. How may conjunctions be divided according to their structure f -Name the simple conjunctions.-Name the derived conjunctions —Name the compound conjunctions. EXERCISE ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE ADVERB PRE. POSITION AND CONJUNCTION. 1. Give a list of original adverbs, and of primary derivatives showing from what the latter are derived. 2. In the following, point out the affixes and prefixes, and de- termine ihe meaning of each :— Always, ahortbs, daily lik',"-,^ aOroad, betimes, heavenward, forward, adrift, be/ore. ' ' S. Give a list of twenty compound adverbs. ' t . ^ ^ -ik "a;'& fe•^":^^t1 144 EIVOLISH GRAMMAR. 4. State which of tb«' f..llowinflr preposltionB are original, which d«rivpfl, and «hi(h verhil :^ At hf, around, about, nn, of, concrn- tmg. till, through, against, below, beyond, touching, during, up, mtk tOBcept. ^ ' 6. Slate. which of the foMowing co»Junctione aro original, which drrivfd, and which c^.mpourid :~/l,„/ exth'^r, <|i-, nnlher, but, than through, nevertheU»a, if, whether, even, mice, although, moreover, itting, ^ These etercisea should be followpd hy lesBons on the Latin and •Or<«k loolH II, the li.ngiiaije, till fx-'iciwes, isuch iih 4he foliow- ififrcan benadily .loiii':-(iive the Suxori noun an.) adjective roots, •nd illusrrate each by jjivin-^ words derived from tlieJii —Give the Latin noon roots, and words deiived from each. ,Oivo tho Latin veib rotiis, «nd woids derived from each.— (Jive the Latin adjec- tive roots, and words derived from e..ch.--Giv.! tiic Oreeli noun roots, and word.Hi.'erivod from each.— Give the Greek veib roots and wi.rds derived from enoh. -Give iLe Greek adjettive roou! «nd words derived fr«|iu each, Ac. f, I.: «l i WkWt' ¥ WUm\ b ■■■a h IIH' ■M i: ||flH|T IL a* ART III. SYNTAX. »;>.' ;^--.,i*ri DEFlNlTlOm. 473. Syntax treats of the arran^ment and combination of words in sentences. PftOfOSTTIOX. 474. A Proposition is a predicate con- nected with Its subject to express a thought- as, '*man is ?Horlal." ' 476. Propopifir.ns nmy be D.rlaratory ; „s. God is love; or L.ter- rogatory; >s, Will you ffof or Evehunalory ; as, What trouOle.au have I or Imperative; as, Prepare to march. ^ 476. Propositions may be divided, accord- ing to the relation they bear to each other, when united in an extended sentence, into Principal and Subordinate. 477. A Principal Propoe tion is one which does not depend on or form a subordinate part . f any other centence. 478. A Suhordiiiate Prop<.ntio„ is one which dne» depend oq Bome other sentence, and perforn, the part of a noun, «djeclive or adverb to the wo.d or .enlenee with which it is suhordiuat-ly con. nectcd; as, I see that you are .n a hnrry (a noun eeutence). ThU is the lK>ok mmh I ievt (an a.ije.tive sentence). I will visit you V>hen 1 return (an adverbial sentence). The term co-ordinaLiu •{) posed to tubotdiuate. ill # r '^ I 146 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. H "^a B' SENTENCE. 479. A Sentence is a proposition ; or, a number of propositions connected together in the expression of an extended thought. 480. A Sentence is either Simple, Com- plex, or Compound. '■ 481. A Simple Sentence consists of but one proposition ; as, " Columbus discovered America." 482. A Compound Sentence consists of two or more principal propositions co-ordi- nate with each other ; as, " It was night and the moon shone brightly J^ 483. A Complex Sentence consists of one principal proposition with one or more sub- ordinate clauses connected with it ; as, "He will be rewarded when he returns'' CLAUSE. 484. The propositions of Compound and Complex SeDteoces are called « Clauses." PHRASE. 485. A Phrase is any combination of words sanctioned by usage which is not a proposition; as, ''In fact:' '' Having done so." ''To he compelled to imit," &c. 486. Phrases are divided, like subordinate clauses, according to the office theylperform into noun, adjective, and adverbial phraua. 487. Phrases, like sentences, are also Simple^ Complex, or Com- pound. 488. A phrase is Simple when it has no other phrase either eubordinately or co-ordluateiy connected with it ; aa, " On the ffround." SYNTAX—ANALYSIS. i-M 147 489. A phrase is Compound when it conBieta nf *«,« risen no h j^lipr " •« rr« • i . j ""^''W'U , as, lo nave woods" "• ""^^'"^ "^^^^^^^ ^-« «o." "Through the EXAMINATION QUESTION THE DEFINITION'S tence ? Into ^hat three classes Zsentn'r^- ^^«^ " "^ ««"' a simple sentence ? What is a onmL ,^ ^'^^ '^''''^^^ ^ What is ample*. What is a coriV senteS 1''"*''''' * ^'^« '^'^ «■ i. meant by a clause " GWe an exaLnl. 'w. T^^^'' "^^^^ phrase f Give examples of phrases &„„.^^'^ '^ '°?°* ^Y • of what three parts of speech^ What ^s the dS^^^ K^P^^*^« a simple, compound, and complex nhrl!» r'-''*'°° ^**^««'» «ach. Give examplea of Infinif?!! P'',^?^®? , G»ve examples of phrases. ^ " °* ^"fi'^^tive. participial, and prepositiona T -1, XL ^^^^^^SE ON THE DEFINITIONS known. It is obrous why he did no? fo \T-' short and art is Inti^ ixri 4. • . , &^' -^"e is what is low Jse a„^d sJInfrt' " TalV?'*^' '""*'"« ' « skill ; talent I's w^!fr f J* ?°* '' i'°^«''' *»<=* Shall l' study th* lei; 3 u' """'^^ """^y- "6 •'ae Dell, feend your harnfiRs fn hn ^«^„,v_ j t^lVw 1;.^ ^'M J - W,i 148 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. m ■-.'-I.' 1. In tbe nbove exercise, point out the simple, compooDd, and complex SfDtences. 2. Claseify eaeh subordinate clause ns noun, adjective, or adver- bial. 8. Point out the phrases and classify them: Int., as preposi- tional, infinilive, and participial. 2u(i., a!^ noun, adjeclive, and ad- verbial. 8rd., as simple, compound, and complex. THE ELEMENTS OF A SENTENCE. 492. Every thought supposes 1st., Some- thing that we think about ; and, 2n(l., The notion we form about it. The bringing these two notions together so as to ex- press the connection, forms a Proposition. The thing we think about is called the Sub- ject ; the word that expresses lohat we think about it is called the Predicate. These two constitute the Primary and Essential elements of a proposition ; as, " Trees are grovnvgP 493. The word that connects the two notions is called the copula^ and the notion that is connected by the copula to the subject, if called the attribute. The copula and attribute taken together, coDStituto the predicate. Thus, in the above example Predicate. Suhject. Copula. Trbes ark Attribute. cnowiNG. 494. In the parts of the verb formed by auxiliariee, tb« copula ie contained in the auxiliary; i\°, Uevillh&ye written. 495. The Copula and Attribute are nit nlwaya eeparated as in the above example, but are more frequently expreissed by one word, which must be a verb, called in that case an attributive verb- 496. A Proposition which consists only of a simple subject and predicate, and nolhinjj more, is in its barest and most elementary form. SYNTAX ANALYSIS. 149 497. The subject in this bare, unmodified form, is called th« Grammatieal Subject, and the predicate the Grammatical Prtdi- eate. 498. These two primaty elements may have subordinate elements attached to each of them ; for example, " The miller left J' The transitive verb ''left,'' must first be completed by its object, '' citv,'' "The miller left the city:'' 499. Then other attributes may be added, thus :— My fit her' s millkr j^f^ ^l^g ^jj. My father's unfortunate miller i^fj t^g ^jj.^' Wy father's unfortunate milleu, Wilson, left the citv* My father's unfortunate miller, Wilson, /rom Perth, left the city! Jfly lathers unfortunate miller, Wilson, from Perth «Ao toa« convicted of stealing, ' left the city. Here we see how the subject may be modified and enlarged by attaehmg to it attributes of various kinds. 600. So also, the predicate may be extended by attaching to it mod.Scations of various kinds. Take, for instance, the predicate of the same seoteucis, " Left the city :"— Left the city unexpectedly. Left the city unexpectedly this morning. Left the city unexpectedly this morning, by the cars. Left the city unexpectedly this morning, by (he cars, for the peni- tentiary. ' -^ ^ Left the city unexpectedly this morning, by the cars, for the peni. tentiary, when his wife was away. 501. These modifying words may them- selves be modified; as, "father's,'* mt/ father's; "unfortunate," t;£?ry unfortunate, &c. "Left the^ city," city of Montreal; "mornmg," stormij morning; "by the cars," by the western cars ; " when his wife was away," just when his poor w^ife was away, &c. :'•■'. >■'* ^H-^H '• "^'1. J- »/': o^M * '' ^ .' 4:^H r ■«». .^ ^^^^M I '-•■■■ ■ ^''1 X '.i^^^^H ■ 'V?''"-' ''^iH ^I^-'t' A^^^^l *! •ff. "/^^^^^l * m. 'Hi t'-'t ''» "iH^I •t m T%'-\ 4'';iHi :I^. I '^.ly 150 ENOLISH GRAMMAR. :!l'' m 502. Words iatroduced in this way to modify tho primary elements, and to modify other m ifying words, may be called SuBOEDiNATK or MODIFYING elements. 603. The words used simply to connect the different words and parts of the senteuce together, may be called Connecting elemmU. 604. Then, there are other words used tecmtionally, in a way which distinguishes them from any of the three preceding. For instance : Nouns in the Independent Case ; as, Otorge, come here ; The prophets! where are they ? iNTEBJEcnoNS ; as, Alas! is he dead ? Expletive Adverbs ; as, There was a time. Words used in this way, having no grammatical connection with any other words, may be called Independent elements. 505. Every word used in any sentence must belong to one or other of these elements. Hence, the elementa employed in formino- sentences, are : " » 1. Primary Elements —Subject and Predicate. 2. Subordinate Elements— Complements attached to one or other of the primary or to other •ubordinate elements. 8. Connecting Elkments —Conjunctions, Conjnnctive Adverbs, and Relative Pronouns. 4. Independent Elements— Address, Pleonasm, Before a Parti- ciple, Expressing Cause, Reason, ^« uncertain. i;muso^ i'Jace. -^Where I saw you before ha8 encaped mr L Quotation-" /cannot do it " never accomplished anything. SIMPLE, COMPOUND, AND COMPLEX SUBJECT. 507. The Subject, may be either simple, oompound, or complex. ^ ' 508 A Compound Subject consists of two or more Simple Sub- nji f 'l ""? "' ^^''" "^^'^' °'' P^--' or.propositions) to which belongs but one predicate; as, " William and Thoman wil be here to-morrow." «^My having succeeded in my mission Tud J^tV ""''' '"'^ ' '''*^™^"^' ^"'^ "^^* they should credit It, surprise me much." 609. A Complex Subject consists of two or more Simnl* 9„K jects of different kinds (words, phrases and clauses) "^^ '- longs but one predicate ; as. "The occurrence itself, and ilsTarin^ been concealed from you. look very suspicious." ''ThedfficZ of the undertaking, but especially that'it should have btn 'o cleverly executed, does him great credit." Thk Predicate. 610. The Predicate is that which is af firmed of the subject. ^^' J!'' '^\' r.'^'r'' '^™' '''^''' ""^^^ the subject is, or what it does, or what t.. done to it; as. 'V«m« reads th book' ' rl rs a student:' '^ Ja.nes ispraisedby MsfrienJsr "" 512 The simple or grammatical predi- cate like the subject, may be expandedTnto ."i;?,?!^!.^^^ r^ -^- - sentence, by sepa- r«..ui3 ^^i« copula and attribute ; thus :~1 i^t'P ..'■II ■■;'''J:"" f ■•I if • '"J " •■/■i i 152 ENGLISH GRAMMAU. ft Word j Attributive IntrariHitive Verb — The riu»w tnelt§. I Attributive Transitive Verb — They built a, ship. A ' 1 Phrase ' 'Copuln and Noun, Pronouu, — Adjectiv«J, — Adjunct, — Adverb, — Participle, — Infinitive, — ATTKIIIUTBB, Jnmes Is n scholar. It i( 8 loves (o travef. ( I arlicipial,~J| he t:HCnpm being haninhed fro f Quotation, — U,. ronlipr? " fr»^.,r.j • » I R«wiilt' T f Vi ?' ^'"'vjlrd'jr tf power.** ~I Ii'ive heard «»A/|/ ynu want. — I know where y;n voere. —I t'nquiied hiAo he dii" it. 517. The objective, like the subject, may be either Simj^le, Compound or Con,plex V^^'"" " "'^""'"^ ^^«" '^ ■« " -«'e -ord, phrase, or Jrl.^^' ^^''''''' '"' ''"^"""'^'^ ^''«" *^" "'• "ore words feZ fT, '''"'T^""^ --onl.nately connected stand as the ob- ject ve of the verb; as. •• I „.et J.moB, Wilhu.n and John." "Ho ujvited my brother and me to examine his h'b.ary " *_u . . , ." ''.'sc'iMijige. rhey accused him of treachery. Ask him hiH opinion. I told him what I wanted Ho commanded tho army to I heard him call. [march. Both Direct and Rrmote. "Did I request thee, Maker, from my clay Jo mould me 7nanr—MwroK. ENLARGED OR LOGICAL SUBJECT. 520. We have seen that the primary ele^ •jrtj i- H »'■" i^v I'll r 154 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. |. • it* : l«»« 'i^< ments of a sentence are the Suhjc^t^ and Fredicate, and that, the Predicate, when a transitive verb, must be completed by its object. We propose now to show more fully how these primary elements may be enlarged and extended by attaching sub- ordinate elements to each. 521. As we found that the primary elements can be expressed either by a word, phrase, ov clause, so the subordinate elements attached to each, may take .the form either of words, phrases, or clauses. 622. As we found tljat the primary elements may be either simT pU, complex, or compound, so the modifying elements attached to •ach may be either simple, eomplest, or compound. 623. As the Subject and Object may be a noun, we must enquire what complements, or enlargements, and what kind of enlarge- menta a noun can take. 524. As the Subject and Object may be u participial or injinitive phrase, we must enquire what modifications participial and injini' tive phras:t can take. 625. When the Subject, Predicate, or Object is a subordinate clause, the sentence according to the definition would be complex. These will, tnerefore, be examined best under the head of Complex Sentences. 521. ENLARGEMENTS OF THE NOUN. '1. An Adjective or Adjective word : A Limiting, — The house. A qualifying, — The new house. Word -l A Verbal, — The new house built. 4 2. A Possessive, — The governor's new house built, a 3. An Apposition Noun, — The governor's new house, Oak Lodge, built. f\. Prepositional, — The •piecQ of plate. Phrase J 2. Infinitive, — The piece of plate to be presented, \ 8. Participial, — This piece of plate to be presented, (^ having been injured,, is sent to you to be repaired. i)26. The above are the various qualifications or enlargeraeats SYNTAX — ANALYSIS. 155 eD:..g.mento .. called the «./ar,./„r foi„/a/.7lgIot COMPODND ENLARGEMENT. .Jf' ^^'^'^ ^^"^ "'■ "'"'■e extensions of any Z^f /n® co-ordinately connected, it maybe called Compound ; as, ' ^ "« PossrasiTK._.M««,, J/i«n ««<; i>,>o„', .tore ■• Appos,™»,-..Tho„ ™,., <;,«„ *,„, .„,,_,.„.^ ,,„ ^^^^ Adjiotite,-'. a m«« «.,/„; and inUruling book." oomplex;enlarqement. +i,l^!* ^®? ^ qualifying term is itself fur- ther qualified and especially when this en- largement IS again qualified, and so ^ L!{ """f^f. °f degrees from the prin- cipal word. It IS called Complex; as, WoW the .'on of a buteher resijing a't Ip.wich, a to'wn ia'tbe south of England. H. ehos. a queetion wlA many point. Sf praotieal interest in it. " Some ansrel puiMp m^ r>n«-;i -un. t , ■tt/K-i. ■/«.• - --" ~/ i'vu'uii -.Tuiic 1 draw A man on earth, devoted to the skies, Like ships at sea, while in, above the world " ^^O- '>» }". • '#• ■ 1 .> fy 1 ^■''^ ■^ ' 156 ttMOtJSH GRAMMAR. V* H'^' ■ m^' Mm' HPp ** m w^ m- ^■3 B, W' Hi*'*^'" Btl K;i' IS . ..^ 629, Thrpc Coniplrx exfeiiBioiis will require, nnd should rfct'ift, •pt'di.tl aittfiitioii. Tin* mo lilviiij? cI.hisoh, tike any otlu-r pntpoM- tioiis M.iiv, <»f «!om'Mo. bt( t'itlKT SiinpK', Omiipitjiud. or ('oiii|»l»'X j bill (Xiuii'plea i)t-e(i lint ho ^iveii,pii|iils Uuwevcr bhuuld bti rcquiied tu coLi^U'uci i'xuuipled lor ilieiiiHolvu.i. EXTKNDED Oil LOGICAL PREDICATE. 5'?0. The predic.'ito in addition to bein^j comi)leted by thoobjoctive may bo extended by words, phrases^ or clauscny to exjjress iimo, place, wa/uter, &e., and these exten- sions, as in the ease of tlie subject, may be either aitnple, complex^ or compound ; thus: , 63L WouDs, AovKHBn or Time, — I hliiill see presruthi. Place, — You will fimi il there. Manner, — You act whely. Result, — The intik tui mil «o?4r. Negiilion,-— 1 did not see it. Nunilir, — I spoke (w ce. Iot« nogiiiive,— Hovo jue you I 632. The Compound Extrnsion. TlMK. — 1 will ii;o On W*:dnesdu4 of ..nh X^ ,* example of a proposition expressing time used as tjie subject Uive one expreesmg action-one expressing place. What is the 6 '.is i r' t ; 'fi% f k .V: h; :h-, «cl i ..^u '}' ,> A fV* ■K.il mi» ■%v?.- t 158 ENGLISH OHAMMAR. tliitinction between eimple, conipourul, nnd com|)Ux«nl>jectB. (riv« an example of each. What in the predicate? How mny tho predicate be expanded into a phrug© and into a clause! When the copulo and nttiibute aro expressed by separate words, by what different words may it be exproeied ? Give an exam- ple of each. By what pbrasea may the attribute be expresied ! Give an example of each. Give an exnmplo of a clause used an the attribute. Give examplea to show the diatlnotion between a compKOund and complex "predicute. What completion does a transitive verb require! Give an example. Whtn the objoctiv* 18 expressed by a single word, what words may be substituted for a noun '. Give an example of each. When the objt-ct is ex- pressed by a phrase, what phrases may be used ? Give an exam- ple cf each. When the object is expressed by a clause, what clauses may be used as examples! When may the object be called compound and when complex ! Give examples to illustrate the difference between the direct and remote object of a verb, and the direct and indirect object. How may the primary elements of a sentence be modified ! In what respects do the subordinata elements resemble the primary ! Under what head docs the en- largement of the noun by subordinate propositions properly full ! Why ! When a noun is modified by single words, what words may be used. Give an example of each. When a noun is modi- fied by phrases, what phrases may be used ? Give an exam- ple of each. What is meant by the logical subject? Give sen- tences containing examples of complex eulargonicnt. What mo- difications does the predicate take ? Give examples of the predi- cate modified by words and phrases to express titn^, place, man- ner, result, &c. Give a sentence containing a compound modifica- tion. Give an example containing a complex modification. What modifications may an infinitire or participial phraefe take ! Give an example. What modifications does an adjective admit of ! Give an example. What modifications does an adverb admit of! Giv« an example. 81 W\ m EXERCISE. 1 . Write six simple sentences, each having a subject of a different kind, (words, phrases, clauses) and each subject enlarged by various complements to the fullest extent, consistent with the requirements of a good sentence, without using complex enlarge- ments. 2. Write six simple sentences, each having a predicate of a differ- ent kind, (transitive, intransitive, copula and attrible, Ac.) and each predicate extended by various modifications to the (ullcBt extent itAnaiafonf TwifVi fliA ronniromonfa nf a rrrtr..? sAn^nnoA ^;fU»..4 . !— _ complex modifications. SYNTAX — ANALYSIS. 159 ft* ''-»* I 8. Write six simple senti-nces, cnlar^inf; the cnbject Rnd exteml- iog the prodioiito (b^ usitij,' complex coiiiplemouts) to Iho fulle«t ejteot, conaiBtcnt with the requirements of a good sentence. 4. Annlyze ench of the above eighteen sentences orally ; thus, 8. 4. Name the logical subject and logical predicate. Name the grnmtnaticnl riubject. Show the modifications of the grnmmatical Bubject. Show by what mi^difying wordi*, if any, each modifying word IS modified. 6. Name the grammatical predicate. 6, Sliow by what words or phruses the grammatical pre- dicate ii modified. 7. Show by what words or phrased each mcdifving word is modified. Select and analyze, in the same raanner, six sucli simple sen- tences from standard prose writers, and six from the standard poets. FORM FOR WRITTEN EXERCISES IN ANALYZING SIM- PLE SENTENCES. "On the very day of our arrival, my kind-hearted cousin Henry, anxious to hasten us forward to our disti eased friends with tlie least possible delay, disjaatched a telegraph, to the next villnge, directing llie stage proprietor to bo in readiness to start immedi- ately on our reaching that place." GENERAL ANALYSIS. XOGICA.L SUBJECT. h My (2) kind-hearted corrsiN (3) Henry (4) anxious to hasten us forward to our dis- tressed friends with the least possible de- lay RRAMMAX't PUEDICATK. LOGICAL OBJ. DESPATCHED a telegraph directiiiKthe stace proprietor to be ni readiness to start immediately on our reaching that place. EXTENSIONS OP THE PKEDICATB. (l)Ontheveryday of our arrival (2) to the next vil- lage ..! The figures (1). (2), (3), Ac, are hero intended to separate from the oth^ ers, and keep disinict each attribute of the subject and object, and each exteusioti of the predicate. • )!.•-''-"» ■ :• r-'lli ■• "I •'■t'"' * 'r-i''» "I'll '*:f r< i«ij ^i!i^ 5?*' *^^ ENGLISH GRAMMAR. FOKM FOR MORE DETAILED ANALYSIS a. On the very day extension of the Pekd. (time) (1) • S'7^;k**-;V attrib. toSub.(l).^ d. kind-hearted attrib. to Sub. (1) f ?r^^^^^ Subject of Sentence. „ " .^ attrib. (apposition) to Sub. (I ) f: «"f"';" attrib. to Sub. (1)/ ^^" ,- ';, ''"*^^ 0»>jectiv% completion to g, (2). i' /V>V.«V.V objective completion to h, (3). J- juTwara niodificationof A with fW^\rriii^n«+;«-\ k. to our dutressed friends . . , adjunct of ^[3) ^^ (^^reot.on) 1. mth the least potaibie delay . adjunct of h (S) ni. DISPATCHED PrEDIOATK of SeNTKNCK. n. a telegraph . , object, to m. f . airecimg attpjj, ^^ ^g. / q. the stage proprietor object, to « (3 . ; :t:r"^""* indirect oVto';,. (3). [«tood). X . J.- : ■, ; mdirect Obj. to r, (i) ( for iindpr- t. immediately modification of / Vs) WimeV li. on our reaching that place, ^dj^not of *, (5) ^ ^' ^ ^' SIMPLE SENTENCES. FOE PRACTICE IN ANALYSIS. Analyze the following^ sentences according to the above forms :- L in^ mL^witA^'^""'""'' ^ *^°J?°^ '""'^^ ^° g^^° examples, not hav- ing met with any in a reputable writer."- (7onnon'« Grainmar. 2. "Such terms have a pleasant facility of throwin<» awav the mat- protlt"!^^^^^^^^^ - ^^^--. -d att'empting to' 3. " This irrationality of the romancers, and the age. provoked th<^ powerful mmd of Cervantes to expose it by mefn Ta paraUel and^ still more extravagant representation of the preScoof prSf K ^tfSsS^^r^ °"«' *-^' *^-' ^■' rcmores from the SYNTAX ANALYSIS. 161 inoAginatioD oTcr reaaon, drawn in a ludicrous form, to render the folly palpable even to the sense of t^at ag*:."— Foster's Essays. 4. .//i?'*'*l''"'**A'°° ""^ ^^^ duration of parliament the independence oMhe judges, the suppreewon of illegal taxes and courts, of arbit- ray arrests and imprisonment, the accountability of the treaeurr 6. " A huge and slovenly figure, clad in a greasy brown coat and ooarse black worsted stockings, wearing a grey wig with scorched Sfl >?' A^^^ '" ^'* *T ''^'''^ ^^°^ P*'^ midnight, holding in a dirty hand his nineteenth cnp of tea."— C7o«j>r. e. " At that hour, just standing on the threshold of eternity, how vain was every sublunary Lappiue.s ! wealth, honor, empire r!;T' f^^^^t ""'f '^'* ^^""^ «• empty as the bubbles of the' deep." — Father Kercher. 7. " Wisdom, in sable garb array'd, Immersed in raptVous thought profouud And melancholy, silent maid, ' Still on thy silent steps attend, With justice to herself severe. And pity, dropping soft the sadly pleasing tear."— G^ray. 8. "Oh, gently, on thy suppliant's head. Dread power, lay thy chast'ning hand ! Slot in thy gorgon terrors clad, Nor circled with thy vengeful ban(k With thundering voice, and threat'mng mien, w ith screaming horror's funeral cry, Despair, and fell disease, and ghastly poverty. "-~6Vay. 9. *' He wanders on From hill to dale still more and more astray Impatient flouncing through the drifted heaps • Stung with the thoughts of home."— i'^owjoaon. 10. " These are not wanting; nor the milky drove Luxuriant, spread o'er all the lowing vale • ' Jfor bleating mountains, nor the chid« of streams ^:M f l-ii * ;*■> A I I- 'I M H f-^ ^1^ * ■ j I ,* ,.\ \' ^ fcr"-' 1 m •'"1 1'' 163 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. \t In I* >' ! < IV And hum of beea, inviting sloep einoere Into the guilUfias breast, bonesith tlie shade, Or thrown nt large amid the fragrant hay."— 7%o7/jp«OTi. 11. " How often, from the steeps Of echoing hill or thicket, have wo heard ' Celestial voices to the midnight air, Sole, or responsive each to others' note, Singing their great Creator ^—Milton, Eaoh member of the class select extended Bimple sentences ia prose, in poetry, to be read and examined in the cfass. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE. NOUN SENTENCR 535. We have already seen that a noun, in any positioti Avhich it can occupy in a sentence, may be expanded into a proposi- tion, thereby changing the sentence from, simple to complex. Such subordinate clauses are called Noun Sentences and should bo construed in the analysis of the sentence in which they occur, as a noun in a similar position. The ibllowiiig examples will illustrate the use of the noun sentence. Subject—" That the soul is immortal is believed by all nations " or '< It is universally believed that the soul is immortal." ' Direct Objective—" All nations believo that ike soul ia immortal:' " Pursue whatever course you think best" Indirect Objective—" They told me that yon wish to see m {namuch as, forasmuch as, since, see- withl^fjd'^' T '"' "'''?'' '" '"''' «*' '^««^A although, yet not- withstanding, however; that, so that, in order that, lest. hidi'nJ^^ different classes under each of these four general .hn^l 1 , i-'P^f^i^^ ^y seniicolons. The attention of f he pupils instance' ^ '^ ^^^ ^^-^^^rent ideas denoted by each ; £"C fj!"^'.. ^«?«(^f^-«; I will go when hs returns.- Duration of lute. 1 found It where yon put it:'— Place to which, •« Whither /<;'o. you cannot oome," &c. w Miner m.0W' :;■;:,».!''■■' i.'.iT* W;v!||4C| ' ^'■^■'^'' ■rl\ ■.a' ft Z(tMt"\ 166 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. m K* : EXERCISE. 1. In the followins? pxercise, state which of the abore ideas each adverbial clause expresses, and what is its construction : As we approached the top of the hill we saw the Indians. He will be respected wherever he may be. We were so fatigued that we could not sleep. He has more muscle than brains The deeper the well the cooler the water. I am sorry that you did not come. If Virgil was the better artist, Homer was the greater genius. He hesitated whether he should do so. They live where you used to live. I have not been there since I saw you last. I remained there until the meet- ing adjourned. Whither I go you cannot come. ** These lofty trees wave not less proudly, That our ancestors moulder beneath them." 2. "Write sentences containing adverbial clauses, joined to the principal •propositions by connectives taken from each class of those expressing— ri/ng, Place, Manner and Cause. 642. These adverbial sentences, though usually employed as ex- tensions of the predicate, are not, of course, confined excluaivelj to this position, but may take the place of an adverb, or adverbial phrase of any kind, whether in the gubject or predicate. ABRIDGMENT OF COMPLEX SENTENCES. 543. CoMPLBx Sentences may often be abridged into Simple Sentences. 544. The noun, adjective, and adverbial Sentence, when abridged, takes the form either of a n«^'^^^^' adversative, and causal ovUlativet. COPULATIVE COORDINATION. 547. Yv^hen the words used to connect prepositions unite their meaning, as the , . I' •► f 'I i' i'.» ''■ . •? ■ / ' '.^r r4.. .1 ;'? ^ viS: V 'I 4"^' ..'if,- '■-'S. ;?■■-■'•■■*•■ f^ *•*■■• ■ •ilili ^ ' r :• 'wt ! 168 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Hf^ BbK'* ^H* '^^M[; ' Ik-'« He4 jSHBfl^o Pwi'- ip' InfP'^ m Wm*'^ ' Ik 4« 11: : ■ ■f *^- sign (-f) plus unites quantities the co-ordi- nation is Copulative. Co ordinate sentences are connected copolativkly by the additive conjunctions, or words used as additive conjunctions. Tlie A.llowin^ are the usual copulative connectives ;—and, aho Ukemse as mil as, moreover, further, furthermore, both and alto, not, only but, and sometimes nor and neithir ; as, 1118 way was lone and the wind was old." " Not only will I not go myself, but 1 will not consent to your going." •* You oan- uot fully understand it without seeing it, nor can you sec it and not understand it." '' Sonaetimes the connective is omitted between sentences thus relatad to each other; as, "The woods are hushed, the waters rest, the lake is dark and still." DISJUNCTIVE co-ordination. 548. When, the words used to connect the propositions indicate that each is to be taken separately, or that one is to be taken to the exclusion of the others, the co-ordi- nation is Disjunctive. Co-ordinate sentences are tonnected disjunotivelt by (be dis- tributive or alternative conjunctions either, or, neither, nor; other- wise, els* ; as, «* We must press forward or we will be late." •* Either the Principal or his assistant will be there." " Hasten to reform else you will be ruined." " Be industrious, otherwise you will come to want." " Neither the Priujipal nor his assietant was there." ADVERSATIVE COORDINATION. 649. When the words used to connect two propositions indicate that the one is contrasted with or opposed to the other, the co-ordination is Adversative. Co"0rdinato sentences are connected advebsativelt by the adver- sative conjunctions, but, nevertheless, though, although, however, still, notmthstanding, yet, only, and by the conjunctive phrases, on the one hand, and on the other hand; as. "Straws swim «n the surface, but pearls lie at the bottom."' "There is much wealth 10 the city, yet there are many poor people." "He baa acted HVNTAX— ANALYSIS. 169 unwisely, nevertheless I will uBHisf him " « ti ^ / . Mot^A lie is not a geniua." ^*' '• ** """"'^'^ »""' ILLATIVE CO-OllDINATION. 550. When the words used to connect two propositions indicate that the second stands m some logical relation to the first the co-ordination is Illative. '^ Coj)rdlnate sentences are connected iLLAxivfiLr bv such word, aa .w I concluded not to eo" "Ton •»« t ««,! !i^ .' *"^ omuted , as '• He is disposed to be uncivil ; let him alone " "h* ABRIDGMENT OP COMPOUND SENTENCES. 661. It often happens that the different clauses of a Comnound Sentence have either the same subject, or the same predSate or the same object, or the same extensions. In such cSses t?f de- fZJJl''\'" ^r"""" ^V"'^ coordinate part is not neceesar Iv repeated. lu this way Compound Sentences may be abri^ , COMPOUND SENTENCE. Wheat grows well in this land, and barley grows well in this land." The hurricane tore down trees, and the hurricane overturned houses." He is a wise roan, he is a f^ood man, he is a patriotic mun." Ood sends raitf on the evil, and iiod sends rain on the good." (I ABRIDGED FORM. " Wheat and barley grow well io this land." " The hurricane tore down trees and overturned houses." " He is a wise, good, and patri- otic man." God flnnrlfl rntn nn *Via n^ti --j on the good." A variety of contractions may be combined in one sentence. T.;^, -J m ^ H*.' ».. •*>''.] 3, ' It.' " •*! ';> -. Ill, no RNOLISII GRAMMAR. f»' I" §'■ •I I' 'Ct J** ^^^■IH' 'Us^' 1 w H^^H^^B ' £9^B wT-'MHi pt:: mir... . OIIAMMATICAL KQUIVALKNTS. nft2. The nfu.lent of tht EiigliMli langimgf. shnuld girp fpsoinl ntteotion to gmmm«ticnl cquivulenU, no impectof tlio mihjcot ii of mor« priio»,>,' jtnportanco. What is cnll«d a command of Ian- gunge V .. . ♦ , Umo a prnctioal aoquainfanoo with grammatical eqnUc^ml», W« oan Hoaroely write a ningle pumgraj.h without Imu^ required to ohooBo between different formi of expreiiion that are nearly ©(jnitralent in naonning. The tasteful Engliah uoholar is he who habitually uses the better exprMsion of two equiralcnts upon perceived grounds of preferenoe. Thii power can be acquired only by a o-eful study of enuiviilent words and exprcBulons, by a fo uili&r *clrnc0, and ^\ tn KSaiAHU un.KMMAH, iH- i i i I n M* to U3 J 14 « ■i 5 •M g ti £ ■4^ P a d N SO ff 8l i ■i 1 a HYNTlJf— AWALT8IS. 17S r ^ I "O m * • 93 's. n.9 a I ;^ OX!43 SV 4J -^a .44 '^8 ^ S " »*'•' tl^^^' vi ;;«'■ y.. I it '■' -s f ;Ii»»,.'Lt fc..il it"' ill I m i 174 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. EXAMINATION QUESTIONS ON COMPLEX AND COM- POUND SENTENCES. What is a Complex Sentence ?— Give an example. What is a noun sentence ?— Give an example of a noun Bent«nce used as the subject— as the direct objective — as the indirect objective— as the predicate nominative— in apposition — as the Indirect object of an adjective. What is the usual connective of the noun sentence ? When the noun sentence is an indirect question, what are the con- nectives ?— Illustrate by an example of each. Show by examples how the clauses connected by what, whatever, &c., may be treated as noun sentences. What is an adjective sentence ? Give an example of an adjec- tive sentence qualifying the subject,— the object ; qualifying a noun attached to the subject,— attached to the predicate. What are the usual connectives of the adjective sentence ? What other words may be used ? Give an example of an adjective sentence connect- ed by who—hy what-— hy that — by wherein— why— where— whose. What is an adverbial sentence ? What are the connectives of adverbial sentences ? Into what four classes are they divided ? Repeat those relating to time when— those relating to duration of time— those relating to repaition of time.— Give examples of each. Repeat those relating to place. Repeat those relating to manner.' Separate them into those expressing likeness— relation— effect.— Give an example of each. Repeat those relating to cause. Sepa- rate them into those expressing ground— condition— concession — purpose. Give examples of each. With what connectives do these different adverbial sentences correspond in number and kind ? Give an example to show how a noun, adjective or adverbial sentence may be abridged into a word or into a phrase. Give examples to show how a noun, adjective or adverb raav be expanded into a phrase or sentence. What is a compound sentence ? Give an example of a compound sentence. When are sentences co-ordinately connected? Co-or- dinate connection is of how many kinds ? Repeat them. When is the co-ordination copulative ? By what words are co-ordinate sentences connected copulatively ? Repeat them, and give an ex- ample illustrating the use of each. When is the co-ordination disjunctive? By what words are co-ordinate sentences connected disjunctively f Repeat them and give an example illustrating the use of each. When is the co-ordination adversative 1 By what words are co-ordinate sentences connected adversatively 1 Repeat them and give an example illustrating the use of each. When is the co-ordination illative ? Repeat the words used to connect co- ordinate sentences illatively. Give an example illustrating' the «8e of each. How are compound sentences abridged ? Illustrate by example SYlfTAX ANALYSIS. 175 A^ hat IS said of the importance of an acquaintance with grammati- cal equivalents Give the order of analyzing complex sentence. S^klui .? t? 1 r^ Z^^^'f analyzing compound aentencea orallj. bketch on the blackboard and explain the form for written exercises !;!«« ^T^.'^'^^Pu'' and compound sentences. Illustrate the manner of usmg it, by writing out the detailed analysis of a com- pound and complex sentence. COMPOUND SENTENCES FOR PRACTICE IN ANALYSIS. 653. Analyze the foUowins: sentences ac- cording to the Torm (pages 172 and 173.) "And yet, if I had no plea, but my undeserved misery-a once powerful prince, the descendant of a race of illustrious monarchs DOW, without any fault of my own, destitute of every support, and reduced to the necessity of begging foreign assistance, k^ainU an enemy who has seized my throno and my kingdom ; if my una- 3r?« n "^'ff^'S ^^'^ ^'^ ^ ^^^ ^ P^^**^' '^ ^«"ld become the greatness of the Roman commonwealth, to protect the irjured, and to check the triumph ot daring wickedness over helpless nno- .^M: :BV« But rise, and stand upon thy feet : for I have appeared to thee tor this purpose, to make thee a minister, and a witness both of these things which thou baa seen, and of those things in which I will appear to thee ; delivering thee from tlic people, and from the Gentiles, to whom I now send thee, to open their eyes, and to turn them from darkness to light, aud from the power of Satan to God- that they may receive forgiveness of sins, and inheritance amonmt them who are sanctified by faith that is in me."— ^t-^a xxvi. 16. 3. "Time will render him more open to the dictates of reason • for as a fresh wound shrinks back from the hand of the surgeon, but by degrees submits to, and even requires the meau. of its cure- so a mind, under the first impressions of a misfortune, shuns knd rejects all arguments of coosulatiou, but at length, if applied with tenderness, calmly and willingly acquiesces in them r-^Melmoih's Jrlmy. 4. .J7^''"v^^ ^-uT ^T ^^^ ''*^'®'" perfections, yet if he wants dia- ctet.ou, he will be of no great consequence in the world ; on the contrary, if he ha.8 this single talent in perfection, and but a com- t^ '■ I ' 1 y^ ^^1 ■«• *i HH .^H V, ,4.' ^Hj f- ** 'ft h 1 > '^::. 1 > I ■I ' t ( > NK Jt 176 KNOLISH GRAMMA It. 6, "Let us be nnimated to cultirate those amiable virtues xvhich are here recommended to us; this humility and meeS this penitent sense of sin ; this ardent desire after rrghTeotneTs • h s compassion and purity; this peacefulness and fortitude of 'eon • and. in a word, this universal goodness which becomes us, as we Zror^^t7:i^X '"''''''' ^'^ ''-''' ''' ^'''^''^ 6. J\?afJ7 ^^"^^/."l^ P^^T "«n think bimseli; if he could enter on ?i. b„ Sr' f \^7'f^ ' ""^ '^^PPy ^"^ ^ ^b°rt time he migh" ^' iL ^^f""'® ^* I'l^ ^"^"S: contemplated and admired his sUte, ^■^^ssessions would seem to lessen, and his cares would grow/' •'From all this it follows, that in order to discern where man's true honour he., we must look, not to any adventitToua ciJSSm! atances of fortune; not to any single sparkling quali y ; Sut to the whole of what forms a man ; what entitles him, as such to rank ^gh among that class of beings to which lie be lomr. in TwTd we must look to the mind and the BouV'^Blair. ^ ' '" * *®'^'^' 8. " sacred solitude ; divine retreat ! Choice of the prudent ! envy of the great ! By thy pure stream, or in thy waving shade. We court fair wisdom, that celestial maid • Ihe genume offspring of her lov'd embrace, (Strangers on earth.) are innocence and peace. 0. • I have found out a gift for my fair ; I have found where the wood-pigeons breed • Hut let me that plunder forbear ! '' She will say, 'lis a barbarous deed : For he ne'er oan be true, she averr'd, Who can rob a poor bird of its youno- : And I lov'd her the more, when I hearcf Snch tenderness fall from her tongue." 10. ,, , ^ " Thou also mad'st the night Maker Omnipotent, and thou the day, Which we, in our appointed work employ'd,. Have finished, happy in our mutual help, And mutual love, the crown of all our bliss SVNTAX ANALYSItS. 177 Ordained by thee ; and this delicious place, For us too large, where thy abundance wints Partakers, and uncropt falls to the ground."— - Aft/ion. 11. •" Know then — who bow the early knee, Who wisely, when Temptation "waits, Elude her frauds, and spurn her baits ; Who dare to own ray injur'd cause, Though fools deride my sacred laws ; Or scorn to (^.eriato to the wrong, Though persecution lifts her thong ; Though all the sons of hell conspire To raise the stake and light the fire ; Know, that for such superior souls. There lies a bliss beyond the poles : Where spirits ehine with purer ray. And bright, y meridian day; Where love, where boundless friendship rules; (No friends that change, no love that cools;) Where rising floods of knowledge roll, And pour, aud pour upon the soul 1" — Cotton. 12. " Nor these alone, whose notet Nice finger'd art must emulate in vain, But cawing rooks, and kites that swim sublime. In still repeated circles, screaming loud; The jay, the pye, and ev'n the boding owl. That hails the rising moon, have charms for me"—Cowper. 13. " 'Tis night, and the landscape is lovely no more : I mourn ; but, ye woodlands^ I mourn not for you ; For morn is approaching, your charms to restore, Perfum'd with fresh fragrance, and glitt'ring with dew. Nor yet for the ravage of winter I mourn; Kind nature the embryo blossom will sav« : But when shall spring visit the mouldering urn ! O when shall day dawn on the night of the grave [''-—Beatiie, 14. " Lo, the poor Indian 1 whose unlutor'd mind Sees God in clouds, or bears him in the wind His eoul proud science never taught to stray Far as the Solar Walk or Milky Way Yet, simple nature to his hope has giv'n. Behind the cloud-topt hill, a humbl«r beav'u ; J" jt ;>a:t^:i '!»*• ^'® ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Some safer world in depth of woods erabrac'd wu"*' ^TP'*"" 'eland in the watr'y wa?te • ' NnZl 'IT^ "''? "'''!;^ ^^''' "'^^^^^ ^'^'^d behold, JVC fiends torment, no Christians thirst for go\d:'-~Pop, ^le^^^MncST'"" ''^*^*' *'''''' '«'««^ ^«"'- Of t^« «»08t extended com^ wniers, lo be read and examined in the class. m CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. 554. Words are arranged in sentences, according to certain rules founded on the practice of the best writers of the language, called EuLEs of Syntax. & o > 555. The Rules of Syntax may all be re- terred to three heads, viz., Concord or agree- ment, Government, and Position. Concord is the agreement which one word has with another in gender, number case, or person. '' Government is the power which one word has m determining the mood, tense, case, or form, of another word. The word governed by another word is called its re- gimen. Position means the place which a word occupies m relation to other words in a sentence. 666. In the English language, which has but few inflections feri^r' ^* ^^^'^ '^ ^^'- o^ t^« utmost iTplSSrin' 1% 5 re- • ree- RUL£S OF SYNTAX. KULES OF SYNTAX. 179 llULE I.—A verb must agree with its subject in number and person ^ as, h„! ""^'^^u""" '^}^" writest."-' I am he/'-« W« sell."-" They buy. -.' John and Jamea aro brothm —•« ane or Marv ia at home."-.' The arniy is on ite march."-" The people are iindM The man who met us."— '« Who art thou | " *^ Rule II.— The subject of a finite verb IS put in the nominative ; as, fl;aV»'°!:'wv!'"J^^"iPfS^"'-"-"^« reads."-" We talk."-"Time flies. -"Who did that? "--I know who did it."-" Do you know who 18 to blame \ "-'• He is talier than I (am)~than ehe (is) " EuLE III. — A noun or pronoun intro- duced merely to identify or explain another noun or pronoun is put by Apposition in the same case ; as, mv^»5ff "t^p '^J'f"'^'' ^'"'^'^^ *'^® """^^^ • P*^^^ tfae epogtle. I E Ln .r^'iK-'V/ ''"'""" ^*- ^ W^^^'^'^ ^^«11 ^itb prudence. Queen Mar (eraperor of that name). Ye men of Athens. Rule IV. — A noun or pronoun used to limit another i.oun or pronoun, by deno- tmg possession, is put in the possessive case; as, -Pn^'lfr/'' P"^^r-"-r" Ji^'tue's reward. -"Locke's eBsays."- ./w 1,^ *f T'f 8'>ke."-"For conscience' sake."-" The .luke of Welhngton's ^funeral."-" The secretary of state's office."- Whose pen ,8 this?"-" It is John's-it is nothi8.»-«It cime from the stationer's."-- Brown, Smith '''P'°^ «^ ^'« <5ommand- mentB. -" A forgakmg of the truth."-" Avoid doing evil"— The sword hanga rusting on the wall."— "A bound book."— The lost sheep. '-'< Having loved his own, he loved them to the end. — The men stood speechless, hearing a voice, but seeing no man. ' * Rule XIII.— Tn expressing the different relations of time, care must be taken to employ those tenses which express correctly the sense intended ; as, expected to go" (not " to have gone.") Rule XIV,— Adverbs modify verbs, ad^ jectives, and other adverbs; as, " J'^^ »Pf*^ff distinctly; he is remarkably diligent; and reads very correctly. '-"Julia sings well."-" The day is far spent."- Time passes swiftly and imperceptibly."-" Where have you been? — " Whom did you see there ? "— " When wiU you return? " -" Soon.*' Rule XV. — A preposition governs the objective case ; as, ♦^'..> c 1»» 182 It: .if .' 9: W ENGLISH GRAMMAR. ".Of him, and tlirougli him, and to him, are all thinM- to wh«.« bH glory f.u. ever. -.. To whom much is given, of h nfmich sha" be required."-" Come with u. and we will do thee good ''!^ Science they do not pretend to."-" Whom did he .peak to ? '' Rule XVI.— Certain words and phrases should be followed by appropriate preposi- tions ; as, ^ ^ " Confide in "~« diapoee o/"-" adapted to "-« swerve from," EiTLE XVII. - Conjunctions connect words, phrases, or propositions ; as, / Z^^^ j°^. ^® ""^^ S<*J b"' I stay at home."—'«Honnr *»,, 'Thevo°.n ^^7 m<'ther^^'_..He or his brothris to bUme"^ They can neither read nor write."_««He ia slow, but rre" •Whdethe earth remaineth, seed-time and harvest and coMai;;; heat, and summer and winter, and day and nighraballnoUeaJe " BuLE XVIII.-Interjections have no grammatical connection with the words of a sentence; as, . " ^ l^^^ W^ ^aith ! "_" Ah me ! "-«' cruel thon I " « i? viouB of David Garrick ? Poh ! poh I P.haw! pshaw !" ^°" ELLIPSIS. EuLE l.--An ellipsis, or omission of words, is admissible, when they can be supplied oy the mind with such certainty and readiness as not to obscure the sense ; as, " We walked by faith, notby eight." wh^W ^'~,^ '"^^^'^ '' ^°* allowable when It would obscure the sentence, wea- ken Its force, or be attended with any im- propnety. ' ^ SYNTAX— VERB. 183 GENERAL RULE, COMPREe«NmNQ ALL TllK PKKCKDINO BULKS. In every sentence, the words employed, T ^^^''^^^^''' "^^^^^ they are arranged, should be such as clearly and properly to express the idea intended; and, at the same time, all the parts of a sentence should corrcipond, and a regular and de- pendent construction be preserved throuo-h- but. *^ THE VERB AiN-D ITS NOMINATIVE. 557. EuLE I.— A verb agrees with its sub- ject in number and person; as "I reacl^ Ihou readest;' " He reads;' « We read '' &c. ' SPECIAL RULES. oJ^^'ii^^^^ ^T^ singular noun used in a plural 8en^se,^^has a verb in the plural; as, "Ten J a^r.Ta tfivi!?'f'^^\^ 2.~Twoor more aubatantives, singular, i^dered as beVnl^n-« Ml , Ml ■ lui ^^^Dbi -P^P ■ 1 ■MK^ i| B liS-f 184 RNGMSIl GRAMMAR A68. When a vei 1», havii.j( sevcial nominntives connootod by nnd in placed af(*r the Qiit, it Hgrecs with thaf,, Aisd Is uniiersUod to the rest ; ait, " t'oith in tlie pleasing Bpring; Tby beauhj vialkn, thy tenderneas, and lovc'^-^ThompiMn. 664. When the iiibstantives connected are of 'ViHtrent persona, the verb in t\u' plural preferB the/r»^ to the second, md the teeonrf to the third. This can be perceived only in the pronoun. 565. EuLE ^. — Two or more substantives singular, taken separately, or one to the exclusion of the rest, have a verb in the singular ; as, " James or John attends"—". Neither James nor John attends,"— ** John and not [but not] JanK- attend i "— " John us well a« James attends "—" Not John, but James attends:' NoTB!,— Singular nouns connected by nor, aometimes have a plu- ral verb. In that case, the verb denies equally of all, and nor is equivalent to and, connecting the verbs, antl a negative which is transferred to, and modifies the verb ; as, '♦Neither Moses, nor Mi- nos, nor Solon, and Lycurgus, were eloquent men." — Acton. — "Mo- ses, and Minos, and Solon, and Lycurgus, were not eloquent men," or, "were none of them eloquent." '1 his construction has not been generally noticed, but it often occurs in the best writers. 566. But when two or more substantives, taken separately, are of diflFerent numbers, the verb agrees with the one next it, and the plural subjfct is usually placed next the verb ; as " Neither the oaptain nor the sailors wereB&ved," rarely, "Neither the sailors nor the captain teas saved.', > 5G7. EuLB 4. — "When substantives, taken separately, are of different persons, the verb agrees with 'the one next it; as, James or I am in the wrong" — "Either • you or he is mistaken"—" I or thou art to blame.'* 568. Though sentences are often formed according to this rule, yet they are generally harsh and inelegani It is generally better to put the verb with the first substantive, Aud repeat it with the second: or to express the same idea by arn.nging the sentence differently ; as, " James is in the wrong or I am ".or, " One of us is in the wrong "~" Either you are mistaken or :\e is"—" I am to blame or thou art." This remark is sometimes applicable also, when the substantives are of the same person, but different in num- ber, and requiring each a d-fferent form of the verb, as, "Either the captain or the sailors were to blame ;" otherwiee, " Either the «aptain was to blame, or the sailors f$ere." BYNTa -Y£B«. \&^ 669. Rule 5.— A collpctive noun, expressing manj asoNB wuoLE, has a verb in the singular; as, "The company loan large." 570.---2. But wheu a collective noun cipreasos many, as infHviduala, the verb must be plural ; as, "My peo. pU do not oonsider." ' i7l. It is sometimes diffioult to determine whether a oolle«ti>e ooun expresses unity or plurality. It is now considered Kenerallv best to use the plural, wh-re the singulur Is not »/ian«/M//y required. ^1\, ^ "omiuative after " many a " ha« a verb in the sintfular • ai; " Full many a flower is born," . a3k n'V ^-.^%^0 IMAGE EVALUATtON TEST TARGET (MT-3) ,6!S?. I- .0 I.I 11.25 IS *- m " IAS ilO 1.4 1.8 1.6 6" — (9 «f^J c* .''^ t> riiuiugiapiuC Sciences Coiporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY I45S0 I 716) 872-4503 Wf^r^ '"Ky"' . «/* Mr, ^ 186 m 111' i*» BNOLISn 6RAMMAU. EXERCISE. ON THE AGEEEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS 8UBJKCT. In the following, say which are correct and which are incorrect, dtate distinctly the principle or Rule violated in the false Syntax and correct it. Give the construction of all the words to which the general rule or any special rule applies, repeating the rule applicable to each word. fr . p b ^ rm» Our friend brought two loads to market, and it waa sold at a good price.— Never was any nation so infatu- ated.— A man*a being rich, or his being poor, do not affect his character for integrity.— The horse waa sent forward to engage the enemy.— The letter from which the extract was taken, and came by mail, is lost. The people often rejoices in that which will prove their rum.— Neither precept nor discipline are so forcible as example.— Much does human pride and folly require correction.- Many a broken ship has come to land.— Thou, or he, or John, is the author of that letter.— Each day, and hour, and moment, is to be diligently improved There are sometimes two or three of us.— Many a one have tried to be rich but in vain.— Neither James nor I has had a letter this week.— Every leaf, and every twiff and every drop of water, teem with life.— Was vou there ? -^ While still the busy world is treading o'er The paths they trod five thousand years before. Either he or I are willing to go.— That able scholar and critic have died.— A judicious arrangement of stu^ dies facilitates improvement.— The council was not un- animous.— Whether the subjects or the king is respon- sible, makes no difference.— To profess regard and to act differently marks a base mind.— So much of ability and merit are seldom found— The audience were much pleasea.— Neither the scholars nor the teacher were present.— Time and tide waits for no man.— A variety of pleasing objects charms the eye.— The public is res- pectfully informed.— He, and not they, is mistaken.— Uutof the same mouth proceed blessing and cursing.— Eifty pounds of wheat produces forty pounds of flower. lit SYNTAX VERB. 187 A great number of women was present.— Books, not pleasure occupies' his mind.-Patience and diligence, like faith, removes mountains.— He dare not act other- i|nse.— Ine noble army of martyrs praiseth thee, God' Jlis time, as well as his money and health, were lost in the undertaking.— (Jne pair was spoiled ; five pair were in good condition.— The days of man is as grass.— To ^nJT r, ^"".S^^Sood is equally neglected by the k)oli8h.-I love reading.-She need not trouble herself. 1 wo dozen is as many as you can take.— The foot, in the mean time, were preparing for an attack— Our weltare and security consists in unity. 574. EuLE IL—The subject of a finite verbtsputHn the nominative; as, "/am" — " Thou art ''— " Be is "— *' Thet/ are:" * 575. It is improper to use both a noun and its pronoun as th# nom. native to the same verb ; thu.. " The king he fsl^st"" should -L J*® .V"^ V^K ^^'^P* ^^'^o the compound pronouns are ;f it'Vot!" '^"^ '" *'^ ''^' ^^ ^"^p'^-^ ■' -' " ^^e^^ni::- 576. The nominative to a veib in the imperative abA in fl,. answer to a question, and after Man or a,. genSy has tJe ve^J understood; as ;' Shut the door"-" PFAo S so "--" He^N^^^^ 80] -'.James ,s taller than /[am] ; but not so tall as yo« [are]." POSITION OF THE SUBJECT. 677. The subject is commonly placed before the verb But in «jan," ■ It I m i ' 'I 188 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. t^ J * Him and me are of the same age. — John is older than me. — Suppose you and I go. — You ai'e as tall as she. — Them are excellent. — Who has a knife ? Me. — Whom do you think haa- arrived ? — Who came in ? She and I. — Them that seek wisdom shall find it. — Tou can write as well as me. — You and we enjoy many privileges.- — That is the boy whom we think deserves the prize. 678. Rule III. — A noun or pronoun, introduced merely to identify or explain another noun or pronoun, is put, by APPO- SITION, in the Same case ; as, ♦' Cicero the ora/oA"— " / Pa/l have written it"—" W«, tht people of the United Stait-s."— " F* woods and vu/A." — " This wm said to M« men." — " The rioer Thames." — " Jane and Eliza, Mary's coMWM."— " The cAtV/ of the princes, /«# who defied the enemy," Ac. — "That was related of Dr. West, him who translated Pindar." 6ld. A plural terra is sometimes used in apposition after two or more suhstantives singular, to combine and give them impha^ eit ; as, " 2Vmtf, labor, money, all were lost." Sometimes the same eubetantire is repeated for the sake of omphasis; as, " Cit- iernty broke-i ciaternii." 580. Distributive words are sometimes put in apposition with « plural substantive ; as, " They went each of them ou his way." — " 7%«y all went, some one way, aud some another." In the con- struction of a sentence, the distributive word is sometimes omit- ted; as, *• They [interrogative pronouils] do not relate [each] to a preceding noun." 581. 0' this cht^racter are such expressions as the following: " They stood in each other's way " — that is, they stood each in the other's way.— -"TViify love one ano^e apd the objective case in nouns are alike in English, there is no liability to error under this rule, except ia tne case of pronouns. ^ THE POSSESSIVE. 584. EuLE IV. — A noun or pronoun used to limit another noun or prono7m, by denot- ing possession, is put in the possessive case; as, '' Virtue's reivard*'—-" John's books,'' 585. The possesf^ive case, and the preposition of with the oblec- tive, are oiteu equivalent; as, " My father's house "— " The house Of my father. JJut — 586. Sometimes the idea expressed by o/ with the objective can not be expressed at all by the pogsessive; as. "A ring if gowC. A cup of water "-«' A piece of land "-" The house of\efnqe " " Ti,. r'!J'T' ,f ^'"°' ^^? '^""^^ expressed are different; thus. The Lord, day " means the Sabbath. " The day of the Lord'' means he day of judgment. - My father', picture," means a pic- tmo belonging to my father. « A picture oj my father » means a feet'' « ThJ T; %^a^','}''''" ™^\«« «"^^ ^"« ^-^ -^'^^"^^ol feels. The lovo of God," Oicans either the lore which God feels to us, or that which we feel to him. " ' '•■■*' ■f -..«.. ' , yiy,'' !'■• f. . -i '■.-- ' i- 1 ' )| M if-- 190 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. i U iLf*;! mi: I: • 687. Of, before a possessive case, followed by the subataotire which it. limite, usually governs that substantive ; as, " The heat o/the sun's myn.'* But o/" before a possessive, not followed by tho substactive which it limitrt, governs that substantive under'-tood, and the expresaion refers to a part of the thiiiga possessed ; as, "A discovery of [that is, from] Sir Isaac Newton's [diRcoveries] ;" meaning, " One of Sir Isaac Newton's discoveries." 688. Even when the possessive case, and of with the objective, •re eqnivalent in meaning, the arrangement and euphony, as well zis the pcspicuity of the sentence, will often render the one ex- pression preierable to the other. When this is the case, care ■hould be taken to use that form which, in the circumstances, is best. Thns, " In the name of the army," is better than " In the army's name;" "Mv mother's gold ring,"' is better than " The gold ring of my ncother.'^ A succession of words in either form is harsh, aird may be avoided by a proper mixture of the two ; thus, " My brother's wife's sister"— better— " The sister of my brother's wife." —"The sickness of the son of the king"— better— "The sickness of the king's Bon." 589. When several nouns come together in the possessive case, implying common possession, the sign of the possessive is annexed to the last, and understood to the reet; as, "Jane and Lucy's books," that is, books the common property of Jane and Lucy. But if common possession is not implied, or if several word.^ inter- vene, the sign of the possessive should be annexed to each , as, " Jane's nnd Lucy's books," that is, books, some of which are Jane's and others Lucy's. " This gained the king's, as well as the people's, approbation." 690. When a name is complex, consisting of more terms than one, the sign of the possessive is annexed to the last only ; as, "Julius CaBf?ar's Commentaries "—" John the Baptist's head"— " His brother Philip's wife"— "The Bishop of London's charge."— Here Julius Casar's is a complex name, m the possessive ; John and brother are in the possessive, without the sign, that being annexed to the words Baptist and Philip, in apposition. In the last example, " London " is in the objective case, governed by of, and the's annexed properly belongs to Bishop, which limits the word charge. In parsing the words separately, the transfer must, of course be so mad 3. But the true reason for annexing *« to London is, that the whole phrase, " Bishop of London," is regarded as one term, in the possessive limiting the word charge, and may be 80 parsed. Thus, 'a complex noun in the possessive case, limiting the word charge.'- 691. When a t^hort explanatory term is joined to a name, the sign of the possessive may be aimexed to either ; as, " I called at Smith's the bookseller," or, • at Smith the bookseller's." Bui if, to such a phrase, the suba'antive which it limits is added, the sign !»li 8 Y XT AX— VERB. 191 »t '■'^n' of the poesessive must be lumcxod to the laat- aa "T ruV^A .^ Smith the bookseller'^ Bl,„p " ' "^' * *^'^''«*^ *t of David the kinw » /r» «„ «. rru- • ' - ?^» ^**'^ "^ » DBalm Arnn^l ^' • •' f '^^ ^^'^ ^ one of the psalms of David » fir." woH-VnS^'LlH'.Tf nP""^ '' e<>me«n,«, omitted, when Ih, uroi, word eads, aad the following word beffins wirh «» . _. MiM shoes," instead of '-James's boJi'L."k8»™h^e8'' 696. A clause of a sentence should never come l..i.L„ ,u possessive case and the word which it Itoits ■ th^s * ql! i" "" called hfm> ' ° '^""'°' ""''^■•^"»"•««*. ^nd which are ^ ilfo.. \^ distinctly the principle violated ii the false sJn! lS«hfh T* '^•v®^^^ *^« construction of all the words ?o ^bje^h the rule apphes, and repeat the rule applicable to each Virtue's reward.— He was averse to the nation's in- ■.; i! If I hi it^'i bfff' IDS r.NfJLtHII (JHAMIIAH, V(..vinn ilnrir III war. 'riiiit liMil\> Im \om-K, Init I tlioUKlit it wiiH iiiiiu».- Tlmt 1iuiiImcii|m» In a |ti('(uru of my lutluT'M.- 'I'ho troo i» known by \\\v fruit uf it.— Williiun ntitl M.-iry'n roi^u. Mi'mhi-h. Pratt'H, VVuuW- I'onrn, .V: (\).'« boohntoro in in Now York. -Cull at. Hiuith ilio bookwollor nnd Htiitionoi'H. — Thiit l»ou«o in Hmith tb« poor nmn'B iVii'nd.- ,l:unoH I'atht'r nrrivod yoRtordny.--Tbo priaonor'w, if 1 inny nny ho, coiuluot wnB8hnmeful.~lt Im ib© duty of CbVisiti'Hnii to nubrnit to thtu'r lot. — Mann obiof oiul i« to glorify Uod — Mucb dppondi on yotir pupil eompoBing frrtjuontly. — My book i8 old, but your book and Jlob(»rtH book are new.- Tbo work you upeak of is on«» of Irving.- Tli« ooinmonH' voto wui against tbo nioaHuro, but tb« lordi' votu wa« in its favor. — Uavid and Holomou's roign wore prosporou8 Jack tbo (Jiant-killor's wondorful ox- nloits.— Tbo narool wan loft at Jobnson^a a nicrcbant in nroadway. — \Vt> Mpont an agiooablo bour at 'Wilnon^ tbe govornor'H doputy.- K ing Jnmo's IninslatorH niorolv revi»(»d formor translations.— IVttr llio llormit'a us be was callod, opinion.-~\Vo protent ugainnt tins course, in our own nainoH and in tbo umiuoh of our constitu- ents. — My anoo«t.)r'» virtue is not niino. — il»^ l^'ing ricb did not nudco biin bnppy.- (Gravitation w.-ih a dia- covorv of t^ir Isaac JVcw toil.- -Tbo wookly return of liOrd s day ia a bloMsing to man.— Jobn and William's wife are cousins. — Tbe bisbop's of Iiondon*a cluirge to bis clergy. — For conseionce'a sako. — Tbo gcntleniau's aud lady's bealtb are improvirfg.— A motbers teuder- 11688 and a fathers care are natures gifts for niaua ad- Tantag©.--! am opposed to bis going on sucb an expe- dition. — That is a ring of my motber's — Tbe extent of the prerogative of tbe king of England is well under- stood. — Melius women's and children's shoes for sale. — The Grand Sultau Mahomet's palace.- For rigbteous- uess's sake. — Ou eagles wings.— John's brother's wile's mother is sick.— The Betsy and Speedwells cargoes were both saved.— For ('brist's sake.— For ten sake.— Which dictiou.irj do you prefer. — Webster, Walker, wrwTAf — ADJKrTIVtn. Ifjfi w.J«h„j,„„r»-AH«'s heart wa« porf«ct.-Jo!in Thomi) on h^.« b..« .- Lucy lonoB' bool - Your brother. Z vnnt • situation m oiiti, «0n. An adjective sometimes qualifies an adjective aud noui> ""fie L/Wack i^^^ ^*''" ' *"' " ^ '^'^*'""^'« «1^' raau "- 607. Sometimes an adjective modifies the meaning of another adjeotive ; as, « red-hot iron "-" a bright-red color." 27<<«, that—thete, those. 608. When two or more objects are 'contrasted, Mt» refer* t.> the last mentioned, that to the first; a«, Kir/M. :iod vice are opposite qualities ; that ennobles the minu, thh d«biN8«?8 it." 600. Former and latter are used in the same way. So al34> tU •ne, the other, referring to words in the singular or plural. 610. When no contrast is expressed, thie r«^fer« to a thinir near' or just mentioned, and that to a thing more remot*; or formerlv mentioned. * 'uo.i^ CONSTRUCTION OF COMPARATIVP:s TIVES. AND SUPERLA. 611. When one object is compared with one other of the same elaes, or with more than one of a different class, individually, or in the aggregate, the comparative is used ; as, " James is* the weaker of the two"-" He is talier than his father.—" He is i^Uer than any of his brothers." 612. Sometimes, however, when two objects of the same oljks» are coraparetf, the supeilative is used, being thought to be less •tiff and formal ; as, '' James is the teeakeet of the two." 618. When one object is compared friOi more than one of the Mtneclaee, the superlative is used, and commonly has ihe prefixed- at, " Johu is • »« Po^iblo to their .ub- ?^,» . /' '"''^ 80 that It may be certain to what noun they belong; thus A new fjair of shoes "~« A fine field of corn " -i' A go?d glass ot wme," should be, " A pair of new shoes "—« A field of ^.Ifi-r'"", ~"^ ^''^" °^ Sf^o'^ wine "-because the adjective* h,V„! ^ ' fTu' ~'*"*' ^"^ °°' >'*•'•» ^'»'<'' i^'«"- When am- biguity can not otherwise be avoided, the use of the hyphen may be resorted t,. with advantage; thus.'- A yoorf-man', coat"-"/ good manscoat. n J;.?^!? ®° *? adjective qualifies two or more substantives, con- S ;« L'*'*'^' l^ '' """^''y expressed before the first, and under- stooa to the rest; as, " A man oi great wisdom and nloderation.'* tw A^^Pi^'^^ 6<»/or4 the wordier,/ and Za«^ or o/iter them wheo used to indicate the beginning and the end of a series. Oa tms point, with small numbers, usage is nearly equally divided; and, as the matter now stands, in some cases the one form seemi to be preferable, and in some, the other. In this construction, as m some others which involve no impropriety, euphony and tiUto seem to go^ era. This much is certam-neither form can be ju«tly condemned, on the ground of either authority or propriety. EXERCISE. ON THE ADJKCTIVB. In the following say which are correct and which incorrect. State distmctly the principle violated in the incorrect syntax, and f . ♦,*.^" :r4. M'. • ) ^-'l » f ..I r '^r . I"' ','. '■<'*'* 'I 196 KNOLISH URAMMAIi. hi'- ''!• m% 'ly 1 eorrect it. (Jive tl.e cnnMructlon of ,|I| tb« wonl. to whioli the rulo^or any romurk applic, mul ro,.erff tho rule applicablte .alt Theao kind of bookB cnn hardly bo eot.— He ia tliP bo.t nccouiitoLt who can cast up correctly the Hum of hi» own error».-I have not been from homo thi. ten ». ■^!i7rl7''7''' "'." ,'."" of <:™'. «"<1 tl^s" makes the ,rd hat ha, been delivered.-l„ matter, of conacLncc! ret t houKhts are best ; in nmtters of prudence, tho best thoughts are last.-I measured it «'ith a tcnVoot pole.— lo calumniate is detestable, to be ceuerous is «,mmeudable.-ll.rd lighting continued foSr h.mrs -L" A man who is prudent snd industrious, will, by that means increase h s fortuue.-JJo such original eouvet eiistenee nf '''°1 ""' """" '"'''' ''"««»'"l"'t t" the existence ot civil government.— I never met «ith a closer grained wood.-The first and second ve-.e are better than the third and fourth.-IIe described a .asses sw ft, though it appears to move slow.— We eot i°mfl?K' ''^f""/"''- «■"! foon-l our friends siZg comfortably around the fire.-The boat glides smooth K*cular «f '™"^°J "■? '""-Them book tre sold for a lesser price than they cost.-A more worthier ^r ^r:i"'? •"" find.-Socrate» was wiser than anv 3 st'ss1n';?:rnT'""'f T^ ""'j«<=' ^•'"^'' «-«"""- the mlT ""?'™'' •" "Wstery —Philadelphia is ttes coveT^ ■"■ °^ ""^ "'/ '" Europc.-Of 111 the Chink ha? » '* ' '". ''?'P''* '"'° *•■« '°"'— earth _Tr„n ^'k?*"'" P°P" ,'''■,»» ^'au any nation on Oowner ^f if'":i''i?« *"'• °* "" occu|,ations, that which l.owper disliked the most—That ship is larger than «ny of Its class-Soft sighed the flute-The i-irds o" »rtrrx% — adjrctivk. 19T .Tiraz.l art> inoro beautiful than txnj in South Amoric*.— Heaven opcnod wide, her ever durit.g g^tT^TTh^ >^i.o and ^r.,od i. to be great and uoblo ^ ^^ Thofle fo their ^rn.H.y couol,. tho.o to th.,ir „0Mt,, ;,m\rr I h it bnght. this dark. thiH cu. thly, that olivine » CUTICLES OR mUTim ADJKOTI VK^ '• a," - AN." •' TUK." 621.-1, T/ie article a or an is put before commnn nouns in the singular number when nsed indefinitely; as, " ^ man "— *« ^n apple ; that is, " (my man"^- amj apple." 2. The article thi: is put before common nouns, either singular or plural, when used DEFINITELY ; as, " The sun rises "--*' The city of New York." • • ppn ' X T' ^'"''•'' *''' *■""'"• **"» the class 8o called in a ironeJIl fra'Nn IVidTialt" l>r;f^'^ ^-'^ r"°, '\"-^«'' toX^ut^^X follow ngexam,.le8."r/M fr''"^^^^ ""^'" ^^ *^« '^•'"^^' " '« ^« struck bylXin'-' TA?; P^°^"«e\ a«"'ns "~" 7%. oaA: wa« i-an aVar'-i" 5^^^^^ r""'/' '' "^^^ animal"-" 7%. /,or,^ j»" away — -/ /ticl' ; as?''He 8 a S' ter soldier than a statesman [woiiH be]." 6G4. The iirficle a before the ad jeoti ve /cm, and litth render., tli^ meamng;,o*i/.-.. ; „s. •; A fe^v men can do xUV'-jin^Zt^t^^^^^ bit e credit." But without the article the n.eanin^fs nZI/., a«, Few men can do Lhat "-" He deserves a little lll\P ' t^r^^ ""' 7f ""''-^ noun;r:;:;'^s: Vet^-o i\t fes ly defimte as notto require It ; as, « Christma, is in JJecmb^" Z-Jr""'"' 2?mI »/»a»•. If any mm or Tbo u.e of tte;t:irpTol7't;h?^ •'-''''»'' PV » ht iiehind bim soon thei/ set'iu night."— r 5co« offh1nru"rr«3""„f.?S"; ^Tr^Sf' take tl. gender throne" But nronorn^'r.rf' ^f'^ '""^^^ Soddes,, horn her ehon * ,« ^;-,t 4 »'li.j t F ,tf ; * - ', 202 •"iWfir.rJtll GRAMMAR. r ,4 .1" IS,'''* -i^ to niakr. lAj.. luipijy, nn.l n,)xv yow roward tno by inKi'nlitu.io." U •l.ouM ho •• to nmko .vdm huppy," <,r, '• /Ao», r«w.mloS." rosiTioN OK i'n()N()irN.s'. m. When word. ..f .,lin\nont porm.t.n conifl i,ogol,l.,.r, l,h« unml ftri- Hcni Un\ — Ihin tniitlof oor)o<.ruH ,,„h or Am/i or wp.'' EXKItCISK. ON riioNor.N.H. sJu 'i ['.'""?''"«• •"y.^'»!''' > «to oo,T,.ot mid whioh nro it,o..riT.>t. « ? ;!*"?> ^''f pnnc.plo vi«lal,,Ml h, tl.o fubo Hy„fnx, nn-l 00 r,,ct , . (J.v. tho con«fn,<.(ion of all tho words to which tho rule or «iiy r.-tnnik npp!.,.K, ait.l ropoul tlio ruh». A pormm'H Hucccss i., lije ,lo,„Mids ou his oxortions ; If hoBlmll nimnf; luUhin^, ho shall coHainly aohiovo uotlun^.---l juul my fatlior wore invited.— The court in itHwiHaoni. d«H*iaod otl.orwi«o. -A man's rccolloctioni ot tho pftHt roguhito thoir autieij)aiion8 of the future.— An nivitfttion was nont to mo ami (J. urpo—Sooiety is not always ausworahU* for tho conduct of thoir merabers. iiaoh of us had more than yye wanted.— Care for your- aelt, ityou wouUi have others to care for you.— If any boy or girl j^hould nejrjoct hor duty, thoy shall forfeit thoir place.— Lyory o!u> of you should attend to his own business.-If thou forgot thy friend, can you expect that your friend wdl remember thee ?— No lady or aen^ tleinau would do a thing so unworthy of them.— Both .'J. IIVmVA applies to a, uoxni ijcnotlnir n „er.oii wl.a,. »». ./-<.raor.r. or the n.une merely a» a word, i. r^eferm to «! .'(« * ttKmmand8 you '—not command you." If the relative refer to f the words should bo arranged, / tcho commaud you am the man " Hence — 668. A relative clause which modifies the tubjict should not b« placed in the;)r(frfjrave saw yestorday.-l who speak unto you a.n he. . t IiVDEPENDSlVT CASK. 604. Rule VIL—A noun or pronoun whose case depends on no other word, is put m the independent case. - Note.— The oaae und^r this rule is usuallv oallfld //.- ««.« - *• '»f>,oluU or independent; bocau.o, in Z^ Umuih^,^^^^ 'SZ'r^ dependence on any word iu the sinrencerit harur ?uttgr "°'"'"'^''^«- T*^'' <>«<'"" ia such cn.eB LZ n.ndhAl'M'^'^ »wJ«"»'r"etion the Bubstantive is sometimes under- stood; as "H'.s conduct, v ewioi? it eron farorablv ^-n «!» 1 commendtdr that'is « ^e [a p.rf^ vTewlngIt?£' '*" ""'' ^ 667. Sometimes being and having betn are omitted • as '• Hur «rbeel [6««i7] at rest"-.. He destm/ed or u,on," Ac, that fi " fl! tTn;L*d7 ''^''^ "' -0.," Ao-"This said.'> 'that is. WS. 668. In Uus eonslruction the Bubstantive with the partJoiDle is .nuivlnf r*' ^" ""T''^ f**'' ^° »° abbreriated £ and L equivalent to a dependent clause, connected by whm Me if nnce, became, ic., aa ^^ He having gone, his brotherrTturaed ''-^^ Since or because he went, hi« brother returned." "'"™ea , — 669. RvLii2.-A person or thing addrtsted, without a verb «- r^ziyni'^ "' 1 '«»^-'^' *- «>. yours tiuiy" Jfp j;?hoT. 670. RulbS.— ^ tubitantive, unconnected in mert errl^» tton i as. « 0, the timei ! O. the manners ! " ^xclma. p.;^ ; M - -I .■ t «.■•.; -I ♦ ■■ If w ■ • ffOU r.NUI.Inil UHAMMAH. mnii0H, M 1h« A„y, oht wlim« wun ho f "— " Voui' /dfA#r. prilrutV*''* '"'"' ** "''•**'"' '*" ''" '""''" '"''y '" *•'« ''«-« ^"' lOXKlUllHIi: ON THie INliltriENIIKNT (AiK. » being RbHont, the humnoM wft« nodpi'toa.-^Ite umd« an wi«e |mm.rb« m nnyUly. hjin oiilv rxoonto,!. --All enjoyiul llu>iui.olvoi, vory much, in« ovooptiMl- Whom biMitg doiul. wo shal] oome. WhoBo gmy ton Sl\»ll twoblo, liiin iK'iopmlinif. Till* blpfttlijHJ (.hoop wi(h .nv ooinplninl* «»rnio. I horn paroh^,! with he«t. nmi in« inlhimo.l hy thp.. Nh* «piiok rolnplnH" *«» 1««'» fofmop «t«t.p. TWn nil thy gin* mi,! avni^i^n wp ,ili.pl(u- Ihw. only thoo, tUwotlnK nil our wmv' " THR OWKCTIVE lU)VKUNKI) MY VKKHH. 672. Eiri,E VII.^A transitivo xovh in the active voice ^areverns the objective cmo ; as, " VV e love /ffm/*-«« He loves ff«.'*— «« fr/uw^ did they scud ? " SPKOUL RULKS. 673.— RuL» h— Verbs used intransitivply do not re- quire, and must not; hnvo an object to oomnlete the ttieanmg ; thus :~^ j .^ "?h?^' U^& '/'\''"^''"*'*^ f i "* '^'"^* •»*« t'^ bo found; .., /•r< m th« fao«. '— •• l^lkod tb« wioA< Away." •irWTATr— VRMIi 207 " Mo nni«um..." "They li von holy /(/;,.- ^' ' ... n..:, to^.. II: li;;:^::;^-:;;;;^ ^- -.^ ll;n. •!„ Il,i. ,„|„„|„, |,„|„„^, u„ „|,|,„,i,„ „,. . ,,„„„„( i".iiK,.*r;„,r;i:!;M;ri;:z;;;;:;,.''''" • "- - "- .- ••■. tl77 llii.B :i._V,.rl,i. (iH,.,| intriiimitivolv .lo not. nr. «om.. Vw .iU.Tj.wil,tcnl« till nil ,„.„n...l. ^78.---KirMi! 4.— A (-rniiHHj'vo vorb (loos nof mlmif « and"/ -" I wiU „„t allow „/• it." „„,>, „,y^ 071). J{tri,ii 0.- VwbB BiKiiifyiiiB to namk. choobb t vo objootivoB, ,..•.-.. th« uuKOT. denoting tim perSmor Ibms n«tx,d upon, a„,l tl.„ iNumKor. .l«noti„« th"re,ul? "Th«:;n. ?'"7-r' •• »•• ■"^''-oy ■""■>'><' /»■» Join"-! a book?' ' "" l"''""'^"*-"-" 'i'lu7 inada if ♦'.81. hwUh^ the direct or Immcdlato objflot in tho ohiH^Uv. OH., ,o,nc vo,h« have « r«.o,. ohjoot hetw.in L "wl Jl^^^^^^^ '■f*L •■ • ■ '.* ) ; ;>*' ^»- •iil 208 KNOLIIIH URAMMAM. yiv#. pat/, tell, allow, i the •ctivo form, but wl,u-h are aiu.iualouH, an,l eni-not bo «nalyM(l in the l^.nM usually H,t incorrectly given to thorn in the paB.ive: ^fu\ V, "'«;«'"' W'« taken posseH«i<,n of by thein."-(cor. . rwtly) loH«et>«jon of the farm wan taken by them." This nn-)- inaly «ri808 from mnkit.g the <,bject of the prepoiition. instead of the object o the verb, the 8«b|ect of the ve.b iu the pua.ive ^"^ /r'^^^^ «•:« thetollowing: ''The eironmstunee wa'« u.mle advance T -^ iJ^llT'T'^ "'^^^'f of."-'Vi'l'o occasion w«. taken ^jSi 1 A ^^'^^i■^^l'« «"«"lft'' P»^»ive form of expre«flion •houM be used or. ,f that be awkward, a diaemit form of ex- pre«8ioo fhonld be clioseu. POSITION. 684. Ag the nominative and the objective cuho of nouns are Hhk© in form, the arrangement of the sentence shonld clearly show which is intended to ntnnd as nominative and which as objective. The nominative generally pr«rrf(.» the verb, and the objective /oi. hw» it. Thu8, *♦ Brutu. killed Cwsar." U one (or both) of theeo ■hould be a pronoun, the order may bo varied without obscuring" the sense, and sometiines the objective is rendered more emphatic by being placed firH ; as, " Jfim he slew." «86. When the objoctivo is a relative or an interrogative pro- noun, it precedes both the verb and its nominative; as, "The man whom vru saw is dead."—" Whom did you ecud T'' 680. The objective should not. if possible, be separated from its verb by intervening clauses. Thus, -We could not discover, for the want ot proper te«te, the i^ualitf, oi the metal." Better. th ?i '^**"' "'^ *"■"■»''''' '''"'*• '''"''^^^*""* '^'' i?"«^''y »*' i«, «TIfTAX— FRWDtnATK. 20J) KXHItmSK , "" '"" OnJIiITIVll TO VIHM. ■ hot 1 w, ' 'I'" '">""■•—"« vv«» n,>t naurned an hour «f-«.-WI)o do you think I k,h- vrstPrduv ^ H -I'ako ,u:cu.„.t.„„ cnu not di,„i„i„h fro,,, h » "!; ' yvno doat thou take to bo nuch a coward^— Thov bhall for anvTh „/ ^' ;: r"''"; '-•'""1»«'-We do not want ■or anjtiung.-Go, (I, o thee away into the land (,f Jn- dea-ApenamnwHs promised me— Hasten thee horn" -boveral persons had entered into a conspiracv-Sh^; would not accept the mtuation, though sheC^Wed ^hed'^»ith .olM"" '"•'■ «-'r'.<»^«— Ho i» .dn.08t per- ished viith cold.-rhe coninussionor was denied access m^r X,n I*f. '".«°-«'^''''«' could not better dL" ^J„IL ^ »«»<;kuis 80 powerful un interest, his re- solution to maintain hia rij-ht—The troops pursued without „«,(,„;, to rest, the euemy to their latir ' THE PUEDICATK NOMINATIVE v^rlfJ"- -^r" ^^— IJitransitiye verbs, md LL !.«" f P^'^'T'' ^™'^^'' t'-^ke the same Z:.fZ^}Z\T. ^«f°>^« them, ..hen both as: — person or thing «.",» * ,4;'" ■ w^; ' 210 KNthor ihknr in I'hrai^meui. now."— •• Ar« th«v trlondi?"— " Kriondu thoy cminot ho."' ON THR rHRUIOATK NOt!*. In tho folh^wiiiK, "uy which aro ot»rroot and which incorrwt ; ■tat« diBtlnellv tho priiicipio viohttod in •orrrct it; glT»*tlio omnlructioii of nil tho AppIi«P, and repeat the rule. It JH 1.— Whom do yoti think ho ia?— It wuh nit> who wrote th(^^ letter, nnd lum who carried it to tho poHt oiRoo.— Who do you think iiitn to bo?— I tun suro it could not have been Hhe.—Whoni do men stiv that J am F— It iH theni, you naid, who deserve moat blauje.— »he iH tho person whom I understood it to be.— You would probably do the same thinji; if you were ho.— Ho la the man whom you said it was.— "l understood it to b« he.— Let him be who ho may.— It may have been Uim, but there is no proof of it.— Can you tell whom that man is?— If 1 were he, I would* go abroad at once.— la it not him who you thought it w.is P— I little thought it had been him.-Thomas know not who it was that called, though quite certain it was not sho whom wo saw yesterday. —It is not 1 you are in love with.— Let the same be her whom thou' hast appointed for thy servant Isaac.— Art thou proud vet ?— Ho was not the person whom he ain-c^.d to be.— Ay, and that I am not thee. ^4, m H\NT\% — HUBJUIVCTIVK. Sll SriUHNUTIVK MOOD. (;S.O.- UuLE X. Tho I'orni poculiar to the Sii}))nnc»tivn modf* is uscjcl only vvhrn both contini^cncy iind ruturlty arc implied- as, **ir h(^ ami'mnc to Htiid'y lie will iiu' prove." flUO Wl,.„ r ,ntiuK^nc:y .„• ,lo»U only. ,„,.l ,mt luturity. i» im- ivoi., I/; iA.>,.^A, „«^c«. «jT#;>/. vhfther, ,l«. ; but whether futuritr li Imp Oil „r not muHt b« gath.Mcd f,„,„ th« oontnxt. In Keti«r»I wl...n the ««„«« , the ,«,n„, with ,Aa//. ,oUl, or •Ao«/c/ preHxedt ,' the vcrhan without it. the peculiar form of -ubjunotive m.y b« UHei ; othmw.Ho. not. ThuM, in the precedlni? exutnuU "If hi continue." and. <' If he .h«Il cintinue/' m.aa tho ZTtUulg ...7 wi.h 1 v;'!^:?:? r? ""' '" ""' ^" «'p"" * ''''•• - ^-'- - thh.^'.un'? ""P;'*'"'';"'l "••,'^^"''' implying a present d«nl»l of the thi w .uppojed or denlrod, ih expresHcd bv the pwt tubjunctlvo; %ht • implying, •< It i. not of thie world."-" (), that thou wtrtll iny brother 1 " implying. " Thou .rt not." KXER0I8E. Off niK •UBJUNOTITK. . j" l!'«.f"U«'^'"tf *oy. Which nro correct and which Incorrect- eta e dxtinctly the principle violated in tho faleo lyutiu. ond oori rect U; give the conetruoticn of all the words to which tbt rule apphep. ttud repeat the rule. We irust go to-morrow unless it rain— There will be euough to do next week if the weather is good Thouph r^ie sky .. ..lear, it is cold.-^Ie will maintain his cause, ihoiigh he loses his estate.— We may get letters, if the Mail arrives in time. -If John is come, why did you not tell me I—Ask John if he know when the legislature raeets.--If ho knows anything, he surely knows, that unless ho ^et better he canuot be removed.—If thou be the Son ^t God, command that these stones be made breau.— Take care- that the horse does not run away — See tlmt thou dost it not.— Kiss the Son, lest ho' is 4, ' ^ t «i , > ■ n ii.- (' f 212 BNGMSH GRAMMAR. angn',--}xoprove not a seorner, lesf; he hates thee.— Tf f>?1nl n l'"l^^l' ^'^ ''^^' ^'^^ *''^ ''^''^ «^" .^''^'=tt thank. fuW-0. tnat ho ^^■e^e ^visel-l ^^•ish I was at home. —It 1 were not Alexander, I would bo Oio/rcnes.—If it wasnofc so, I woidd have told you. -If ho were a year older, I womd send him to school.-If he was an impos- H^^'if f'r ft-"'" w" t'l^^'^t^d.-If I were he, I would accept tho ofler.-AVaa I he. I would accept the offer. nr^ i ■.. '^^^ INFINITIVE MOOD. 691. llTjLE XI.— The infinitive mood is a verbal noun ; and when not the subject of a verb, or governed as any other noun by a verb, noun, or preposition, is L-overned*bv the sign *Mo;" as:— ^ veS'-^V* 't rfilLT"?"' '' wrong-" to speak " subject r,f the T ho.. A l^^^}^*^ '<> /tf«rn^" to learn" objective to "dew re." aour' d'etre"' ' " ^.^^ T*" ^'•"'-'" ^PP^^^'- ^^^ uoun desire. I am in haste to deparC-" to depart,"— ffovenied ^Llrn?[lP'?^°"-^"'' understood, Z without supply ngfoylh^D^ Sn ••lovin/d "l^'V '"•" 1 ^ '''^.^^"^'•^ '« *'i^'*^ *^« work- '' t^ *abouf ' h1T"1 '° '"rf"'"' e:oyerMed by the preposition r^f^ej- governed l^i^iw^^l^X^Sinc:?"^ ntV^diri:: Wr:^ :!i^< ---^^i- to_is. He com- He aims higher copala 'are" Th7 ^^f "!«' . PV^^i.c^te, nominative after the thePrexamp^s. ' "'' '^ *^' '"^'"'^^'^ ^^ ^"^'^ ^^'-t^«^«^ i° ihfi* /,?P^AN^-TI0N.-The infinitive mood, in relation to £« Z *^f ^'^'''"' '*' ^'^^'^ V^' tb« ^<>rJ on which irdepcn^ exam*pTe7'bu?i?i?'"'"r^ '''' ''T' '' ^' «^-'" i" tlSt exarapiea but it la a verbal noun. Like (he particiolo it Iirka tlm easeniial cbaractenstie o^ the -erb, that is. it^L nZr u^ed as the verb o make an assertion, and hence has ^o agroemen in pei-son ^^iiZ7iZt '"'' ""'' '' ''' "«°"-^-e With this f::^z flrilT 1 ^- ^^ ^* expresses action or beincr, thero must therefore be an actor ; but observe, the word .hich rture'entX^ ibrSivr-'nH TTT"" '"^«P«"dent of any connection with xue iDtnjtivc,and the furcher relation of such word as the doer of 8TNTAX INFINITIVE. 213 the act expressed by the infinitive, is Buper-added and incidental, rake, for example, the sentence,—"/ am ready to begin the work tmmedtately." "/" is the doer of the act, expressed by the infiui tive to begin," but •• /" has its construction independent of this A8 Dommative to the verb " am." " To begin," in its verbal charac- t«r, ijke any other transitive verb, has, as a matter of couvse. ita cibjective " work ; " and also, it, its verbal character, is modi- hed by the adverb " immediately." " He commanded the mm to leadthen horses up the hill. " To lead" is the object of "com. ?tn°?. /.. K ?f " ' ''^^ *^^'' ""^ "'^^ ^"^ expressed by the infinitive toiead b!.t"men hus its construction independent of this as he direct objective of "commanded ;" " horses" is objective of " to lead ; up the hill" is an adjunct, modifying " to lead." SPECIAL RULES. 696. EuLE 5.— To, the sign of the infinitive, is not used alter the verbs bid, dare, nbed, make, see, heab, FEEL and LET, in the active voice, nor after let in the J)aasive ; as, '*I saw him do it "— " You need not go " — ** He was let go." 697. To this rule there are some exceptionR. As it relates only to euphony and usage, "to" may be inserted when harehoeps will not thereby be produced ; thus, "Conscious that hisapinion needs tc be disguised." "^ 698. For the same reason, " fo " is sometimes omitted after the verbs perceive, behold, observe, have, and knote. 699. When several infinitives come together in the name con- struction, the sign (0 expressed witli the first, ia sometimes omitted before those that follow; thus, " It is better to b** a king and die, than to live and ^/«? a prince." This should never be done when either uarshness or obscurity would be the result. • «^.?' "Tr'"A^^ ^'S" ""^ ^'^'^ infinitive, should never be u.ed for the infinitive 1 self. Thus. "I have not written, andl do not intend fITlVE. In the following, say which are correct and which incorroaf srate distinctly the principle violated in the incorrect syntax, and correct it; give the construction of all the words to which the rule applies, and repeat the rule. .^' :I'*'*W*^^^''*'' ' 1»' )»!. 3 ■'1 Mi- ■" k ■ l^'-VH 1 lif T ' 314 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. It is better to be a king and to die tlian to live and be an exile.— He scorns either to temporize, or deceive, or be guilty of evasion. I have seen some young persons conduct themselves very discreetly.— He bid me to go home— Let no man to think too highly of himself.—He was heard to say it by everybody.— Dare to be wise.—They were bid come into the house.— I strive to live as God designed me to. Point out the use and oonstruction of the infinitive in the follow- ing correct sentences. It too often happens that to be above the reach of want just places us within the reach of avarice.— It does no good to preach generosity, or even justice, to those who have neither sense nor soul.— He was born to be great.— To accomplish these ends, savages resort to cunnmg.— They thought to make themselves rich.— Some people arc difficult to please.— To know ourselves, . we must commence by knowing our own weakness.— It we have not always time to read, we have always time to reflect.— To be or not to be ? that is the question.— 1 do well to be angry.— Whatsoever thy hand iindeth to do, do it with thy might.— Having food to eat and raiment to put on, be content. CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 702. EuLB XII.— The participle, when not joined with the auxiliary verbs " have " or ''to be,'' and taken as a verb, has the construction of a verbal noun or verbal ADJECTIVE; as — Jll^'J'^'y ^'^ work performed iV'-^'^ Esteeming themselres wise, they became fools »~" After defeating his army, he took SiTmomiD'''' ^'^^'-'''^riting letters is my occupaUoHa ,.''^^i* ^?.***? ^"* *^** °^ ^^'^ al'o^e examples the participles are litA ^TT^"«r,** ^ ^^^ "''''*®'^ '^° ^^y »«•« f**"*"^ nouns. ■ 704. It will be seen by these examples that while the verb form- ally averts or declaret the fact, the participle oMsumes it. We are SYNTAX — PARTICIPLE. 215 thus, with the greatest advantage, enabled to condense what we have to say by abridging the dependent clauses. The explanatorr remarks on the infinitive apply equally to the participle. 706. In a substantive phrase, a noun following the imperfect or perfect participle (as well as the infinitive) of a copulative verb 18 in the predicate-nominative ; as, "His being m expert dancer »— I ne crime of being a young man," SPECIAL RULES. 706. EuLE l,— When the imperfect or perfect participle is used as a noun, a noun lefore it is put in the possessive case ; as, ** Much depends on the pupil's composing fre- quently "— " John's having done so is evident." 707. In many cases, the nominative or the objective before the imperfect participle as an adjective, will express nearly the same Idea. Thus "Much will depend on the pupil'$ composing," and Much will depend on the pupil composing," mean substantlallv the same thing. Still the construction is different ; in the first the dependence IB on flie composing; in the second ib is on the puptl : and though in these examples the sense is nearly the ff^T' 7.^ *^®^® ^^^ ^^^^^ CKamples in which the sense is en- tirely different. Thus, " What do you think of my horMe'$ running Unday?" implies he has run, and asks, " How do you think he ran ?" iiut ' What do you think of my horse running to-day ?" implies he has not run, and asks, " Do you think he should run ?" 708. EuLE 3.— When the verbal noun expresses something of which the noun following denotes the ndBB it should have the article and preposition ; as, " It was said in the hearing of the witness." But when it ex- presses something of which the noun following does not denote the doer, but the object, both should be omitted, as, •* The court spent some time in hearing the witntesB."' 709. Rule 4.~The perfect participle, and not the past tense, should be used after the auxiliaries Rj^e and be; as, ** I h&ye written" (not ivrote)^'^ The letter is written " (not turote). • 710. So also the perfect participle should not be used for the paat tense; as, "He ran,'^ not run ""^ - ' - " - not done. ■ 'Suous, a different form of expression should 712. The participle is sometimes used absolutely, having no de- pendence on any other word ; as, " Properly speaking, there is no Huch thing as chance.' r - i- y, EXERCISE, * ON TUB PARTIOIPLK. In the following, Pay which are correct and which incorrect- state distincily the principle violated in the false syntax and cor' rcct It. G'.re the construction of all the participles and repeat the rule applicable to cacli. We could not be sure of ita being him.— -AVhile the necessary movement was being raade.-^Man rebelling against his Maker, brought him into ruin .—Goods are now being sold off at first cost.—Joseph having been sold by his brethren, was overruled for good.— Wheat is being sold at a fair price.-— A man being poor does not make him miserable.— And still be being done and never done — What do you think of my horse running to-day 7— While these things^ were being transacted in England.— Did he run well ?— The court was then being held T—What think vou of my horse's running to-day ?— -Will it be safe ?— The spot where this new and strange tragedy was being acted.— By the obtaining wisdom you will command respect.- The French lan- guage is spoke in every part of Europe.— This was equal to rejecting of the proposal.— Some fell bj the way side and was trode down.— Learning of anything well requires great application.— I seen the man who done it. — Meekness is manifested in suffering of ills patiently— in the suffering ills patiently— in the suffer- ing of ills patiently. — In the patient aufferin** iHg— jn patient suffering of ills.— Some one has took my pen.-^ In the hearing of the will read, and in the examining SYNTAX TENSE8. 217 of sundry papers much time waa apent.— -The tree has fell.— I haye drank enough.— He has broke his cup. « ••' • > CONNECTION OF TENSES. 713. EuLE XIII.— In expressing the diff- erent relations of time, care must be taken to employ those tenses which express correctly the sense intended ; as, " I have known him these many yeai^ ;"-~not, "I know him these many years ;" nor, " I knew him these many years." •114. Rkmauk. — The particular tense necessary to be used must depend upon the sense, and no rulea can be given that will apply to ail caaes. But it may be proper to observe that, 716. An observation which is always true must be expressed in the present tense ; da, " The stoics believed that • all crimes are equal.' " 716. The present- perfect, and not the present tense, should be used in connection with words deiioting an extent of time continued to the present ; thus, " They continue with me now three days, •ihould bo, have continued," &c. 717. The present-perfect tense ought never to be used in oonnee. tion with words which express past time; thus, " I h&ve formerly mentioned his attachment to study," should be, " I formerly men- tioned," Ac. 718. To express an event simply as past, without relation to any other point of time than the present, or as taking place at a certain past time mentioned, the past tense is used ; as, " God created the world."— "In the beginning, God created the wirld." 719. When we wish to represent an event as past at or before a certain past time referred to, the verb must be put in the past-per- fedt tense. Thus, when we say, '• The vessel had arrived at nine o'clock," we mean, at nine o'clock the arriving of the vessel was past. But when we say, •♦ The vessel arrived at nine o'clock," we mean, the arriving of the vessel was then present. 720. It is always essential to the use of this tenge that the event be PAST at the time referred to. It is prooer to notice here, ftljo that in pointing out the time of a past event, two points or periods "^ ^, - kd of time are often mentioned— the one for the purpose of ascertain- "''' * f • ing the pther. Thus, •^ Who arrived an hour before tunset." Here I'' ^-^ ,.t/''i i I-*-' ■: 218 ENGLISH GRAM3SAR. the paet-perfect is not used, though the arriving is represented as «S/L'^7rPf''L™' meutioned, viz., .««*.^ becal sunseU. not the ttme referred to, but is mentioned in order to describe that buTpCn?' \Vj|;-f .^-"b«?. the event, arriving, IZtll^^l out present. Ifm this example we omit the word "hour" and T^llTl2t7'r'''^^' *^^ construetion will be the same J v^^ife 1 FnXn P K '" ""•Tr* *.°.?y' "^'^^••^ I ''«°«^ to France as Dretnt a! r '. ^^^f"^ A*^' ^>'*'°^' °^ ^"S^'^'^^ ^^ represented BuF r^hl' t J"** P"! "* '^^ '^'"^ •°^'<'«t«'l »>y tJ^e wol-d before. ,^wl f 5l*Tf"* mentioned is represented m pant at the time indicated by the word before, or if the sentence is so arranged th^t to i's ZJT '' T' *r '' '""'''^''^ ^' ^^'^^ '"^^ evTnSJred beforrwhail^d"' '''^^^ ™""- ^? "f"^^ ««. "They Aarf arrived vt^uld ^nZh X ^ ^^^ ^'"''^'^ ^"*^ ^^ ^'''^ sailed."-" I had vtnteu JiiHgland when we returned to America." .^I^^Jm ^'■^'^"u ''"'^ ^^* past of the auxiliaries, «AaW,m7/,mav mTjft^ /'ir^u^'^'T^^^^'" '^« «^"^« sentence ; and ^1^' TeSse wi h^hl ?'/ ^' subeeq uent verb be expressed in the same I?/!LT' .^? ^'^^«;*^«°* ^«rj>J thus. - 1 may or can do it now. if nt'L'.? irll°?' ~:Lri^^.^-<^^<>- 't-then, but I could ♦Hnf »,« ^..-^/T^V '"»' "7_*"*y stopi — J. rtott menuonea u to mm, wXX5'??.w"'"'°""°^'' """"'» "»"" •»'^*^ <;«/{!'„ Jr^'l*P*°'^*°' *''^"^*^' ^^^ P<^*i'P«rfe€t indicative otpoten. ^r^rJZti'' "PT ^'^ *^^°' antecedent to. but never, co^m- porary with, or subsequent to, that expressed by a verb in the past tense in the leading clause. Thus, we can say. - 1 believed he ret r ri' ?"' °°*: V ^P^^ ^' ^'^ ^'^' '' '" becaueelJj^/mav refer to what is past, but hope always refers to something titurl. Outfit m«tVf?(f " '/'t'* ^1'^'*^ ^^ ''"^*'' *<> ^^P''**^ />*•"*«< ^uty, it may be followed by the present or present-perfect- as " You should study, that you rnat/ iecome learned." ^ ' ' tiU^Vf.t'"^'!'' P'^''"^ is frequently used after the words ^hen, (liLl^T' 'T,,M*' ''•^*'''' to express the relative time of a ^Za Tr \r ^'^'^ ^^ '''^^*' ^' ^ili *>« welcome." When ?n^^?.f! "^f the »me«^;,.r>f .WiW.W, these words denote the better till he Aa« /«/< the pangs of poverty." «ll^\^ ^®''*' *" the infinitive mood must be in the preient ten»e, I^lll^P"?"*'' '^^^^t IS contemporary in point of time with its Jf ieTt«',V' ' ^' Th ' '"^•"ff"^^ to It ; as, - He appeared to 6e a man 01 lettei 8. — The apostles were determined to preach the gospel." .*ii'f ! SYNTAX TENSES. 219 Hence, verbs denoting hope, dmre, intention, or comwaiirf, must be lollowed by the present infinitive, and not by the perfect. ■ 725. But the perfect i.ifinitive must be used to express what is •antecedent to the time of the governing verb ; as, " Romulus ia eaid to have founded Rome." EXERCISE. ON THK TENSES. In the following, say which are correct and which are incorrect • state distinctly the principle violated in the false syntax, and correct it ; give the construction of the words to which the rule applies, and repeat the rule. The doctor said that fever always produces thirst.— I kuew the family more than t'wenty years.— He has lately lost an only son.— After Columbus made his pre- parations, he set out on his voyage of discovery. — I should be obliged to him if he would gratify me in that particular.— "We had hoped that Lord Nugent would have been able to collect much new and interesting in- formation.— He should study diligently, that he may become learned — We shall welcome him when he ar- rives.— From the little conversation I had with him, he appeared to be a man of learning.— Kirstall abbey, now m ruins, appears to have been an extensive building. — The philosopher said that heat always expanded metals. I am now at school six months. — He has been for- merly very disorderly.— When we had finished our les- sons we went out to play.— Ye will not come to me, that ye may have life —Columbus hoped that he would render the natives tributary to the crown of Spain.— We should respect those persons, because they continued long attached to us.— As soon as he shall return we will recommence our studies. — Our friends intended to have met us.— Lycurgus, the Spartan law-giver, ia said to be born in the nine hundred and twenty-sixth year before Christ. — He said that truth was immutable. — My bro- ther was sick four weeks, and is no better. — I onco or twice told the story to our friend before he went away. ■—•Ha r\n.a nrtna i4* »r/icifo«/1n»r ^__Q/»««« ^-.^^ I.-..™ 1„__ told the same story. — He that had been dead sat up and began to speak. — Be wise and good that you might be ii' ' , ,11 Ic* if. H: ^■j'. i* 220 £NULISII GRAMMAR. hnppy.-iWe expected that they would have come.-~A priBoner is not accounted guilty till he be convicted.-^ Ho was nfrnid he would have died.— He tells lies lone enough .--When wo had arrived at the palace, we deliv- ered the lettera wlueh wo previously procured.— Ho was told Ills danger, that he tni-ht fthun it.— Thoy have con- tinned with ino now throt^ days.-lt was a Htrant?e tliini^ to mo, for I had nevr-r tH>ou such a thin^r before.— Wher 1 came, he wns gone. CONSTRUCTIO.V OP ADVERBS. 72f). Hulk XT\^— Advorbs modify vkriks ADJECTiVKs, and otJior abvejuis; as, "John upeaks dklhictUh he is remarkahb/ diligent and reads vety eorrecthf, ftn'aLnrn,!'iu" ''" ?• ^'"■^' "'°'^'^''' "" preptwition. aud «ometime« fwKh ."^ . ;Tr »'' ■T"^*'"*^^; »«• "He sailed nearly round the globe -«' Just Oelow the ear "~" Verily I ,ay unto yJu. SPECIAL RULES. 729. KuLB 1.— Adverbs should not be used as adiec- tives, nor adjectives as adverbs. \I^T^A^^l w *'*" f/"-'";"''".?] cxrrnct"-." It seems i^trangeh [?C|^4T"' '""'"' '"-^ •' ['«/"]."-" Ho writes beautiful ^?n**n^^'^'7'^''""^? i! '" P^'i'^'^Ps never necessary to use an adverb ZT.^^r^'^V^^^^' th« authority of good writers has so tar samv won?d t I'^'^'T "^ "^^ '''^' '" ^^••*''^'" ^•''-^««' t'^'^t remonstrance rr^mon ."Tr"^;""- ^ ?"f; '"'^' P^"-«''«« '^^ ^^^ following are common « The flfiot;. rule "-"the then ministry >-" For%.ry AdV^;:;: « ' '"f T '';^? ' ~" ^'^'"^ "/'^^^ infi-mities" and the like ^d as such' "^ '^°"^'' "^'*^"'''' ^' '••''^^»"«J «JJ*-^«t've8 and pars. frll\^tr^r?' '''"!'■' i^'T'' "'^^"'•''.»ieauing/ro;n /A/.«2a"«^» i« "«e of it, that the omission of it would uow Bometunes aj)pear stiflf and aflr«ct^d. STWTAX-^ADVrRBff. 2S1 731. After verbs of motion, the ndvf-rlw, hither, thilher, whither nro now u«'d only in boUmdh «tylo. In ordinniy i\\»ooui-no, /ufr» m,'*' *"" *"''""'''• "'" ""*''' 'n«t»"«« upplien and repeat They hoped for u epeedy ind prosperoua iHsuo to the war.— He departed thence into u desert playe.—Where art thou gone ?— He drew up a, petition in which he re- presented hia own merit.— I can not do more.— Wo should nt)t be overcome totnllv by present events.— The women voluntarily contributed all their rings and jewels to assist the government.— Theism can hv> opposed onlv to polytheism.— Scholars should bo taught to scrutinize carefully the sentiments advanced in the books thev read.— The then emperor was noted lor his cruelty.— I will send thee far from hence to the Gentiles.— "And he said unto me, " Come up here."— He went to Lon- don last year, since when I have not seen him.— He will never be no taller.— We should always prefer our dutv to our pleasure.— Having not known or iiaviug not con- sidered the measures proposed, he failed of succeBS.— By greatness, 1 do not only mean the bulk of any single object, but the distinctness of a whole view.— To make this sentence perspicuous, it will be necessary to en- tirely remodel it.— He was befriended by the then reigning duke.— From hence ! away !— The city is near, oh ! let mo escape to it.— Neither he nor any one else can do that.— Not only he found her empldyed, but pleased and tranquil also.— In promoting the public good, we discharge only our duty.— She walks graceful. •—Where I am, there ye can not come.— I have re- ceived no information on the subject, neither from him noi from his friend.— In the proper disposition of ad- verbs, the ear carefully requires to be consulted as well as the sense— He only read the book, but not the let- ter.--He spoke eloquently.— Be so kind as to tell me whether he will do it or not.— They seemed to be dressed nearly alike.— He chiefly spoke of virtue, not of vice.—Our friends arrived safely.— His expressions sounded harsh. m K.VtirJHfl (iRAMMAH. ■HR^ ^B 8|K''«>- < ^H jUKrt' 'i' ^^^K iSitf' i. ^^^E iloal^ .~v P^l B^p^ in ||pt>^ THE OIUROTIVE OOVKHNKD ]\Y I'UKPO^rTIONS. »48. iliJLK XV. — A ])rnposition cjovorns theobjoctive case; os, ««To tr/iom much is given, of /ilm uiucli shall bo riMiuircd.** 749. Th« ol.j..ot of u })rcpM,if,i„n inuy tiko any f..im '«""»•"-•• M"oh d«p.nd« ON fcno are fug aavitters,* ^ 760. As u Rcnoral rulo, it io oonaiilwri^d in.il.-ffHnt to connect e. hor an a«..t.v« tranHi.iv., vint\ frequently after the verb to be; as, "We touched at Liverpool, and. after a short passage, landed at New Orloaus."'-" I was nt New York." 4. It, speaking of one's residence in a city, at is used before the uYc, and tn betore the street; a'^j"He roaids's ."—"He lives in State street.'' When bo mentioned together, the preposition is commonly ^Pt XT O. *TNTAX PBlCPOHITlONfl. 225 -, Htftt« ;• r/..«,i i,. . won. ••_•.. AM ,u„„„-„„ i;r*„,Z,j-''^r.'7,:;; IcMl to tim «r«.i„,t. . „„ ...„„,,„„„ ; .. ,„„, i, , SI>ECJAL RULE 765. KuLK.-Noun« donoting time, yali'b, weiout or MEASURE, oro con.monly put i;, the objective caae.* without a governing word ; as, " Ho was absent «ix f/ioM//M ]it»t «*xi» •• .114 . ,... week, en Widne.day\ intheevJnP ' " ' "* "'''"" ''^'** POSITION. 15XERCISP:. ON THK PREPOSITION, ±i!'° !^l^i!'« ««"^«"r«. ^«y ^l>ich are correct and which o- correct; state di«tinctl, the pHieiji; vldlt^d I^I U^'S: S. Jl .'4,. '« t *■ 'J . ■ n , -I syntos. 226 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. and correct it ; give the construction of the words to which fhe rule applies, and repeat the rule. Will you do me a favor ?— The nature of the under- taking was such as to render the progress of the work ve^ slow.—I shall be pleased to do to him a kindness. —Beyond this period the arts can not be traced of civil society.— Ask me that question again.— Wanted a young man to take care of horses, of a religious turn of mind.— We remained in a village in the vicinity of London. — The following verses were written by a young man who has long lain in the grave, for his own amusement. — We touched in Liverpool on our way for New York,— A public dinner was given to the inhabi- tants, of roast beef and plum pudding— I have been in Boston.— I saw that the kettle had been scoured, with half an eye.— The book wnich I read that story in is lost. — He rode to town, and drove twelve cows, on horseback. — I know not who.— The man was digging a well, with a Koman nose.— He gave the book to some one. — That is a small matter between you an^ me. 761. Rule XVI. — Certain words and phrases should be followed by appropriate prepositions; as, Abhorrence o/; Abound in, with; Adjudge to: Admonish o/; Abridge /rom; Address fo., Jlr^i^^'V °^ ^^i" ^*'"* '""'''^ ^°^ *«"*«' "'^'^er this rule, are £ ir"f;) ^ "" """^ -^'"''^ ' ^'' ^® *''''''^' *"^ «'^*'«'" t'"^' ..I!!' '^^'!- '"'^ '^"'^^ ""^^ ''PP'y '° the connectives of subordinate cepUtT'' '"''^"''' " ^^ ^°" '""^^ ^^'<^ proposal they v,iU t r^rlltu •^^®" *^° '?'' "?''''® ^'^'"''^ ^" *he compound tenses, or in the nS I? *'^f/»Phatlc form or in the passive voice/are con! L nl Vl ? '''"'''''t'2 ^^P'«s««d ^^ith the first, may be understood to the rest; as, "He can neither read nor wri/^^ 230 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. EXERCISE. OJi TOE OONJUNOTION. In the following, say which are correct and whi'^h incorrect- •tate difltinctly the principle violated In the false syntax, and cor- rect It. Give the construction of the words to which the rule ap- plies and repeat the rule. Anger glances into the breast of a wise man, but it will rest only in the bosom of fools.—Tou and I are great friends.— He reads and is writing well.— He should have written, or should have sent, or should have come himself.— He might have been happy and now is con- vinced of it.~I do not deny but he has merit —It is so clear as I need not explain it.— The one is equally de- serving as the other.— They had no sooner risen but they applied themselves to their studies.— He is bolder than his companion, but not so wise — If he understand the subject and attends to it, he can scarcely fail of suc- cess. — This is a small matter between you and I. — Does he not read and write well ?— He could command his temper though he would not — They were afraid that you would be offended.- As thy days are, so shall thy fltrength be. — These savage people seem to have no other element than war. — Sincerity is as valuable and even more so than knowledge. — Be more anxious about acquiring knowledge than showing it. — My father and he are very intimate.— Did he not tell thee his fault, and intreat thee to forgive him. — We were apprehensive lost some accident had happened him. — He must go himself or send his servant.— This is none other but the gate of Paradise.— Will it be urged that these books are as old or even older than tradition. — He is taller than me ; but I am older than him. — Earth hath her solitudes, and 80..hath life.— We can not doubt but that he is well. — He is not as eminent and as much esteemed as he thinks himself to be. — He takes neither care nor interest in the matter. — I can not see but what he is well. SYNT KX ELLIPSIS. INTERJECTIONS. 231 784. Rule XVIII. — Interjections have no grammatical connection witii other words in a sentence. 786. After ioterjections, pronouns of the first person are com- monly in the objective case ; those of the sccoud in the nominative; as, '• Ah me 1"—" thou !" 786. In neither of those, however, does the case depend on the interjection. The objective i» commonly thon{i;lit to be governed by a word understood ; thus, " Ah [pity'} me P — " Ah [what will become of me I" The nominative form is commonly the independ- ent by address. ELLirSIS—Sl ECIAL RULES. 787. As a general rule, the fewer the words are by which we express our ideas, the better, provided the meaning is clearly- brought out. This may often be done with- out using all the words necessary to the full grammatical form of a sentence, and hence, as the tendency always is to abbreviate speech, such words as can be spared, accor- ding to the usage of the language, are pro- perly omitted. 788. EuLE 1. — An ellipsis, or omission of words, is admissible when thej can be supplied by the mind with such certainty and readiness as not to obscure the sense. Thus — Instead of saying, " He was a learned man, and he was a wise man, and he was a good man," we may say, *' He was a learned, wise, and good man." According to common U8ag{>, an ellipsis of the different parts of speech is allowed in the foUowin,^ cases, viz. : — 1. Noun and Peokoon. — When two or more things are asserted of the same subject, the noun or pronoun is expressed before the !> " ,•!■ ■If. ■4 I' ;.. ■ J , ' , 1 1 V ^^H • 1 1 ^♦■■. : ■ ■ %:, 1 1 1 232 ENGLISH ORAMMAH. ii first verb, an..l omitted before tho rest A1.,» «ri,«» 4u ffOod,«a», for A great m(,n, a wise nian, and a <7oorf man- 4. Adjective AND Artiole.— When an adjective an&lifi^K 6. When several clauses conio together, havino- the flimp nr^ theI?„M«n!' ^^^Jtaliaua Aat;. imeVa^erf the Latin* ; the Englieh omittecnn tL filf • ;^"^«''^««»^ ^^' English." Soraetin^es it U omittea in the first, and expressed n the last : as " Not nnW mU but nations, imitate one another " ^ "'•°' «^ll^' J" "] neglected, becomes irksome "-••Thirhnir teat] poor, he was honest." xuouga [/ir omi'tted '^1!%T^' ''♦V'^ •?^"''? '^'''^'•''*' ^'^ «'»««""•. are often wnuted, as, -To him the prince [replied]." Also when tL rited'T' " I'lr^^^ innate wU the^ verb mu'it t if Ix! j^icwseu, as, "III hence to London" "Til .•« •• ha i. ;t i^:i^^?*^~^!'^" »° «<^^«rb modifies more words than cne It .placed only with the last ; as, «' He spoke and acted/ro^'/^i^^^^ more8nSTn^T;"■^^'"^^"?'"' preposition connects two or TusuX S*^T'"^^^^^'"'" ^'^^ °"« antecedent term, it IB usually omitted before all excent fhfl fir^t. «» «n ii.- kNi- anu iLe valleys "-" TArou^A woods and wTw;."" ' '^'^^ '"'^ """ 12. CowDNCTioN.-When several words and clauses come to- 8YWTAX — iNTERJECrriONS. 233 getfier in tlie snnie eonstructloj), the conjunction is noinetimes omitted entirely, Boinotiines between each puir, and rit)inetiinea before all except the lust ; as, " He causetl the blind to eeo, the lame to walk, the deaf to hear, the lepers to bo cleansed."--" We ran hither and thither, peeking novelty and chiinge— sympathy and pastime— communion and love."— " Youth is the season «f joy, of bliss, of strength, and of pride." 13. Intkrjkotion — The interjections are never omitted, but, i« the expression of sudden emotion, all but the most important words are commonly omitted; as, "Well done!" for, '* That is well done ! " Aho, after interjections, there is often nn ellipsis of the obvious word ; as, •' O for a lodge." &g, that is, " Ohowllonq for a lodge," Ac.—" A horse I a horse! my kingdom for a horse i '» that js, •' Bring me a horse. / would give my kingdom for a horse." ^^ ^ o 789. Rule 2.— An ellipsis is not allowable, when it would obscure the sentence, weaken its force, or be attended with an impropriety ; as, •* We speak that we do know," for that tohich, &c. 190. In general, no word should be omitted by ellipsis, that ia necessary to the usual construction or harmony of a sentence or to render the meaning perspicuous. ' 791. Articles, pronouns, and prepositions, should always be repeated when the words with which thef stand connected are lised emphatically. Under such circumstances, even nouns, adjec- tiYee, and verbs, must often be repeated; as, "Not only t/te year, but the day an(. the hour were appointed." 792. It is generally improper, except in poetry, to omit the antecedent to a relative; and it is always improper to omit a relative, when it is in the nominative. EXERCISE. ON ELLIPSIS. In the following sentences, omit such words as are not necessary to the sense ; — ' Cicero was an eloquent man, an able man, a generous man, and he was a truly patriotic man.— I venerate him, 1 respect him, I love him, on account of his virtues.— Genuine virtue supposes our benevolence to be streng- thened and to be confirmed by principle.— We often commend imprudently, as well as censure imprudeTitl^, —He ia temperate, he is disinterested, he is benevolent. —He regards the truth, but thou dost not regard it.— im 'Ik " ''I-' ■ ■ I 'J \'i.'. 234 BirOLISH GRAMMAR. Who be.st can auffer best can do. — A beautiful garden and trees \v(?rw sold— Hia lionor, interest, religion, were all embarked in this uudertakiny;. — Many days and even weeks passed away unimproved.— Hia conduct is not scandalous, and that is beRt can be said of it.— That is a property most men have, or at least may attain.— This property has or will be sold. — You suppose him vounger than I.— He may be said to have saved the life of a cit- izen, and consequently entitled to the reward.— A noble spirit disdaineth the malice of fortune ; his greatness of ■oul is not to be cast down. If II i'if GENERAL RULE, OKSIONBO TO 8DM UP THE PaKOBDmo BULE8, AND MPKOUtLT TO EU- BftAQB SUCH FAULTS AB MAY WOT BK SPBOiriOALLT POINTBD OUT AND OONDEMNSb IN TBBH. 793. In every sentence, the words em- ployed, and the order in which they are arranged, should he such as clearly and properly to express the idea intended ; and at the same time, all the parts of the sentence should correspond, and a regular and depen- dent construction be preserved throughout. 794. This may be regarded as a geoeral rule, applicable to ererr ease, and therefore comprehending all the preceding. ThoBgh these are so full and minute as to embrace almost everything be- longing to the proper construotioD of sentences, yet their will sometimes occur instances of impropriety in the use. and arrange- ment, and connection of words, for the avoiding or correcting of which no very specific rule can be given. 195. Among the evils to be guarded against under this general rule, are the following:— 1. Using too many words: that is, words not necessary to ex- press the sense ihtended. i. Using too few words : that is, omitting words really necessary to express the sense intended. Z. \ * A bad choice of words : that is, using words in a sense not sanctioned by good writers, or which do not correctly or SriTTAZ- -EXBRC18XS. 255 properly conrey the idea intended, or which oon?eT another with equal propriety. 4. The arrangement of words and clauBea in such a way that their relation to oth-jr words and clauses is doubtful, or difficult to be perceived. 6. The separatinj^ of adjuncts from their principals, and placing them so that they may be joined to words to which they do not belong. t. The separating of relative clauses improperly from their an* tecedents. 7. Uiing injudiciously, or too frequently, the third personal > noun or third possessive, especially in indirect diseou I. EXERCISE. T^e following sentences are not grammatically incorrect, but from some of the causes mentioned above, are obscure, inelegant mnMguou*, or wJnteliiffible. Let the pupil point out the error and oorrtct it, and give a reason for the correction. The son said to his father, I have sinned against Hea- ren. — A farmer went to a lawyer, and told him that his bull had gored his ox.— The Greeks fearing to be sup- rounded on all sides wheeled about and halted with the fiver on their backs — Nor was Philip^anting to corrupt Demosthenes, as he hadmost of the leadingmenof G-reece. —Parmenio had served, with great fidelity, Philip the father of Alexander, as well as himself, for whom he first opened the way into Asia. — Belis&rius was general of all the forces under Justinian the First, a man of rare valor. — Lvsias promised his father never to abandon his friends. — Carthage was demolished to the ground so that we are unable to say where it stood, at this day. Thus ended the war with Antiochus, twelve years after the second Punic war, and two after it had begun. — Claudius was canonized among the gods, who scarcely deserved the name of a man. PROMISCITOUS EXERCISES. OK THK RULES OF SYNTAX, KO. In Ihfi rnllliXirinir fianf an/>aa anm/^ b^a AA»n.>4 <.^^ _^_. . ! .. _ „_„_,.,,„^,- ...,,,.^ ran? vpviicut auu SVUiC arc ilivUr* rect. Say which are correct and which are incorrect. State dis- tinctly the principle violated in the incorrect sentences and correct *m, .) * ifcj'-u. 236 BHOLlfU OBAMMAS. th«m. Oire the conatructlon of all inoorrcct wordi Md of lucb otb«ri M moy be called for. II. KXRllCISK. Too great a variety of studies perplex and weaken the iudgment.— I called to see jou, but you were not at home.— The crown of virtue is peace and honor.— In the human species, the influence of instinct and habit IS generally assisted by the suggestions of reason.—They were both unfortunate, but neither of them were to blame.— We arrived safe at our journey's end.— That is a matter of no consequence between vou and I —They that seek knowledge will find it.-Our welfare and so- cunty consist m unity.-The love of virtue, and devotion to pleasure, is opposed to -each other.— All the world are spectators of your conduct— Nothing is more lovely than 7.i''t"®---He is taller than me. but I am stronger than him.— Neither riches or beauty furnish solid ueace and contentment.— The abuse of mercies ripen us for judgments.— A mans manners frequently influence bis fortune.-Much depends on this rule's being observed. "T-Huch will ever be the eifect of youth associating with vicious companions.— It has been fully shown that nei- ther of them are correct.— Three months' notice are re- quired to be given previous to a pupil's leaving of the school.— He employed another friend of his father to as- sert his claim-Lwhose claim ?J-It is remarkable his continual endeavours to serve us.-Whatever antiquities he could j)rocure, he purchased at any price— I am not so well as when rou were here— This mode of expression has been formerly in use. III. EXERCISE. t««h1'^*t^- ^°"i *S^ *^"^ ^^ ^^^ ^*=^ended to the matter— Twice three are six.-As two are to four so are SIX to twelve.-Fiveis the half of ten.-One man and one boy are sufficient— Two are better than one.-iwoaro an even number-three are not.-Two :;L.*!J^LTtZ^- -- -« ^oo_many for such a th*n"«;fr'""^u "'■'''*' ^""f ^^^ i«w.— Molasses is thicker than water.™. The measles are spreading through the ■ TNTAZ — KXKRnSKA. S57 country.— Tho nows by tlio laHi nrrivftl it* hotter than WM expoctcd.— Wo hoped to Imvo heard from you before lbi8---Do you not think ho writes well ?— .lanios in as tall if not taller than I am.— lie puts down the nuffhty and exalteth the humble.—Pioty towards Ood, ns well as sobriety and virtue, is necessary to happiness.- -Take care who you admit into your Iriundship.— If 1 was him, 1 would take more care for the future.— Wo were in Havre when the revolution broke out at Franco.— That IS the man and the horse which we mot before.— Oeorffe was the most cntorprisinp: youuflf man whom 1 over law. —All that were present were phMised with the enter- tainment --This oicellont person was fully roHiffned either to live or die.— To enjoy health and to live iu peace, are creat bleHinsfs.— Whioh dintionary do vou prefer. Webster or Walker? ' IV. KXEROISR. Though this event be strange, it certainly did happen.— If he but consider the subject, he will no doubt change his opinion.— Ignorance is the mother ot fear, as well as of admiration.— Amoni? every jjlass of people, self-interest prevails.— Many ridicu- lous customs have been brought into use during the last hundred year8,--l8 there no person who you can send on that business ?— That is a property most men have, or at least may attain.— The pyramids of Egypt have stood more than three thousand years.— When the nation complain, the rulers should listen to their voice. Who say the people that I am ?-They that honor me, 1 will honor.---He onl^ got the money for a few days.— He was evidently miHtaken in his calculations.— No man is fit for free conversation, for the enquiry after truth, If he bo exceedingly reserved ; if ho bo haughty and proud of his knowledge ; if ho bo positive and dog. matical m his opinions ; if he be ono who always affects to outshine all tlie company ; if ho be fretful and neevi«h- It he aitecfc wit, and is full of puns, or quirks or quibbles.' —A good end does not warrant using of bad moans.— 1 HI il 238 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Humihtj neither Beeks the last place or the last word. —Either wealth or power may ruin its possessor.— Avoid i^htneaaand frivolity ; they are allied to folly.— Do you know to whom you are talkintr.-O that the winter was gone!— We can fully confide in none but the truly good.— He was accused of acting unfairly, or at least in a manner ill adopted to conciliating regard. V. EXERCISE. There ia more business done iu New York than ju any city of the United States.— If there were bettor inanagen.cnt. there would bo greater secu- rity.— Every year, every day, and every hour, brings Its changes.— Whom say ye that 1 am ?— Many a youth has ruined his proapects for life by one im- prudent step.— No power was ever yet entrusted to man without liability to abuae.— A conceited fool 18 more abominable than any other fool.— A constant display of graces are fatiguing to a sober mind.— Expec- tation and reality makes up tho sum total of life.— Music, the love of it. and tho practice of it. seems to pervade all creation.— The intellectual and the moral censor both have the same ends in view.— I was engaged formerly m that business, but I never shall be again concerned m It.— We frequently do those things which we after- wards repent of.— Shall you attain success without that preparation, and escape dangers without that precaution which 18 required of others ?— That picture of your mo- ther 18 a very exact resemblance of her.— The winter has not been as severe as we expected it to have been. —In reference to that transaction, he deserved punish- ment as much or more than his companions.- Every one of those pleasures that are pursued to excess convert themselves into poison.- Thou Lord, who hast permitted affliction to come upon us, shalt deliver us from it in due time.— The sea appeared to be more than usually agitated.— By these attainments is the master honored and the scholar encouraged.- The temple consisted of -- o —— •«• ^.-^/Tbtcu ait mn ^i: CUiUCUH. SYNTAX IMPROPER WORDS. •796. IMPROPER WORD OR EXPRESSION. 239 797. m TDl D» Of WORDS, QfctAT OAEB HHOULO BR TAKEN TO IKLIOT TBI Men APPROPRIATI. To lay : to make lie, to pUo«. To lit; to rest id a r«oHnia(p pOBition— ro nH ; to plaoo. To $it ; to rwt. 7'# ««a< ; to pUo« in asKling position, to furnish with a ieHt— -Tb Unrn ; to a«.jr*6«^<,r. Please to sing the three first stanzas. At A I . wished somebody would hang me a thousand times. A lecture on the methods of teaching geography at ten o'clock. Jhere is a remarkable union in his style of harmony and ease.— Hiair. They were not ouch as to fully answer mv purpose. We were to cautiously and quickly advance to the hill above. Cedar li not so hard, but more durable, than oak. He can and ought to fftw more attention to his business. The reward has already or will hereafter be given to him. We have the power of retaining, altering, and compounding those images which we have received, into all the varieties of picture and image.-- Addi$on. It is our duty to protect this government and that flag from every assailant be they whom they may.— Z>ouo/as. Prtrenta are of all other peo- ple the worst judges of their children's merite ; for what they reclwn such, is Midom any else but a repetition of their own faulU.— ^rf. duon. Prepositions, you recollect, connect words as well as oon- jaoctions ; how, then, can you tell the one from the other— i2. €. «milh. The empire of Blefuscu is an island situated to the north- •art eide of Lilliput, from whence it la parted only by a channel of eight hundred yards ^ide.—^w(/X. ^ ^ VIII. EXERCISE. TOO MANY WORDS. In the following, correct what is wrong, and give the reason for toe correction :— 798. NO NIEDLBSS WORD SHOULD SK USKD. She is a poor widow woman. He died i-j less than two hoars time. His two sisters were both of them well educated, I bought It of the bookseller, Aim who lives opposite. You will never bars another such a chanoe. There are but a few other similar places ID the aty. It is squally as good as the other. Mine is eqaally as good as jours. Who Jirti discovered America! When the !2i ^*\.} created. Ac. Perseverance in laudable pursuito I ^"^•*S.*" O""^ *o»^i ••>§ t-n^hi atni !>e*--- — - Solomon tkmn 6y Aim' Jtfort' is annexed tolhe end ortheee wiri' Our flowers are covered over. I vtm not able for to do it. Uf SYIITAX EXERCISES. 245 '*%'; '«».'*. father presented me with a new knife. It ia to this Ust feature of the game lawa, to which we intend to confine our notice.— 5/rf. ne.V Smith. The performance was approved of by all who buw it Whenever he sees me, he always inquires after my health. This barbarous custom, and which prevailed everywhere, the missiona- ries have alwliflhed. If I mistake not, I U:ink I have seen you before. Thei«e lots, if they had been sold sooner, they would have brought a better price. These wild horses having been once cap- tured, they were soon tamed. I don't know nothing about your affairs; and I don't want to know. Neither you nor nobody else^ can walk ten miles in one hour. The lesser quantity I remove to the other side. Santa Anna now assumed the title of a Dictator What kind of a man is he? What sort of a thing is it? The- whitea of America are the descendants of the Europefins. There IS another and a better world. My friend wa? married to a sensi- ble and an amiable woman. Fire is a better servant than a mas- ter. I am a better arithmeticiun thnn a grammarian. The terror of the Spanish and the French moo&vchieR.—Bolinffbroke. Pha- raoh and his host pursued after them. Many talented men have deserted from the party. A catilogue of the children of the public schools of this city has been published.— (Substitute in.) One can not imagine what a monotonous being one becomes if one con- stantly remains turning one's self in the circle of one's favorite notions. A person he^ ttc. IX. EXERCISE. TOO FEW WORDS. 799. NO NECESSART WORD SHOULD BE OMITTKD. In the following, correct what is wioug with each, and give the reason for the correctiou : — White sheep are much more common than Wack. He does not know you better than John— (Ambiguous.) A squirrel can climb a tree quicker than a hoj.— Webtter. Ignorance is the mother of fear as ^ell as admiration. What prevents us going ? What use IS it to me ? My business prevented me attending the last meet- ing. The court of France ©r England was to be the umpire. Let us consider the works of nature and art, with proper attention. An oflScer on European and on Indian service are in very different situations.— 5. Smt gam the faith of ahy one. Will martial flames r.revor lire thy mind, and never, never, be to heaven resigned t By the oxeroisini our judgment it is improrod. A wise man will avoid the showing •ny exoellonoo in triflen. Great benetit may bo derived from reading of good books. f ^ t I PUNCTUATION. 800. Punctuation treats of the poiata and marks now used in writing. 801. The use of these points is to mark the divialons of a sen. tence, in order to show the moaning more clearly, and to serve a« a guide in the pauses and inflections required iu reading. 802. The principal marks used for this purpose are tho follow- ing: the comma (,), tho eeinicolon (;), t^e colon (:), the period (.), the inttrropation point (f ), the exclamation point (I), the dath (—), the parentheiii ( ), tho bracket) [ ]. 808. With respect to the lengtli of tho pnusos indicated by these marks, no very definite rule can bo givea—lho same point in cer- tain kinds of composition, and in certain po-itions, requiring some- times a longer and sometimoa a shorter pause. 804. As a general rule, tha comma marks the shortest pause ; the semicolon, a pause double that of the comma ; the colon, a i HYIITAX FnHCTUATION. t45 pAUM (IdultU that of the »«mioolon ; And ih« pjirJod, » panM itill longer thiin thnt of tho colon. COMMA. fiOfi. Tho connna i« gfliioinll^y uimd in thoNo parti of a inntMflo in which u ihort pniHii i« i«qiiir«(l, mui t.i mark a ooniiootion uosi in oIoioiiMs to that wliioh is uul)roIten. «r!<:oiAL uuLKa. »Ofl. Uui,K I.- lu n f-hort, Himplo •oiit«itcc, tho comma i* not iwod; AN, " U«>po U tuiooaaiiry hi every oonditiou of life." 807. Kui.ic 1!.--Wh<.n tho Icfficnl auhjflofc of a verl. U fflmlnrad oijff by th« a(J.l.tu)u of iovtM-al mljiiruH», or ..thor nualiryhiif word. to tho Kmunmit.oal Hubjoof, « oomma ia UHimlly iniortod Iwforo th<; ▼•rb, u« A iiteady mid unchrldod attoutiou tu one •ubjoot. is a ■ure imuk ol a Biipinor mind." '' * «()H. ItiM.a ;5.-.Ii. eompom.d ientonoon, th«' clatiifA or mambor* aro uaually .oparatcj by onmfna«; „„. "Oraay mon eunUmm atudie., wmpio mtn admlr., thorn. a»d th« wiae mmi me ihtmr im vrhm th« ohujHOH aro ahort, oroloHcdy ooni.ocjtod, tho aanimaia not UH«d ; M, <• U«volatiou t«II« m how wo may attain happl..«.fc» 800. HvLK 4.-T«ro word« of tho aatnn v\hm, oonnortod by a oonjimcti(.M cxproHMod, do not arda c!r a.ljuncti oonnocted. ".... ... ar, Saul, ihe opostio oi tho (kntiloH." But a Binjrl© "p^uIZ'a^S^ """'•'"' '" ""' ''^'''^'''^ ^^ ** comma; i. w m 349 BNOLISH URAMMAR. .■•i^ I ^ in ah!l!lMU^«u?'Tr'''*'* °°'»'"*''^« *nd«P«nH«nt. nnd th« nominatlr* •rwolufe with «.• wonlt dflpondent on th«m. ar« loparAted bT commM from tb« reit of tlie Muuuoas ; an. •' My aon, bear the iu- Th« Ume of youth being preolous, we ahould dorote it to im. proTemeot."— •• To ooDfew the truth, I wm iu fault." 814. Rule ».— Oomparatire and antithetioal olauiei are eepara. t«d bj a comma; thus. "Aa the hart panteth after the water- brook.; ao doth my aoul paut after thee."—" Though deep, yet i«V» • . W ^""'^ y.*' ".°' *^""" »"' ^»»«" *»»« compariwn la ?.Sri . u TT"°° Jotimate, the oomma ia not uaed; m, WIedom is better than rubiee," 81«L RuLi 10.— The adverbs nay, to, htmt, aifain Mni MWfkWv, 4r«., when oonsiderad important, and partioularlr at the beginning of a aontenoe, should be separated from the context br ft S^T/^* ; ^•^' *^"' ^•, ^"^ ■*'^* *»»• ^^'*1" S« •«•<>, as and Mils, tntroduoing an example or quotation ; as, Ao. . fi^^"*'f ^*~"^ relatlre with its clauses, explanatory of its Anteeaden^ is usually separated from th* rest of i sentence ; aiL .K •^''^ !j « '^•■^; ***• «""** **P*°'*'° °' **>• ^o'"'*'. ra««t be utterly ahandontd," or, " He must be utterly abandoned, who disregards? 40. But when the -elative, with iU clause, is restrictive, and the oonoeoUon so close that it can not be separated, ihe comma is not used ; as. " Self-denial is the ,acrific4 XcA virtue must mike." 817. Rota 12.— 3%a<, used as a oonjuoetion, and preceded by Jjolher clause, usually has a comma before it; as, " Be virtuoui that jrou may be happy." But when the clause introduced by tfatt IS the subject or tfie object of the verb iu the precediujr clause the comma is not inserted ; as, « It is well that hishould know if^ I said thtU ye are gods." {n.!lf "Z^" J.^o""?**®" *7*''^ '■ understood, a comma must be inserted; as, 'Reading makes a full mim ; conversation, a read? man; and writmg, an exact man." ' 819. RuLK U — WordHr0p«ated Mi separated hv a oomma ; as. not bf- ^ ^' ^ ^' '* ^^ Almlghty"-No, no, no, it can 820. RoL« 15.-/ni.#r/«rf «snfeti0««, by throwing two or more woidsout of their regular connection, often require a cornm* ; as. To God. all things are possible." Not inverted, it would be 'All things are posaible to Ood."-'« His delight was, to as'sist the ^.stressed." In Uie natural order. "To assist the distressed was uis delight. 821. Rule 16.— A short expression, in the mftsner of a quota- Uon. IS separated by commas ; as, " Plutarch calls lying. iA« «/«* oi Slaves. - Also the verbs »ay, reply, and the like, with their de- pendent words introducing a quotation or remark, are usually nYNTKX — PUNCTUATION. 247 •«p»r»tod by coininnn ; as, «• Th« buok of future, $aij h», {■ open before thfe.— " I eay untoAll, wetch." 822. Koi,« M.— At^tetiveM, participUt, advtrbn, in/lnitivti dbe., when lepirftted from the word on whioh thej depend, or, when aooomp«nied by eeyeral iidjunote, commonly require oommiw ti be inierted ; m, " Hie UlenU, formed for sreat enterprisee, oould not fail of rendering him oonepiououi."—" To conclude. I oan oniyeay thle." — •' We muet not, howntr, negleot our duty." SEMICOLON. 828. The lemioolon ie uejd to lepArate the parte of a lentenee whioh are leii oloiely connected than those which are separated by a comma, and more oloaely than those which are separated by the colon. "^ GENERAL RULE. 824. The parts of a sentence separated by a semicolon, should contain in themselves a complete and independent proposition, but should still have a connection with the other parts. SPECIAL RULES. 826. RuLil.—When the first division of a lentence contains • complete proposition, but is followed by a olauae added as an inference or reason, or to give some explanation, the part thus added muit be separated by a lemieoion ; as, " Perform your duty faithfully; for this will procure you the blessing of Heaven."— "The orator makes the truth plain to his hearers ; he awakens them ; he excites them to actiou ; he ohows them their impending danger."— "Be at peace with many; nevertheless, have but few counsellors. ' 826. RuLK 2.— When several short sentences, complete in them- selves, but having a slight connection in idea, follow in succession, they should be separated by a semicolon ; as, " The epic poem recites the exploits of a hero ; tragedy represents a disastroua event ; comedy ridicules the vices ond follies of mankind ; pastoral poetry describes rural life; and elegy displays the tender emotions of the heart." 827. RuLK 8 — When a sentence consists of several members and these members are complex, and subdivided by commas, the larger divisions of the sentence are sometimes separated by a semicolon ; as, " As the desire of approbation, when it works ao- a _-- 5^«ov:., iiiip.vTca iuw aiuiauis pare oi our species lu everything that is laudable ; so nothing is more destructive to them, when it ii governed by vanity and folly." ., f ';". I'l 1 1 r, . ■ ^\ J us MMQUan QKAMlfAB. I I I 8?B. nrts 4— When a genemi term Um HeTerni otheri im ntr- ^lHh.? ''^ * •«n..c,.l«.n, niul the pnrtioulnrg. from e.ch. ether by comma. ; m, •'Adjective pronouns are dlvideil into four bS Ttiuf ZT"*"' fT^\-'-^^r' distributive. Hncn„r« , S^^ ^mma oulj ^^ ^ iMtroduoed. the aeparatlon i. made by a COLON. 82» The colon IB u.ed to divide a eentorice into tm. or more parte, loes oonn^^eted than tliose which nro .epnrated by a eemi- ooloD, butuot 80 independent a» to require a period. SPECIAL RULES. It^ff' in'^'i'Z^ ''"''"' '? ""'''^ ^'""^ a Bentenoe in complete fn Jt«elf, in both .onse and oonBtructlon. but ie fnIl«^v,.d bv lom« noi in syntax , as, A brute arrives at a point of nerfcction thai •TdT.rv.^v''""" ''p"-"'"'--^'''« Dei.7uX.rrd7 itTvill redound to your honor"— "AnT^l]ly^ ,!!."* learning; it will redound to your horn'' ^ ^^^ ^ ''^^ *^ ^''^'"""^ ' '"^^^ m PERIOD. 834. Sentences whii»J> »ii«o «,^s»,j.i.... .• SYNTAX CHARACTKRS. S49 rogAtiuu point as equal to tbo period. 9. The note of iaterrogation in alwaya put at at the end of a t ouoition ; .g, .• What is truth f" But the indireet questioa not ro(ju.re tlie inteirogation point; ae, " Pilate inquired what wa^72nne," " '' ^'*''' '*°'' """"•• ^he kln^^ fUre ch irity to- «J;«*«^"» when short seutcnoes are conneoted in moaniajr, bui not in construction, they are Hoparated by a «o,nioolon. eouner'tn^l°hS T"'""'?'' '* «?'"Plf'«' «^«« thot.gh grammaticallj eounectod by oonjunotions, often insert a period ; thuj. " Jle wh» TrZ '7'f '? r'^, """*'« -nd ob«ervatVon of the world i,^S? All men, the least hicely to avoid censure. For he draws u )oa W«lf a thousand eye,, thai will narrowly inspect hhuTa eXJ -J?''* \P*T' ""'•''' ''" "'"'^ ^^ "'« «'fl of «^" l>ooks, chapter* oi t'j Sinith'So*'' "" *^^''*^'*''«"»' '^•' A-^-. M. A.. Arra; IIfTP]RROGATION. 5nfcl5!;A-^"®''^'w " "-*r^«J »• ft complete sentence, and the loterrogAtion point as eqHul to tbo period. 839. "" - • i- ii I 250 ■IfOLIfH GRAMMAR. I ii short, and neoords with the genernl too* of the leDtenee. oommM are now generally used instead of parenthesis ; as, " Thou Hlug^ish power, if pover thou be, All destitute of energy." Ji'o*T*'^,Pf*r°?'*"*' «''«"Jd»>« avoided as much as powibf*. iJ3 y^xrW "'* P'""P'''*'y ""'^ ^"^ «°«'^'«« » ^"rd or phrase interpolated for the purpose of explaoation, correction, or eupnlt- J5 * ' f '=,'*'"^y '° f sentence quoted or regarded as such, and which did not belong to the original composition ; thus, it is laid "The wisest men [and it might be add.Ml, the best toolare not exemnt Irom humnn frailtj." ^ "wi exenspj 844. The Apostrophe (') ie used when a letter or letterB are omuted ; as e'er for ever- tho' for though; or to mark the posse J.': 846. Quotation marks (" ") are put nt the beginning «nd end of a passage quoted from an author in his own w^ords Tto ,^^^^^^^ passage regarded as a quotation. ' * portloi *""°" ^^^ " """■ '" ""''''' " "^''~"'''« "' '=''«?'»■• '•■"<> .f "new "pZg?aplJ.' ' '"' '"""'"'' """' *" ''•°'"' "■' '''8--"? 849. The Sraet (-*-) is used lo cooiicot word, which have on. K-'"- V.f "is* '"T"' '',""'' *.'"'' ■°"" ''^"«™ »■•« omitted ; ts .^f purprfas, A- V "'•™'" °" '""""'"" """ '" ""' or fattrlfL'.' ''^^ " """' '" °''°'' ""' """' """^ " *'">" <"«'!"•<' Th« InJer ( lO" ) is used to point oat iHrylhing remarkable 861. The Towel mark. ar. : The Diami, ( . ), „n the lost of two rZlT' '»:!''''•/•">''"« ">«« th.y are not t'o be pron^need"^ Sometime., abo, the § and f. aZ .mill fe'tt:?, or Cjlji'.i.'i reier to ooies at tUe foot of the page. ~ ' STMTAX — riOURKt. 251 FIGURES. 863. A Figure, in grammar, is some deviation from the ordinary form, or con- struction, or application of words in a sen- tence, for the purpose of greater precision, variety, or alegance of expression.* 864. There are three kiode of Figuret : viz., of Etymoloyy, of Syntam and of Rhttoric. The first aud the seoond refer to the form of wordi, or t» their eonttruction ; and the lait to their appliealxon, FIGURES OF ETYMOLOGY". 856. A figure of Etymology is a departure from the umml or iimpU form of words, merely. 866. Of these, the most important are eight ; viz., A phar ■«•»%» , Proa-thetii, Syn-co-pe, A-poe-o-pt, Par-a-gog-ge, 3i-ar-t-$it, Syn-atr-e-iiM, and Tme-$ia. 1. AphoBren$ is the elision of a syllable from the beghming of & word; as, *gain$t, \an, '6o(re, 'ntath^ for against, began, above, beneaih. 2. ProetheM is the prefixing of a syllable to a word ; as, adown, agoing. &<;., fur down, going, Ae, 8. Syncope is the elision of a letter or syllable, usually a short one, from the middle of a word ; as, me^eine, •p'rit, «'#n, for medicine, tpirit, even. 4. Apocope is the elision of a letter or syllable from the end of a word ; as. Me', for though, th' for the. 6. PMragogge is the unnezing of a syllable to the end of a word ; as, deary, for dear. 6. DioereeU Is the division of two coaourrent rowels into differ- eat syllables, usually marked thus ( - ) on the second rowel ; u, cooperate, aerial. 7. Synaresic is the jomnf of two sjllables into one, in either orthography, or pronunciation; as, Jo«<, eeeet, for doeet, ae'eet, or loved, learned, pronouno^d in one syllable instead of two, lo¥-«d learn-ed. 8. 7\n«$is is separating the parts of a oomponnd word by aa in- terreniog term ; as, '* H^«t.time«o«v#r--" On vhich side sMv^r"— ** To us mtrd.'* FIGURES OF SYNTAX. $67. A figure of Syntag is a deriatlon from the usual eonsirua^ ti»n of words in a seaUnee, used for the sake o/ greater bea«ty or forot. l| SAS ■ NOLIAH ORAMyAN. 1 I. KUipthU th« on.lMloii of H wor.l or wordg nfrMturv t.» (I... ftiU ooimtruo ion of ,» .e.Uo.io*, hut „ot nooo.Mrrt?cni7Ji h^ 2l t^ Ir" "^"^ '" of aMntonoo. t.. giv. grantor fore. ,^31 S. ^yZ/imfit ia an Inferior ■podioR of p<»r«onifltmlloii by which »« •onodvo U ..nao of wonla o«h«rwl««' timn (h« wor I. f.uT, t Ml •on«tru« thorn nnoordi..^ to th« aanao «ntH, or th« objuctn of his iniui^irmtioti, ni aotuaily pr«t«'iil to hiiNfliiiui ; M, " cfaianr lciiv«*ii (hiul, oroNsra tlut Kiibioon, And cntom Itnly.'* — '* Tliu conibiit ihiokun* : on, yn briiveii I" 0. An hypfrhob in n flKurn (hut ropruaenU thin^a M urreator or bag, b«ttor or worHv, tliiui lltay teallr are. Thua, David Mya of Haul and Joniilban, " Tk«y wert tmfl$r than eaglta, t/uy M«ra itronger than Uont.'" 1. Irony la a iigurti by which we nioiui quite tho unnlriirr ot wlmi wo any ; aa, whiMt KlijiUi auid to thu wurahippnia of Ilaid, " (Jry alouj, for he it a yod," Hfc. 8. A mHonyiM U a flkjuro by which we put tho caua« for the effect, or tho effoot f«»r tho uiiuae; aa, when wo May, " IIo readH ifittou" wo moan Milton'a workt. '* Gray halm Hhould bo r«. apcctttd" — thiit Ih, old ayo. 9. ^yntcdocht !« tho piittiniff of a part for the whole, or tho whole for a pui't, a duliiiitn number fur an indcfltiito, ko. ; an, the leawat for tho »«a, tho h$ad for tho pernon, and ten thounandtor any groat n voice we hear, and thy behetU obey.'' "The whiles, the vaulted shrine around, Seraphic wires were heard to sound.'* "On the first friendly bank, he throws him down." "I'll seek the eolitude he sought. And ttreteh me where he lay." '• Not Hector's w// should want an equal foe." ♦1,::.^°''® ^*'^®"' '^"^ peculiar ellipses are allowable in pMtrr tbau m prose; as— f"'"/ " Suffiee, to-night, these orders to obey.'* " Timt u our tedious song should here hare ending*" " For is there aught in sleep can charm the wise I" •* 'T !• Fancy, in her fiery car, Transports me to the thickest war." " Who never fasts, no banquet e'er enjoys." *' Bliss Is the same in subject as in king, In %oho obtain defencs, or who defend." 8. In poetry, adjeotires are often elegantly oonneoted with nouna which they do not strictly qualify ; as— " The ploughman homeward plods his weary way." " The ttnant* of the uvbling shade." •' And drowsjf tinklings lull the distant /old*.** noun and Its pronoun are often used in reference to the^tme ▼ero ; as— SYNTAX POETIC LICENCES. It ceased, the 255 melancholy tound." •• My banks they are lurniahed with bees." 6. An adverb is often admitted between the verb and to, the sign of the infinitive ; as — " To sit on rocks, to muse o'er flood and fell ; To dowlyUt^QQ the forest's shady scenes." 6. A common poetic license consists in employing or and nor instead of either and neither ; as — "And firs^t Or on the listed plain, or stormy sea." " Nor grief nor fear shall break my rest." 7. Intransitive verbs are often made transitive, and adjectives used like abstract nouns ; as— . " The lightnings flash a larger curve." "Still in harmonious intercourse, they lived The rural day, and talked the flowing heart." " Meanwhile, what'er of beautiful or new. By chance or search, was offered to his view, He scanned with curious eye." 8. Greek, Latin, and other foreign idioms, are allowable in poe- try, though inadmissible in prose ; as,— •• He knew to sing, and build th« lofty rhyme." " Give me to seize rich Nestor's shield of gold." " There are, who, deaf to mad ambition's call, Would shrink to hear the rbstreperous trump of fame." " Yet to their general's voice they all obeyed." " " Never since created man, Met such embodied force." 86n. Such are a few of the licenses allowed to poets, but denied to prose writers; and among- other purposes which tbey obviously serve, they enhance the pleasure of reading poetic composition, by increasing the boundary of separation set up, especially in our Ian- guage, between it and common prose. Were such licenses not permitted in poetry, the difficulty attendant upon this species of composition would probably be so great, that hardly any person would attempt the arduous task of writing verse. EXERCISE. Point out, name, and define, the figures of Etymology in the His courage 'gan fail.— Bend *gainst the steepy hill thy breast.-— 'T was mina, 't is bis.— Vain tainp'ring r'if I 356 I ■frOLISH ORAMMAR. has but fostered his disease. Enchained, he lay a mon- ster.—What way soe'er he turned, it met him.— Th' aerial pencil forms the scene anew. Point out, name, and define, the figure of Syntax in the followinr senteoces : — * The law I gave to nature him Vorbids.— So little mercy shows who need jo much.-^My head is filled with dew, and my locks with the drops of the night.— Con- aider the lilies of the field, how they grow He that glorietb, let him glory in the Lord. Point out, name, and define, the figures of Rhetoric in the fol- lowing sentences :— As thy day is, so shall thy strength be.— Without discipline, the favorite, like a neglected forester, runs T j"~'^^^ "ame is as ointment poured forth.— The Lord God is a snn and shield.— I saw their chief, tall as a rock of ice, his spear the blasted fir.-— At which the universal host sent up a shout that tore hell's concave. h PART IV. PROSODY. 864 Prosody treats of Elocution and Versification. ELOCUTION'. 865. Elocution is correct pronunciation, or the proper management of the voice in reading or speaking. 866. In order to read and speak with grace and effect, attention must be paid to the proper pitch of the voice, the accent and quantity of the ayllables, and to emphases, pauses, and tones. 867.--1. In the rixon and management of the voice, it Bhould be neither \nct hich nr>r fnr» \t\nT . :* »k/^..1.I 1 j:-i:_-i. i -i the utterance neither too quick nor too »low, and neither too varied nor too monotonous. PROSODY — TERSiriCATlOir. m 808. — 2. AocBNT ii the liiyiu^ of a particular stress of voice ou A oertaio eyllabie in a word, as the syllable tir in viV tut vir- tuout, 869 — 3. The QiJANTHT of a BvUablc is the relative time wkich is required to proaounoe it. A long syllable, iu quantity, ia eqaal to two ehort onea. Tlnxa pitie, tube, note, require to be sounded an long again as pin, tub, not. In Eiigl^sh vcrsificatiou, an aceenttd Byllable is long, au nnaccenled one is 9hort. 870.— 4. Emphasis means that greater stress of the voice which we lay on some particular word or words, in order to mark their superior importance iu the sentence, and thereby the better to convey the idea intended by the writer or speaker. 871 — 6. Pausks or rests, are cessations of the voice, in order to enable the reader or speaker to take breath ; ancl to give the hearer a distinct perception of the meaning, not only of each seu- tenoe, but of the whole discourse. 872.-6. Tones consist in the modulation of the voice, and the notes, or variations of sound, which we employ in speaking, to express the different sentioionts, emotions or feelings, intended. *»*A full consideration of these topics, in a work of this kind, would be as impracticable as it would be out of place, since it would require a volume for that purpose. They are fully treated of and exemplified in works on elocution — a subject which is, or should be, taken up as a separate brunch of study. VKRSIFIOATION. 873. Vehsification is the art of arrang- ing words into poetical lines, or verses. 874. A Verse or Poetical Line, consists of a certain number of accented and unaccented syllables, arranged according to fixed rules. 876. A Couplet or iJislich, consiata of two lines or verses taken together, whether rhyming with each other or not. A Triplet consists of three lines rhyming together. 876. A Stanza is a combination of several verses or lines, vary- ing in number according to the poet's fancy, and constituting a regular division of a poem or song. This ia often incorrectly called a verse. 877. Rhyme is the similarity of sound in the lastsyllables'of two or more lines arranged iu a certain order. Poetry, the verses of ._i.:^u 1.....^ t!>:~ _:„.:!__:».„ ;~ ,„<.• -.,_ ii-j in - 878. Blank Verse is the name given to that species of poetry Avhich is without rhyme. %4' m^' 11 •I'" 'ii ?m- m.' 258 ENGLISH ORAMMAR. m FEET. 879. Feet ar« the snirtller portiom Into which a line is dirided each of which ooniista of two or more syllables, combined aooord- log to accent. 880. In English versification, an accented syllable is accounted long ; an unaccented syllable, thort. In the following examples, a straight line (-) over a syllable shows that it is accented, and a curred hoe, or breve ( >- ) that it ia unaccented. 881. MoDosjlIablea, which, when alone, are regarded as with- out accent, often receive It when placed in a poetical line, and are long or short, according as they are with or without the accent. Thus— " T6 roiiBe Mm with thS spur &nd rein, With more thfin raptilre's ray." In the ancient languages, each syllable has a certain quantity, long or short, independent of accent, for which there are certain definite rules. In this they diflTer widely from the English. 882. Metre, or Meature, is the arrangement of a certain numbar of poetical feet In a verse or line. 1. When a line has the proper metre, or number of feet, it ii called Aeataleetie. 2. When it is deficient, it is called Gataleetie. 8. When it has a redundant syllable, it is called Hvpereatahntie or Hypermeter. ^r r * 888. A line consisting of one foot is called monom*»;«r; of two dimeter ; ot three , /fim*/r ; of four, tetrameter; of five, penta- meter ; of six, hexameter : of seven, heptameter. 884. Scanning is dividing a verse into the feet of whidi it ia eompoted. 885. All feet in poetry are reducible to eight kinds • four of two syllables, and four of three, as follows :- . v, I. KBIT OK TWO BTLLABLIS. 1. An Iambus ^ - ; as, defend. 2. A Trochee - ^ ; as, noble. 3. A Spondee ; as, vain man. 4. A Pyrrhic ^ ^ ; as, fin ft (hUl). II. FSBT or THRBE SYLLABLES 1. An Anapaest ^ - - ; as intercede. 2. A Dactyl - w w . ^s, dur&blS. 3. An Amphibrach "-' - '-' : as. abiind&nt 4. ATribach v^ - ,., . ^s, Ctol)erfibk 886. Of all these, the principal are the lamhuSy Trochee, PROSODY — VERSinCATIOIf. 359 Anapctst, and Dactyl. The other four feet are used cbieflj in connection with those, in order to give variety to the measure. 887. A Trochee has the first syllable accented, and the last unaccented, as, no&2^, music. 888. An Iambus has the first syllable unaccented, and the last accented ; as, ddSrej dSfend. 889. A Spondee has both the words or syUables accented ; ttSf <( vain man. i} 890. A Pyrrhic has both the words or syllables unac- cented ; as, ^^Ond (hUl)." 891. A Dactyl has the first syllable accented, and the two last unaccented ; as virtuous. 892. An Amphibrach has the first and the last syllable ^ unaccented, and the middle one accented ; as, cdntintminf. 893. An Anapcest has the two first syllables unaccented, «nd the last accented ; as intercede. 894. A Tribrach has all its syllables unaccented ; num^ irdhU. 895. A verse is usually named from the name of the foot which predominates in it ; thus, Iambic^ Trochaic^ ico. I. IAMBIC VERSE. 896. An iambic verse consists of iambuses, and conse- quently has the accent on the secpndf fourth, sixth, dec, syllables. It has different metres, as follows : — 1. One foot, or Monometer ; as— 'Tis sweet To meet. 2. Two feet, or Dimeter ; as — With thee | we rise, With thee | we reign. 3. Three feet, or Trimeter ; as — In pla I ces far j or near, Or fa I mous, or | obscure. 4. Fourfeary | irng I auJ K) wert, full I >Ter j t and ,0 two, le «Dd, h« be- wbea » » LtCt'CUl 1. One foot, or Afonovn'trt' ; as — Hftt too far, K&cli profid Mtar. 2. Tm^o /Vr^, or DimiUer ; as— • Htttlih con I ntj;o 'gitii fill, or uo arta | could avail. 3. TArrc /cr^, or Tiiineier ; an — yo woods! | Hprfiad yofir brancli I gs Apuco, To your doop [ owt rocuaa | es I fly, 1 would hido | with tlio boasts | of tho chase, I would van | ish from ov | ery oye. 4. Fourject, or IHramekr ; as — M4y I gov I Srn my pas | sions with ab | s5hlte sway, And grow wis | er and hot | tor as life | wears away. 912. Of these, the Jir»t is ambiguou*, for by placing an aooent on the first syllahlo, it hecotnes a trochaic monomtttr hyptrmettr. 918. The teeond ■ometiuies adniits an additional short syllable at tlie eud ; as— On thS road | by the val | 16y, As he wand | ored lament | ing ; To the green | of the for | Sst, He returned | him repent | lug. 914. The third {• a very pleasing measure, and is much used ia both solemn oad ohoerful subjeots, bat it seldom takes an addi* ttonal syllable. 916. The fourth, or tttrawtw, admits an additioaal sylUble.x which often has a pleasing effect ; as— On the warm 1 cheek of youth | smiles and ros | es are blead | iog. DAOTYLIO VERSE. 9ie. Dactylic Terse consists chiefly of dactyls, and has tlis fol- lowiBf rarieties :-— 1. Ont footf or Monomcttr ; ai — Fearfully, AT3aS.X.VtS.iJ , 2. Two fed, or Dimeter ; m •■ 'i » ' ; 264 KVGLISH GRAMMAB. m t Free frCni sd | tlcty, Care and aux I iety, ChanuB in Ta j riety, Fall to his | share. 3. Thrtt feet, or Trimeter ; as — Wearing & \ way In hl« [ yftuthfulness, Loveliness, | beauty, and | truthfulness. 91 7. Each of these BomtttiraeB takea on additional lung syllable, and so beoomea hyperineter ; ns — 1 . OTfir fi I mead, Pricking his | steed, 2. CovSrod with | snow was the | vale, Sad was the | shriek of the | gale, When to the | night, woful | wail Rose to the | skies — to the | skies ! 3. Time it has | p^sed, iind the | lady is | pale, Pale as the | lily that | lolls on the | gale. 918. By combiuing these kinds, examples of tetramtUr, penta- mtttr, and even hexameter, are obtuiued ; but they are seldom used. 919. A dactylic verse seldom ends with a dactyl ; it more com- monly adds a long syllable, sometimes a trochee, as in the follow - ing lines ; — BrightSst lind | best of the I sons of the \ mOmlng, Dawn on our | darkness and { lend us thine | aid. !)20. The following is an example of dactyls and spondees alter- nately : — Green In the | wildwood | profidly the | tall tree | looks on the I brown plain. The following is an example of pure dactylic hexameter: — Over the | valley' with | speed like the | wind, all the | steeds w6re a j gallopiug. 921. Considering the beauty of this kind of verse, and its pecu- liar adapt«dn0SB to gay and cheerful movements, it is surprising that it has not been more cultivated. 922. Scarcely any poem is perfectly regular iu its feet Iambic jefiOSODY VCRHIFICATION. 26» rer8«, for ex cnople sometiraeB admits otlier feet into the line, p«r- Hcularly at the begiooing, as has been already noticed. The fol- lowing are cxarapleg of iambic lines with different feet intro- daced : — Trochee. Prophet | of plagues, | forev j er bod | in^; ill! Dactyl. Murmfiring, j and with | him fled j the shades I of night. Anapast. Before | all tern 1 plea the up j right heart | and pure. Pyrrhic. Brought death | into | the world | and all I our wo. Tribrach. And thun | dors down | impet | tious to | the plain. 923. In iambic vene, the initial short bvIIp* le is sometime* omitted; and the verse becomes trocMie with h.i additional long syllable. 924. In trochaic versa, the initial long syllable is sometimes omitted; and the line becomes iambic with an additional short syllable. 926. If the two short Byllables are omitted at the beginning of a* anapaistie line, it becomes dactylic, with a long syllable addeil. So— 926. If the initial long syllable is omitted in a dactylic verse, it becomes anapmiic with two short syllables added. 927. A pleasing movement is produced by intermingling iaw. tmsci and anapcettic, as in the following lines :— " I come, I I come! | ye hav8 called | me long, I come I o'er the moun j tains with light | and song! Ye may trace j my steps | o'er the wak | ening earth, By the winds [ which tell ! of the vl | olet's birth, By the prim | rose stars | of the shad | owy grass, By the green | leaves op | ening | Ss I pass." 928. In odes and lyric pieces, verses of different kinds and dif- ferent metres or measures are often intermingled, after the manner of the ancient choral odes, with a pleasing effect. "Alexander's Feast," Collins' "Ode to the Passions," &c,, are examples. 9 nm A'^ 366 ENGLISH URAMMAR. LS' ' 4 ,1 V M POETIC PAUSES. 029. B«8ide8 the usual pauses required to mark the aense in reading, nnd which may bo called Beuteutial pausci, indicated bj the piinotuatioM, there are olher pauses in poetic composition, re- miired by, and necoasary to give propwr effect to, the movement of the lino. 930. These arc cijiefly the Final pause and the Casural pause. ysi. 'VhQ final puuio iu required at the end of every line <»f poetry, even where there is no sentential puuse. When that is the cage, it consists of a brief suapeusion of the voice, without any change in iii tone or pitch. When a sentential pause occurs at the end of the line, as it dots very often, it takes the place ot and superaedea the ,^na/ pause. ' 932. 'llxQ ccp.snral pause is a suspension of the voice somewhere in the line itself, for which no rule ?i'>i be given, but which will always be manifest when poetry is well read. It does not occur in very short lines. In lines of some length, it rrencrally occurs near the middle; Boraetimos, however, nearer llie beginning, and Bometimeb near the end ; often iu the middle of a foot, but never in the middle of a word. Sometimes, besides this, a sort of demi- ccesural pause is required, to give full effect to the expressiou. The following lines furnish examples of the ccesural pause in differ- ent parts of the line, and also of the demicamral pause. The former h marked (") and the latter (') :-- ** The ateer and lion" at one crib shall meet, And harmless serpents" lick the pilgrim's feet. " ''The crested basalisk" and speckled snake." " And on the sightless eyeballs" pour the day." " But not to rae returns Day," or the swoet approach of even or of morn." " No sooner had the Almighty ceased," but all The multitude of angels" with a shout Loud" as from numbers without numbers," sweet As from blest voices" uttering joy. " . *' Warms' in the sun," refreshes' in the breeze. Glows' in the stars," and blossoms' in the trees ; Lives' through all life," extends' through all extent, Spreads' undivided," operates' unspent." EXERCISE IN SCANNING, The selections iu poetry (p-ges 161, 176, 268, Ac.) may be used as exercises iu ecannit>g. Further selections, if necessary, may be made from any poetical work. SELECTIONS IN PUOSE AND POETRY, 1NT«NDRD TO ■■ OSED AS ^mtxm itt ^rnlpH and §mxm. 1. The great buBineas of man is to improve bi* raiod.and govern hiB manners. The whole 'aniveree is his library; conversation hie living studiCB; and remarks upon them are his best tutors. Learning is the temperance of youth, the comfort of old age, and the only sure guide to honor and preferment. 2 Aristotle eays, that to become an able man in any profcsBioa whatever, three things are neccsHary— which are, nature, study, and practice. To endure present evils with patience, and wait for expected good wiih long Buffering, i. equally the part of the Chnstian and the hero. 3. Adversity overcome, ifl the l^'g^^^"' gl'^''^ ;, ^"^.^;"";^Y,,"°: rlergoue, the greatest virtue : sufferings are but the trials of gallant spirits. Never employ yomeelf to discern the faults of othei8, but be careful to amend and prevent your own. 4. There is an odious in spirit many persons, who are better pleased to detect a fault than to commend a virtue. The worthiest people are most injured by slanderers ; as we usually find that to be the best fruit, which the birds have been picking at, , • * i • 6. When a man loses his integrity, he loses the foundation of hie virtue. , A contented mind is a continual feast; and the pleasure of the banquet is greatly augmented, by knowing that each man may be- ^;tiJ w uts V ^T tt ' . ,^^. ,•,»•»« til - 6. Man is born for society, without which virtue would have no 't 'to'M I fin ,) S68 ENQLISH ORIMHAR. oufpTSrfs! '"'' "°""' '" ''"""' ""•"•■"«"«. -d 'if Witt M to imitate their ,irt!,c, ' ""'' ""'"' "'"^ " «" .biotas ?o":u";„;Lr;:"""' "™'™' "■ "" ^°- -«-. -^ it Aoold not be in hi" p"„we" ZZh Wm ' '""^"'° '"'' "'•"'' a. it 'Like birds, wLo8e beauties lauguish, half oonceal'd ^panded flh.ne with azure, green, and gold How blessings brighten as thfy take therflightl" ««»«7. if he has this si?glf tZtT n«rf'°r^' '""'Jl' °° ^^« «<>«■ ■We of others, he may do Sa Z Pf//"*'*'°?' t"}^ ^ut a common tton of life. ^ ^""^ ^^ P^^^^es »n hw particular sto- 4. ^ ^ .. "Never man was trulv bleaf But , eompos'd and gave him suK cast As folly might mistake for want of jov A cast unhke the triumph of the prJud :' A modest aspect, and a smile at heart.'' JntlJdTceTmf'ddTbraLt^^^^^ f ^ ''' '^'^^^^ «'^^er voluntarily place, for the e^S^j^^"/"^^^ no le^ so. in the la?t .negligence, from toS ilxaUon of ««V r'"' ^*'^^ ^'^^ ««P'°« imagination to rove with PnfllT: ''".^°^'°"» ^'^m allowing our towards the end of rbe cart '" ^"''' '^' '^'' °^ '^«^^^' d it f< b V li tl m SELECTIONS IN PBOSIi: AND POETRY. S6» 6. *' ifVho noble eridH by noble mesuia obtiiiiis Or failing, emiles in exile or in chains, Like good Aurcliut', lot hitn lol^n, or bleed Like Socrates, that man is greiit indeed." If there is any passion which intruder itself unseasonably into i.ur mind, which darkens and troubles our judgment, or habitually discomposes our temper; which unfits us for properly discharg- ing the duties, or disqualifies us for cheerfully suioyiug the com- fortB of life, we may certainly conclude it to huvo gained a danger- ous ascendant. 8. •* No radiant pearl, which crested fortune wears, No gem, that twinkling hangs from beauty's ears, Nor the bright stars, which night's blue arch adoiD, Nor rising suns that gild the vernal morn, Shine with such lustre, as the tear that breaks, ^ For other's wo, down Virtue's manly cheeks." 9. Let us be animated to cultivate those amiable virtues, which are here recommended to us ; this humility and meekness ; this peni- tent sense of ain ; this ardent desire after righteousness; this oomr passion and purity ; this peacefulnees and fortitude of soul ; and, in a word, this universal goodness which becomes us, as we sustain the character of " the salt of the earth," and " the light of the world." 10, *' How lov'd, how valu'd once, avails thee not ; To whom related, or by whom begot : A heap cf dust alone remains of thee ; 'Tis all thou art, and all the proud rhall be." 11. It may indeed be objected, that the same sensibility lays open the heart to be pierced with many wounds, from the distresse* which abound in the world ; exposes us to frequent suffering from the participation which it communicates of the sorrows as well at of the joys of friendship. But let it be considered, that tbn tender melancholy of sympathy, is accompanied with a eensatioii, whi<^ fhev who feel it would not exchange for the gratification of the selnsh. :):■■■■ I m K^ ()..y HH tho mom; hriulit pl.uv. tbo veruiil sIt, ' IJope Hwell« hi8 H.iilH. Hiui I'assion steers lug coursR. bafii g'l.lfs Ins litilo lurk nloii^r (l,o aUon* Wijcio Virtue tsilcoH hor Klnrui : but if too far IJe l.-mnclieu forth be}oii(l diBcraiou'a mark, Hiiddcn tho leinpost scowls. I ho nur^^'^s ro,»r, iJlot his fmr day, and plunge him in tha (icep." 1.3. I'Vom nil this it follows, (hut i„ ordorio (Jipcorii where raau's truo wCfo;in a r.^:y'"'T^ ^'^^^'y' buttothewhole of 7uTf T^ \ y • ^^'''' *'"^'^'''« "' "' "« such.tornnk hiifh amonir 14. •' Rca«on'e >vhoIe pleasure, nil the joya ofaenee. Lie ui three word^ : health, peace, and conipotenco . • iJut health ronst.His w,!h {empornnce alone, Aud peace, Virtue ! peace is all thy own." 15. A mind superior t., fear, y ,h8 resa sunk into dejectiJn : such .s the miTwhlh S the distinction aad einiueuce of man. 16. " The tree of deepest root is found, Least willing still to quit tho ground : 1 was (herefo e said, by nneiont 8ag03, J hat love of life increased with years, ho much, that in our later stages, VVIu.n piiniB grow sharp, an.l sickness rnges, The greatest love of life appears." 11. di.?)?n.r'l!"''- T f'^"'^t\«" ^>f life, is either ashamed or afraid of S n-^uhiVf,''' ^''"r^"^ r'V" J'« ^vor.hip., nod true to the laith in which 1)0 professes to believe; full of affection to hiR b.ethren of mankind ; faithful to his friends, gene o m o hi^ene! mes warm with compasbion to the unfortnua.e ; self-denying to little private uuere.ta and pleasures, but zealous for public interest SELBCTIONS IM PROSE AlTD PC.TRY. 87r And happiness ; iDn^nanimoua, without beiug proud; humbl*, without being uicim; just, witiiout being Lnt'sli; siinplu ia his rannnei'fl, but manly in hin foelinifs ; on whose word *^;o can entirely roly; whoso couutenunco never deceives uh; whoso professions of kindneMss are the cirusioim of his heart: one, in fine, whom, inde- pendently of any views of advantage, we should choose for a supe- rior, could trust in as a friend, and could love as a brother — this is the man whom, in our heart, above all others we do, we must honour. 18. "Softia the strain when zephyr gently blow8, And the smooth stream in smootlUM* numbeis llows; But when loud surges lash the sounding shore, The hoarse, rough verse, should like the torrent roar." ly. This planet, anii the lour otiiers that so wonderfully vary their myptio dance, are in themselves dark bodies, and shine only Uy reflection ; have fields, and seas, and skies of their own ; are fur- oishe4,with all accommodation)) for animal subsistence, and are supposed to be the abodes of iutelleetual life; all whicli, together with our earthly habitation, arc dependent on that grand dispenser of Divine munificencG, the sun; receive their light from the dis- tribution of his rays, and derive their comfort from hla benign ageney. 20. " A niglitingftic, that alt day long Had cheer'd the village with his song, Nor yet at eve bin note suspended. Nor yet wheu eventide was ended, Beg.in to feel, as well ho might, 'the keen demands of ai)jiolilc; When, la»>king eagerly around, He spied fur off, U[)oi' the ground. A something shinitig in tiie dirk, And knew the glow-worm by his ?park." 21. This sun, with a'l its attendant planets, is but; a very little part of the grand micluno of th'j universe: every star, though iu ap- pearance no bigsrer tlnm th,' (liann)nd ihit glittei-a upon a lady's ring, is roally a vast globe, like the sim in sizj, and iu glory; no !es3 spacious, no le^is hiniinous, than tlie radiant source of day. So that every star, is not barely a world, but the centre of a magnifi- cent system; has a letinue of worlds, irradiated by its beams, and revolving round its attractive influencL», all which are lost to our sight in immeaBurable wilds of ether. mt »»"!;■ m 41 I 272 KWGLI8H GRAMMA K. 22. ■"A Grecian youth of talente rare, Whom Plato'c philosophic c:ire, Had fortn'd for Virtue's nobler view, By precept and example too. Would oJten boast hia matchless skill, To curb the steod, and guide the wheel ; And as he pass'd the gazing throng. With graceful ease, and smack'd the thoag, The idiot wonder they expreas'd Was praise and transport to Jua breast" 23. In the Bccond place, 1 would recommend lo every one. the ad^ mirable precept which Pythagoras is said to have given to hie dis- cjples, and which that philosopher must have drawn from the oN^. ration I have enlarged upon : "Pitch upon that course of life deli htful "'^^^ excellent, and custom will render it the naoRt 24. "S^*?*^'*''^^' ^^^ ^""^^^ morning streak the east With first approach of light, we must be risen, And at our pleasant labor ; to reform You flow'ry arbours, yonder alleys green, Our walk at noon, with branches overgrown, That mock our scant manuring, and require More hands than ours to lop their wanton growth Those blossoms also, and those dropping gums, ' That ho bealrown, unsightly and unsmooth. Ask riddance, if we mean to tread with ease Mean while, as nature wills night bids us rest " w b fa St w ■hi yi n* fa In the fourth place, we may learn from this observation which we have made on the mind of man, to take particular care, wheti we are once settled in a regular course of life, how we too fre- quently indulge ourselves m even the mo».t innocent diversione and entertainments ; since the mind may insensibly fall off from the S, ?; V'/"°"* "f °"'' ^°^ ^y '^^Srees, exchange that pleasure mnM? .•/"•''"' '!i ^-"^ P«''f«';'nance of its duty. fSr deligits of a mach inferior and unprofitable nature. 26. "Sweet is the breath of morn, her rising sweet, With charm of earliest birds; pleasant the sun, When first on this delightful laud be Bpread** Ui8 orient beams oa lierb, tree, fruit, imd flow'r il hi SBLECTIOJfS IIV PROSE A.XD POETRY. 273 Glist'rinjcj with due; fragrant the fertile earth, After soft show're : and Hweet the coming ou Of grateful evenings mild ; then silent night, With this lier i^olemn bird, and this lair moon, And these, the gems of lieav'n, her starry train : But neither breath of morn, when she ascends With charm of earliest birds ; ncr rising sun On this delightful land; nor herb, fruit, flow'r, Olist'ring with dew ; nor fragrance after show'ra ; Nor grateful evening mild ; nor silent night. With this her solemn bird; nor walk by moon, Op glitt'riug star-light. — without thee is sweet." Happy that man, who, unembarrassed by vulgar cares, master of laimBelf, his time, and fortune, spends his time in making himself wiser ; and his fortune, in making others (and therefore himself) laappier; who, as the will and understanding are the two ennobling faculties of the soul, thinks himself not complete, till bis under- standing is beautified with the valuable furniture of knowledge, as well as his will enriched with every virtue ; who has furniBhed himself with all the advantages to relish solitude, and enliven con- versation ; who, when serious, is not sullen ; and when cheerful, not indiscreetly gay ; whose ambition is, not to be admired for a false glare of greatness, but to be belov.: i" yolirs, An-I conscious of tlie outrage be commits, Shall seek it, and not find it in his turn." 31. In the exercise of good aficctions, and the testimony of an appror- ing oonseifnce ; in the B^npe of peace and rec<;nciliation with God, through the great Redeemer of mankind ; in tlfyi)o. ion into Christ'* mouth, because at th. time of writing the history, the event had turned out so to be: for, .'he only two remaining suppositions appear it* the highest degree incredible; which are, either that Chriet filled the mind^ of his followci's with fear and apprehen- Bions, without any I'eaaon or authority for what he said, and con- trary to the truth of the ca-'c ; or that, although Christ had never foretold any such thing, and the event wouUl have contradicted him if he had, yet hisiorians, who lived in the age when the event was known, falsely, ae well as ofiiciously, ascribed these words to bim. 62. *' How sinks hia soul I What black despair, what horror fills his heart I When, tor the dusky ppot, which fancy foigu'd His tufted cottage rising through the snow. He meets the roughness of the middle waste, Far from tlie track, and blest abode of man ; While round him night resistless closes fast. And every tempest howling o'er his head, Renders the savjige wilderness more wild." When we consider, first, the prevaleney of the religion at this hour; Fcccndly, the only credible account Avhich can be given of its origin, viz : the activity of the Founder and hia associates ; thirdly, the oppoeitiou which that activity must naturally have excited; fourtidy, the fate of the Founder of the religion, attested by heathen writers as well as our own ; fifthly, the testimony of the same writers to the sufferings of Christians, either contemporary with, or imnndiately suceeetling, the original settlors of the insti- . tution ; sixthly, predictions of the sufferings of his followers ascribed l".( I' I k ^ V ^^v-^' ?> /A <^^/ rliuiugicipiiiL; Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 |\ ^Q LV ■O' :\ \ Pi? ;\ 280 l?FfC3H8H GRAMMAR. M eitber hat sucl. predictions were delivered and fulfilled or that the wnters of Chn,t.'8 life «^ere induced by the event t7at?ribnte .nch predictions to him; seventhly, letters^nowrour poLe^^^^^^^^ written hy some ot the principal Jgents in the transaction reS;: 1 ng expressly to extreme labors, dangers, and sutforin-, "ustlined by themse ves and their companions ; lastly, a history rrS to be written by a fellow-traveller of one of the new teachers and s^ll eXr'n'rnv-'^'^^ '«"«- ofTha'persor; sU 1 extant, nroving itself to be written by some one well acquainted of travel/ nir' V^' """?''^'' ^'l^'c^^-'^tory contains Jccouut^ of travels, persecutions, and martyrdoms, answeriur. to what the ^mu"r whi h' t" 1 '' ^"P"' ; Y'^" ^^ '^^ together%hese con. ^ I hir ;Jf i n* ''^^^f" f^Parately. are, I think, correctly, such d^ubtrlm^ n ""'"" '° ^^ preceding chapters, there cannot much time a^nTZ/^^fK""' "^ "i'^'' \"? ^^''^ * '^"'"b^'' «f Persons at that 8t" V Snd for'?!.. ' T^\ P"''^'''^ advancing an extraordinary volumar^f; j1.m. • '^^' .^^ propagating the belief of that story . voluntarily incurring great personal dangers, traversin.^ seas and kingdoms, exertmg great incfustry, and sustaining g^eat ex rrmitre. of 111 usage and persecution. s S '*^ «*treumiea 54. The genuineness of the historical books of the New Testament . h^j"." r^''^'^' ^ P"'"* ^^ importance, because the strengTh of Jilv «n h'°''.;'.''°^T'"*'^ ^y °"^' knowledge of the situatfon of the r authors their relation to the subject, and the part which thev ST"* V^' transaction; and the testimonies whi^h we are able to produce, compose a firm ground of persuasion, that the NevSLrerT^'''^^^" f^ ^r'""' -l^ose^ames they bear Nevertheless, I must be allowed to state, that to the areumen which I am endeavoring to maintain, this ^int is not essenS! 1 mean, «o essential as that the fate of the ar|ument depends upon it 65 « JJ*d>J^h ^^^J"*'"'* *"<* sutferlngs of the apostles were for the JS ^ /.t^'w^T! "°^^^ P*"^^'^^ ^y *^« consideration that tbb story 18 transmitted to us by two of their own number, and by two others personally connected with them ; that the par i^ilarUy o? tnf^J^^r Pr?^^^' t^' '^^ writers claimed to possess cir7um^ tS ij r'''°"* '^f •^''^'" ^^''' «''^"^t'«" they had fulUpZ. tanity of acquiring such information; that thev certa'nlv at K th'ST J^V';f '']^'T''' ^'^^"- <=o'4anions tlir mS, taig^^^^^ that each of these books contains enou.^h to prove the truth of the' SZ; Tl\u '"^ ^"' "^ ^■'''''' 'J^^^^'t'^'-^' l>e genu ne, it ia ^eH bl th^l !p' g^°"^"«»«««- however, of all af themis madeoul 2bp mif^ S- ^ 'T^ arguments which evince the genuineness of rhe «o«t undisputed remains of antiquity, as also by pecuCand SELECTIONS IN PROSE AND POETRY. 2SI •pcci fie proofs, viz. hy citations of them \a writings belonging to h period immediately contiguous to that in which they were pab- hshed ; by the distinguished regacd paid by early Chi-istians to the authority of Iheae books (which regard was manifested bv their collecting of them into a volume, appropriating to that volume titles of peculiar respect, translating them into various langaagee, digesting them ioto harmonies, writing commentaries i.pon them' and, still more conspicuously, by the reading of them in their public aMembliea io all paats of the world); by a universal agreement with respect to these books, whilst doubta were entertained con- cerning some others ; by contending sects appealing to them ; by the early adversaries of the religion not disputing their genuine- ness, but, on the contrary, treating them as the depositories of the history upon which the religion was founded ; by many formal catalogues of these, as of certain authoritative writings, published in different and distinct parts of the Christian world ; lastly, by the absence or defect of the above cited topics of evidence, when applied to any other histories of the same subject. 66. Had a teacher of morality been asked conoerniug a general principle of conduct, and for a short rule of IHe ; and had he instructed the person who consulted him, " constantly to refer hie actions to what he believed to be the will of his Creator, and con- stantly to have in view not his own interest and gratification alone but the happiness and comfort of those about him," he would have been thought, I doubt not, in any age of the world, and in any even the most approved, state of morals, to have delivered a' judicious answer; because, by the first direction, he suggested the only motive which acts steadily and uniformly, in sight and out of •ight, in familiar occurrences and under pressing temptations ; and in the second, he corrected what, of all tendencies in the human character, stands most in need of correction, seljishness, or a con- tempt of other men's conveniency and satisfaction. These selections might with great advan- tage, in many cases, be used as exercises in Beading and Dictation, Scanning, &c. 1, , i i ; 4 h If t ''■■(. '^ ^;'W1 '"' r J ■,(?;■ :, ,•■-, '' diiiil VOCABULARY OF ROOTS. I. SAXON liOOTS, ObHrration.'-.A great min.bor of Eniflisl» words nre derir.rf from procu(,. y cor.o.,,o,uli„g «u,on wordJ^ Wlu r iho lor JZo toth, &o ) Iho Mvxon wor.l.H are not uiven iu ihe Vocal ularv X rj)Ot«i pnnte. buhw ur« those which ^'ivo o gh to "nim JiJ B^iglUh words, the dotivutiuu of which in .uore^i^uilVd Saxon Nouns. '^Ood'fct'' ^^"■' "^^"'^ """'• I"^. -^arfo.; the Ings. .uuue«of B^^.a^A; baru. banon.l. ho„- f^^^pJ; E. narnoH of places bane. Bot, 9atix/actiotL: U boot, boot- les0. Cyn, ract; kin, kindred, kltnl. Deor, animal; (Ger. Thier,) doer, Durhavi. Do f, part; (Qcr. Theil.)Uo!e, deal, to deal. Dun, a hill; downs; most proper uames end ia dun. Ba. Mh^'ii, stotnavh; (Ger. Marron.) niuw. ' iMore, lake; (Gor. Mere,) Uore, numea of places in were. N(uwe provioutor,/; NMze,name« or pliucH in ncHf. nice, khiffdom; (Ger. Reiob,) bialiopric. • . Sped, succrxs ; sneod Goil4nA«rl reond, cnernv : 'Gor Foil d ^ tjfnn 1.7 « . fiend, flendi;h. ' ^ '""''^ ^ ,^,^ ^ ;>/ac. ; nmnen of pl.cos Q^ard ™.fo.,.„; .v„,,l, ,,„,,Icn. ..f il,,, Ji,,' ',/;:;:''" '•' """'■" •^ nowige. leaHtwaya. V/yki), slave; villain. VOCAHUX.AHY OV ROOTM. Mt m Saxon Beordnn, to order ; (Oer. biuton) bid, tu'iKilc. iioorf^iin, to protrct : ((J«r. bor- nn, to wait ; huU; ubiJo, uhodu. ni(i)8an, /o blow: ((lOr. bliisen,) blh«(., bliiHtor, blossom. JJrncuii, to une ; bidkcr, to brook. Ibiaii, to cultivate ; (dor. biiuon,) boor, neij;lib)ur, Hugan, to bow ; (Oor. biogou,) bow, bough, buy, olbow. Ooupiat), to bui/ : ((Jur. kau- i'vn) cheap, chiipitiun, cbafl'or, Cb('«p8i>!rit;ghter; tleiglit, «ly, (clover in Btroke.) Siiican, to ererp ; Hncnk, imako. Htcorfan, to die; Htarvc, (Oer. Hterbeti.) Stigan, to ancend ; (Oer. Htoigon) stair, i tjigo, Htory, atirrup. Tollan, .« count; (Ger. 7.iihlor») tell, tale. Teogiin, to draw ; tug. Thiidcan, to senn ; metiiiiiks (it eeenia (o me.) Thringan, to prese ; (Oer. drin- g(Mi,) throng. ^ Wmiian, /w /«/■/.• wane, wnn. Weal(lei), to ijovern ; wiold, bretwa'dii, ((Jer. (jewalt.) Wcnan, to think ; ween. Wenden, to g<> ; wend, went, wander, ((»er. Wenden.) Wilui), to know : wit, wol, wise, (Oer. wi^Hen.) Wrceivn, to revcvr/p; wreak. Writhr\n, to twid ; wreal.be, writhe, wrath, wroth, wry. Wuniiin, to dwell / ((Jor. wobmeo) WOflt. '4, 111- !l I 'II tM XlfOLISH OKAMMAa* Mr, be/ore; ere. early, erst, iialig, holy , (Ger Leilio- ^ lUV. Bald, Arat,*; bold, Ethelbold. doun l^*'*- '^e'l'g,) Hali- Eald o/a; elder, alderman, Aid- Rein, clean; (Ger. rein.) rin^e. n 1 1 . ••^"a«-% »*f<^ ; ruddv. Ruthin God. ^oorf. gospel, godsend. Soth.'/ru/; soo'h slut^yer Hal, nound; whf»le, wLoiesome. uouirtayer. hale. II. Lati.v Kooth — Nou.Ns. -fides, a building, edifice. iEvura, an age ; coeval. Ager^ a field ; agriculture. Aninia, life; aninaal. Animus, mind; magnanimouH, Annus, y«ar; annual. Aqua, toaler; aquatic. Arraa, weapong ; armour „, f",." ' """wfui. raouia, a table: fabulc Articulus, a /e«/.>,W; article. Facies. ////ac.« efface Dexter, Me rtyr; digit. Doraus, a house ; domicile. Equus, a horse; equestrian. Exemplum, instance; example Fabula, a /ai/tf; fabulous. AuriB, the ear; aurjst. Am\xm,gold; jauriferous. Auster, south vnnd; Australia. Avis, a bird ; aviary, augur. Barba, beard; barber. Bellum, war; rebel, bellicose. Bracbium, the arm ; bracelet. Pama, report; famous, Femina, woman: female, Ferrum, iron; farrier. Filius, a son; filial. Finis, end \ final. Flamma, Jtame ; inflame. Flos, fiovoer; flourish. o-i-.,! ^ i-7,, 1 ' """^"'^i- J^'O8,;;0M)(f/-; nourish. Calculus, a /e«;«*^o/ie; calculate. Folium, /ea/: folia^^e Calor, heat ; caloric. Fnrm^ WrLl . r "° J.i Calor, heat ; caloric. Canis, a dog ; canine. Caput, o^; immaculate. Magister, a master ; magistrate. Mamma, the breast ; mammalia. Manus, the hand; mauual. Mare, the sea, marine. Mara, the god of war; martial. Mater, mother ; maternal. Materies, ma^/0r ; material. Mel, honey ; mellifluous. Mens, mtW; mental. * Miles, a soldier ; military. Minse, threat* ; menaces. Modus, manner ; raood. Mola, mill; meal. Moles, mass ; demolish. Mons, mountain; promontory. Mors, death; immortal. Moe, manner ; morals. Munus, gift,' munificent. Negotiura, business ; negotiate. T^imX, nothing ; anoinilate. Nomen, a name; nominal, NTox, night ; nocturnal. Ifamerus, number ; numeration Oculus, the eye ; oculist. Os, oris, wjom/A; oral. Os, ossis, bone;, ossify, Ovum, f^^f; oval. Pactus, a treaty ; compact. Palraa, a jaa/vi ; palmary. Pars, a part ; partial. Pater, a father ; paternal. ^ax^ peace; pacify. Pectus, breast ; expectorate. |N,ii Pes, foot ; biped. Pilus{capillu8), hair; pile,oapU- lary. Piscis.^aA; piscatory. Planta, plant ; plantation. Plumbum, lead; plumber. Poena, punishment; penal. Vondm, weight , pound. Populus, people; popular. Prseda, booty ; predacious. Pretium,/)r»V#; precious. Puer, boy ; puerile. Quies, rest ; quiet. Radius, spoke of wheel ; ray. Radix, roo<; radical. , Rirus, stream ; river. Robur, strength; robust. Rota, wheel ; rotary. , Rus, country ; rustic Sal, salt; saline. ^aXaa, safety ; salvation. Sanguis, 6/oocf; sanguine. Sapor, savour ; insipid. Seculum, the age; secular. Semen, seed; seminary. Signum, sign; signify. Sol, «tin; «)olar. Somnus, sleep ; somnambulist. Sorf , lot ; assort. Spatium, space ; expatiate. Tabula, table ; tabulate. Tempus, time ; temporary. Terminus, boundary; eztemi- nate. Terra, the earth ; terrestriaL Testis, witness ; attost. Umbra, shadow ; umbrageous. Unda, a wave ; inundate. Urbs, ct ; votary. Vulgijg, common people ; vulgar. Vulnus, wound ; vulnerable. Verbs. Flecto (flexus), bend; flexible. Fluo./ow; fluid, Frango (fractus), break; fracture. Frico, rub; friction. Frigeo, /amcoW,- frigid. Fugio,/t ; fugitive. Fundo (fusus), pour ; difi'use. Gero (gestus), bear ; belligerent. Gradior (gressus), #<(jp; congress. Habeo, Aav«,' habit. HflBreo, stick ; adhere, Ignoro, not to know ; ignorant. Imperio, command., impcriou?. Jaceo, /t>; adjacent. Jacio, cast; eject. Judico,_;«c^(?; adjudicate. Jungo.jom ,• conjunction, ^uro, swear ; jury. Labor (lapsus), s//(fo ; relapse. Laedo {Xsn^xxm), strike ; collision. Lego, send ; deiegnte. Lego (lectum), cAooM ; elect. Levo, raise ; lever. Libero, to free , liberate. Liceo, to be allowed; license. Ligo, to bind; obligation. Linquo, leave ; relinquish. Loquor, speak; eloquent. Ludo, play ; prelude. Luo, wash ; dilute. Mando, commit to; commend. Maneo, remain ; mansion. Medeor, /tea/ ; remedy. Memini, remember ; mt-raory, Mercor, 6«y; merchant. Mcigo (mersum), plunge ; im- merse. Mineo,/ojpro/Vc^; eminent. Misceo (fiiixus), mix; miicelhi- neous, Mitto, send; remit. Moueo, advise ; monitor. TOCABULIRY OF ROOTS. 887 Mordeo, bitg ; remorse. Moveo (motua), move ; motion. Nasc<»r (njilua). to be born ; in* Date. Necto, bind; connect. Nego, deny ; negation. Noceo, hurt ; noxious. Nosco (notus), ktiow ; denote. Nuncio, make known ; announce. Opto, wish ; optative. Orno, adorn ; ornament. Pando, lo tiiretch ; expand. Pareo, appear: apparent. Faro, prepare ; repair. Paseor (pa8tum),/e«rf; repast. Patior, suffer ; patient. Pello (pulsus), drive ; repel. Pen'leo, hang; depend. Peto, ^''ek; petition. "Plaeeo, please ; placid. Placo, appease ; placate. Plaudo, clap ; applaud. Plecto, twine; complex. Pnco,/o/rf,' complicated. Ploro, implore; deplore. Pono (positup), jj/ace; deposit. Porto, carry; import. Precor, pray; imprecate. Preheudo, larj hold of; appre hend. Premo (pressus), press: impress. Probo, approve ; probation. Pungo, prick ; pungent. Purgo, cleanse ; purgatory. T^nio, think; repute. Quaero, seek ; query. Qucror, complain ; querulous. Rapio (raptus), seize; rapadious. Rego, rule; regeut. Rideo, laugh; deride. Rigeo, to be stiff; rigid. Rumpo (ruptus), break; rupture. Salio (saltura), leap ; assail. Scando, climb ; ascend. Scribo (scriptus), write; trans- scribe. Seco, ctt^; sect, Sedeo, sit; subside. Sentio, feel ; sentient. Sequor, follow ; perseout e. Servio, Mrvfl; servile. Servo, keep ; preservatiou. Sisto, stop ; persist. Soleo, to be accustomed; insoldot. Solve, loose ; resolve. Sono, sound ; consonant. Speoio (spectus), see; inspect. Spiro, breathe; inspire. Utaiuo, appoint ; constitute. Sterno (stratus), tcatt r; pros- trate. Sto, stand ; station. Stringo (sti ictus), draw tight; strict. Sumo (sumptus), take ; assume. Tango (tactus), towh ; intact. 'Vemno^ despise ; Cf itemn. Tendo, stretch ; attend. Teneo, hold; tenacious, Tevreoy frighten ; terrify. Texo, weave ; textile. Timeo, /ear; timid. Tingo, dye; tincture. Tolero, 6mr; tolerate. Tollo, raise; extol. Torreo, roast; torrid. Torqueo (tortus), torest ; extort." Traho (traetus), draw ; attract. Tribuo, bestow; attribute. TrnAo, thrust; intrude. Tumeo, nwell; tumour. Utor (usus), ?<*; usetul. Vado, go ; evade. Valeo, prcvai/; valid. Veho, carry; vehicle. Veuio (ventus), come; advent. Verto, turn; convert. Video (visum), see; provide. Vinco (victus), conquer; invin- cible. Vivo, live; vivify. Voco,ca//; invoke. Yo\o,ffy; volatile. Volvo, ro//; involve. Voro, devour ; voracious. flp U it''- 'ml ■■•if 'ill '. ■ V, »- i' t68 IWOLIftH GRAMMAK. fjATIN AUJEOTITEI. A9er,$harp; acid. JKquas, fqual ; e(|untoi-. Albus, %thit€i albino. Alter, another ; alternate. AltuR, high; exalt. Antiquus, old; antique. Asper, rough; asperity. BoQui, good; bountj. Brevia, thort ; brief. Oautu9, vaary ; cautious. CaruB, hollow ; cavern. Oertufl, iiur« ; certify. Coctus, cooked ; cuneof>t Densus, thick ; dense. DignuB, vsortht/ ; dignify, Dulcis, evfifef ; dulcet. DurufSfhard; endure. Vixtevnns, outward ; external. Exterior, outer ; exterior. Extremus, outermost ; extreme Facilis, ea»t/ ; facile. Felix, happy; felicity. Ftrmus, ftrong ; firm. Fortis, strong ; fortify, G randis, $rr«a^; aggrandiet'. Gravis, heavy ; gravity. Inferior, lower ; inferior, foferus, loxo ; infernal. Internus, inn(»r ; internal. LatuB, broad; oblate. III. GR£UK Aer (aTjp), the air ; ferial, AgogoB (aywyos), leader ; dema- gogue. Agon {ayuiv) C(>ni««<; antagonist. Aiigelos (0776X05), messenger ; angel. Anthos {ayOos), floiocr ; polyan- thus. Authropos(oj'0pwTros),7nan ; phi- lanthropy. Arctos [apKro'i), bear ; arctic. Arithmos (apid/ioj), number ; aritbmetici Astron (a. Haireais (a[/>fa-it), choosing ; her- esy. Helios (^Aiot), mn; perihelion. Heraera {■}]fd.tpa),dai/; ephemeral, Hippos {lirwof), horse ; hippo- drome. Hodos (ASof), wat/ ; period, lludor (vSiip), water; hydroetu- tics. Ichthus (ix6vs), a fish ; ichthy- ology. Kephale (Kf(pa\7)), head; cephalic, Euklos {Kvit\os)f circle ; cycle. Laos (Aoos), people ; laity, liatreia (Aarpfia), service ; idola- ter. liOgoB (A070J), reason ; geology. Lueis (Au(r/y), loosing ; analyBia. Martyr (fxaprvp), witness ; mar- tyr. Mathema {ju.a9r]vu), seienee ; nm- thematics. MetroD (jjLfTpov), mcanure ; sym- metry. Meter (/ut;t»j^), mother; metro- polis. Muthos {(ivBos), myth; mythology, NaU8 (vavs), ship ; nautical. Grekk Nf.808 (tni\ffo%), island; PoUnesia. Nuinos (vo/i"f), Aiw; astronomy. ()iko8 {oiKOi), house ; cDConomj. (^fioma (oKo/io), name; synonym«. OphthalmoH (o^eoA/iot ), eye; opb- thalmia. OrOanon {opyavov), instrument • organic. Ovma (opvn), bird; ornithology Pais (irojj), child; pajJagogue. Pathos {iraeot), /eeling ; pjithol- ogy. Petra (ntrpa), rock ; petrify. Phone (ri), » jtce; phonetion. Phos (ipas), light ; phosphorus. Pusig {(t>v io command; raon- nrch. Ball© (&a\\w), to throw; sym- bol. Calupto (waAinrTw), cover ; Ap- oclypse. Verbs. Gignosco ( yiyvaxTKu ), know ; proguoatic. Grapho (ypatpu), write ; antu- graph. Miseo (/ui. CtuinuoB (yufiyoi), nakt'd ; fifvin- nastioa. lloteroft(fr«poj), attothrr ; hotor- ogencouB. TIier()8(<'*poi), snrred; hieniicliy. Icoa (ktos), equal ; IbuHcoIos. iMonoa (^ovoj), alone ; niouoluii- 0U8. Sknpeo {(TKoirta), nee; tt'Iu8Cop«. Stello (ortWu). $end ; ft|x»BtIf. Timso (raarru), nrraiu/n ; Hvntax. Thoaomui (Oafiat), see ; theatre. 'IVrnnct {T*f.iPu), cut ; otoiu. Trt'po (rptnu), turn ; (ropioji. njICCTIVKC. Necro« (tiKpos), (/ '^'V-l ■p : '. #:>:^ ill t >■••»■ t '1 -VI 1 l^i^or^Ml^^*"' K-'^'^v'^^^^r'^^^'^^ ^''°-' ^^'•«^- therefore, ye iguorantly worship, h.m declare 1 unto you." ^ iNDlIiKCT PISCOIJESE. ^^Tbc ;iame, reported iu indirect or oblique diacourae, would run Then Paul, «tunding on Mars hill, told the men of Athens h$ ^nl^^t '^""y^'f^i^H^' 'h^ '''''■' *- ^"Pe-BtitioLtfor a t passed by and beheld their devotions, he found un a. ar with this Sn^;v^^^'°^^.^^''r''^^''^^•^ ^^-™' therefoTe ^% ^gnorantly worshipped, him declared he unto them. When the reporter, the speaker reported, and the person or rnZZ. T''t-' "''^ ^^'^"»^"*^ '" g^''^^*' *>«• number, there is ' ao danger of ambigmty. But when m these respects ihey are the .«rae, ambiguity ,3 unavoidable, from the same pronoun beins osed m the progr^s of the discourse, to designate different per tTa ;„. •, **? P'^T^^t mistakes, it is often necessary to insert ttZi o'', designation of the person meant by the pronoun. An cjxample will beet illustiate Shis also -.-. ^ "llien the son went to his father and said to him, [direct] ' I have sinned against Heaven and in thy sight.'" ■• tha7h!"n h ! "''" ^f^t'^hJs father and"said to him, [indirfcq father's) sigSt."""^ ''""''' ^^''''"'^ °'"^'" and in his (his .nhJ.ili/'^r'''' b« perceived, that, without the words enclosed m brackets, for explanation, it would be impossible to tell whether Z^ZV\^ '*'• the /a Pj^iiosophj, sermon., nmeity speeches and orations. ^ r ^> » thlTJa^hV^ ^^"^',''^ ^''^'"f^ composition are~the epigram, deJfnZ\lf ''f^' ^'f ^^'"^ P^"^^' ^^^'^^' poetry,^ J<,>« '^^rzpttve poetry, deffy, lyric poetry, dramatic poetr/ and epie THE usp: of grammar in composition. To speak and write with proprietv, iu every 8p<«cies of com. rti\ratr.inlnH'"tl"'.' ^.' "^'^r'' •-P-taL;rand Z TZ o tHia attamment is the lusiness of grammar. The -rammar of a r^'S?4M^r^ compilation of rules nn». It h obvious, then, that the ultimate principle or test to which the rules hud down by the grammarian must conform, is the best usage. f„.!i^"r' ^^T- ""^ /"^.""'^ "'' ^''*^^^>«'" "^ Riticular word or iSrl 'P^.f? '! '''^^*^." ^^^^ ^".^^i-o/*. the only question to be decided 18, "la it according to the best mage V On Jhis subiect however.. t has been made a question, " What is the best'usage?" Solfr^ P^'"^ aenl.ment^ abridged from Dr. Crombie's work ox. «1^^! nAh^ ^T^?^'^ u'^^ ?^'''*^' ^^^"^ *^ ^« j"^t. and compreheu. aive oi this whole subject. ^ THE LAW OF LANGUAGE. The USAGE wiiich gives law to language, in order to e«tah. b tVe fi?« 'T'^' ''*^ i;i'''}'''' «"ff'-ie to' our assent, muTtt n the first place reputable, by which is meint, not the usage of the court, nor great men, nor merely scientiiic meu ; but of thoa ' whose works are ..teemed by the public, and who may therefore be denominated rt-jjufaA/* authors. ^ txiereiore nnJ h«'^^ T'^T! Pl^.""-^ *'"', "'"^^^ '""^t be nudonal. It moat not be confined to this or that province or district. " Those " io ro'l m7^'">"PP"'''\^-'™*'^'"^^' " ^^" ''«-»«te from the bekte^ flt^pil^wSrSlK^^^^ itt^lfnXTJgTh^\^^^^^^^^ wJi^^'fn?^' *^-'' "'^*g^^ust be ;)re.»e«^ n i^ difficult to fix with any precision what usage may in all cases be deemed pVe^enf in general, words and forms of speech, which have been lonp- u r« n/?,'"''^ "'' '' r^^''^''^- ^"^ '0' o^ the contrmy.lEt kinf «rf ?%P7^"t day IS not implicitly to be adopted. Man kind are fond of novelty, and there is a f ishion in lan-uaee kb there IS in dress. Whim, vanity, and affectation, delighUnfre^ tujgnew words, and using new forms of phraseology Now to adopt every new-fan^l^fl nn^tn.-t «. w. ij, .,, "?r ^°^* ^ ;«3te^ nor ]udgm.at,l.ut 'cluli^^):^tlrt^^;^ ^ ^jelty But should any of thesemaintain its groundfand'recelye the sanction ot reputable usage, it must i. that ca.e b^ r"cei vT IHli n i"i i' 1, 1 ll f:'' ■)li!.i ■ f.\ it ,)!< 294 KlfOLISH GRAHMAB^ The linage, then which gives law to languag«. and which IS generally denominated gornl u.-«jige, must be reputable, vationat and pre»€nt. It liappeua. however, that "good ua;ige" is not always u.nforn) in her decisions, and that in u.i^ueationable authorities are foutid f.ir different modes of ex|Hessi,iii. In euch cases, the foUmving oanoxs. proposed by Dr. CHmpl,ell. will be of service in enabling to decide to which phinseology the pref-ienoe ought to be given. They are given nearly in tUo words of the author: — Canon l.—WIien usage is divided as to any particular words words or phrases, and when one of the expressions is susceptible of a diferent meaning, while the other admits of only one signiB. cation, the expression which is strictly timvocl should be^pro- ferred. Canon 2.— Iu doubtful eases, analogy should be regarded. Canon 8.— When expressions are in other respects equal, that should be preferred which is most agreeable to the ear. Canon 4.— When none of the preceding rules takes place regard should be had to fiimplieity. But though no expression or mode of speech can bo iusti. led which IS not sanctioned by usage, yet the converse does not follow, that every phraseology sanctioned by usage should be retained. In many eucli cases, custom may properly be checked by criticmm whose province it is, not only t^ remoustrate against the introduction of any word or phraseology which may be either unnecessary or contrary to analogy, but also to exclude whatever IS reprehensible, though in general use. It is by this, her preroca- tive, that languages are gradually refilled and improved. In exercising this authority, she can nut pretend to degrade, in- stantly, any phraseology which she may deem objectionable- but bhe may, by repeated remonstrances gradually elFeet its dismis- fr'f.n • T'""','''.'^"'^ T'' '"'-y ^"^ '"'^P^''^^^ regulated by the following rules, laid dorvn by tiio same author :— Rule 1 —All wp'-ds and phiases, particularly harsh nod not absolutely necessary, should be dismisscil. Rule 2.--Wht.n the otymolpgy pluiidy points to a different signihcatiou from what the word bears,, propriety and simplicitv require its dismission, i i j v ''J RuLK .".—When words become obsolete, or are never used but i:i particular phrases, \[v.:y ^,-M be repudiated, as tiiey eivo the style nn air of vulgarity raui cant, .'hca this geueral disuse fenders them obscure. ' ENGLISH Composition. 295 irram- m^i^Ju^'^t^] ^«»'?^«"^ Pfi''«9e3 which, analyzed maticnlly, .nclude a solecism, should be dismiBsed. ' If8w''*.,f'~'^,'l ^^P'-e^'sioMs which, according to the estab- iinfl-.w ' of I'-^fgu^'ge, either have no meaDing, or inyolve a ^ntra,hct.on, or, according to the fair construction of the words thrt things a': reTuiVedTi ''"^"'^' "^'' grau>matical purity. I. That the words be all of that languaf^e. this rule 19 called a barbarlvn. "? The violation of of wJfjnII '?V''"'^''"^*^ ?^ armuged according to the rules *oS«w language. A v.olation of this rule is called a to %^r^^^ ^a'^- V?'"Pl7^'? '" t'mt sense which usage has annexed to thera. A violation of this rule is called impropriety. i« t J^r*""'*"* J? a° offeree against lexicography. The «o/.««« .8 an offence against the rules of syntax ; and the impropriety is wordflndplS^. ^^'^'-^-P^^' ^y --'-1^-g tl.e ^mefning-^of HINTS FOR CORRECT AND ELEGANT WRITING. a>rrect and elegant writing depends partly upon the choice of words, and partly upon the form and structure of sentences. nJ: ^"f* f-ir as respects single words, the chief things to be observed are purit>,, propriety, and precision. ^ VVIUTX. Purity consists in the rejection of such words and phrases as are not s rictly English, nor in accordance with the ^Lotoe of good writers or speakers. ' aou.e 01 1. Avoid foreign words and modes of expression • as "f'razchenr^'-.^-polUesse---^' He repents him of his folly " ' ' 3. Avoid obsolete .-itul unauthorized words ; as. albeit, a/ore time tn^pectator, judgmatical. .tyv/euwe, raopRiKTY. Propriety consists in the use of such words as are best adapted to express our meaning, auaineu ficrn e"*^'^^ '^^ ^'"'^ rrovineial espressions ; as, "To get into a o 2. In writing pro?o, reject words th, This morn."—'- Tno cole'^tial orbs." vt are merely poetical ; as, it' 5J1 1. i (i. i \\ : ^ h- . ill; |m. ^ 'h f :' ■ 1! Vf . {' i|i N n N: ! '■' ■ 6 ..,:;: f t, ;; ; 1! r" ■ii i''ii .i.l! iiiii 1 H 1 1 'ii ' m \ mi i! ■■m ■m'f. m k9Q ENGLISH GRajMHAR. 3. Avoid technical ternis, uuleas you write to thow who per feotlj understiuid tlicm. 4. Do not use the Hnme word too frequently, or in diFerent cengOB; as, "The king communicated hi» iutenti(»n to tiie miniiJter, who disclosed it to the secretary, who made it known to the pub- lie." — '• Hi8 own reason might have suggested bettor reaHona." 5. Supply words that are wantirg, and necessary to complete the sense. Thus, instead of "This action increased his former aer- vices," say, " This action increased the merit of hi« former »er. Ticea." 6. Avoid equivocal or anibiguona expressions, as " Ilia memury ehall be lost on the earth,'* 7. Avoid unintelligible and inoonHistent expressions ; us, " I ha^'p an opaque idea of what you mean." PBKCISION. Precision rejects superfluous words. 1. Avoid tautology ; as, " His faithfulness and fidelitti are nu- equalled" 2, Observe the exact meaning of words accounted syuonyiuoMe. Thus, instead of "Though his actions and intentions were good, he lost his cAara(r/'"'^%^ '« ^^■°>-'' P'-l-ted in italic. 2uTd 4wl?f:.i!;:;hn::;;^:i- -^^ ^^-^ «ituauo. i«.,ieH ^. A weaker as.orlion sh..uH m.t r„llow ,. stronuor ■ ami wl,«» resemblance .n the language aholald be preserved ^^^'''''"^' ""•"** ft. A aentence should not be concludml wJiK "« «... .u,r i,.co,„id.,.abl„ w„rd or pl,r„.™'"„£'iu;'em''ph'':r""""' " riGOOES OF SWUCII (SKI VAOBS 261 TO 256.) '-.githfr™' "'"' «8''™«'"^''»«"«S<' »"gbt never to bo blended PROGRESSIVE KXEaoiSES IS ENGLISH COMPOSITION. The IbUovviDg Exorcises are taken chieflv from Armstrong's " English Composition," Tn EtSr'gh/"''-'"'''' "^'^'^"^ '"•^"^^'^'^ . I8T EXERCISE. Conjoin the simple 8euici.ce.s in each of the fblIow.'n.y paragraphs into two aenten -ei, tollox^ing «, 5^.!""° ■!!'" S'^.^^ ««"^«e «' '•■fjht. The sun i« tl.« .enf.^ ^^ llie hjcDa 18 a fierce nnimni tu„ u • "^'"b"'"""' ne .,e.^a , round s;'irJ;o ll\';r;;"r;/,'a?:te,nr' It: II !:!3| »'': i^ ft ■'ill I' '■ " '"! i %i I ■•';■]* I '■■ (■ ! ■■■«■ ' . ■< \ !lii4' 298 J0NOL18H URAMMAR. The plant Bam phire Kro^i^* <»" i^e »«» ahore. The plant Bauijihire grows always in certain places*. These places are fiover covered by the ^ea. Thooak upbraided ihe willow. The willow was weak. The willow was wavering. The willow pave way to every blast. Soon after it blew \ hurric«ne. The willow yielded. The willow gave way. The oak stubbornly resisted. The oak was torn up by the roots. 2nd exercise. Conjoin the simple sentences in the following parn- graph into three sentences. The tiger is Almost confined to the warm elimates of the East. The tiger is especially confined to India. The tiger is especially confined to Siam. The Strait of Gibraltar leads into the Medi- terranean. The Mediterranean is a series of inland seas. These seas wash the shores of Rome. These fio.aa wash the shores of Carthage These seas wash Ihe shores of Syria. These seas wash the shores of Egypt. Cotya was king of Thrace. Cotys got a present of earthen vessels. The earthen vessels were exquisitely wrought. The earthen ves^sels were extremely brittle. Ci>ty8 broke them into pieces. Cotys did not wish to have occasion of anger against his servants. 8rd EXERCISE. Conjoin the simple sentenc^ in tiie following para- graph into a narrative with properly constructed sen- tences. Octavins, Lepidus, and Antonius, attained Bupreme power at Rome. They ])rOBcribed Plancus. Plancus had once been con- sul, riancus therefore fled for his life. His slaves were seized. They were put to the torture. They refused to discover him. New torments were prepared. Plancus would no longer sav'e him- self at the expense of so faithful servants. P'nncus came from liis hiding-place. He submitted to the swords of tlie messengers. The messengers sought his life. This w.aa a nobU example of mutual affection between a master and his slaves. It procured a pardon for Plancus. All the world exclaimed, that Plancus only was worthy of so good servaists. All the world exclaimed that they only wore worthy of so good a master. 4Tn EXERCISr:. Change the position of the clauses and phrases in the following sentences, without altering the construction or destroying the sense. Temperance, by fortifying mind aud body, leads to happinees. ENGLISH COMPOSITION-. 290 After tho Itevoliilioii, wlicM Jjunt^s IT. wu« dotlironod, it was liii»h troHHi'n to correspond with tin; oxiU-d nionurcli. The history of a nation, lo be icull.v iu^ruotivp, ahouhi contuiii noihmg but tho truth. Ho requires no luw wlio ooininitH no injury. " Ho who alwdy!» hve»» in tho i)ii«llc of the worhl, livfa iu u porpfttnal war- fare. Next tt) tiie 8UII, the moon has tho most anlnt.iry impre.«sion upon our «MrUi. Muuy ihing-i, which, in tho days of our fore- fatluMs, w«Me consiilored us ustdcas, are now rcjifarded as gvvat heiK'fiis. 5th exercise. Vary tlio coiis^truction of the adjective clause in eacli of the followinp; complex sentences. The king, who was taken prisoner, waR put to the sword. Junu!3 1., wlio was one of the wisest kings that reigned over Hcot- iHud, was assassinated at Perth in 1436. The eong of woe, which tho poets have attributed to the nightingale, ia entirely fanciful. A man who i.s intimately acquainted with the nature of things has sfld(«u occasion to be uatonished. Men of great talent are not always tho persons whom we ehould esteem. There are many peculiarities in pbmta which excite the gre.ite5it interest. Many things, which, in tlie days of our forefathers, were considered as useless, are now regarded as great benefits. Uti^EXEUCISE. Vary the construction of the participial phrase, cou- vortiiioj it into an adjective or adverbiaf clause. Tlie ocean, rolling its surges from clime to clime, is the most raagniliceut object under the sun. .Man, couBidered in himself, is a very hclplcstt and wretched being. Having obtained all the money that he could, Richard departed for tiie Holy Laud. The people, seeing so many of their townsmen fall, were exasperate I beyond all sense of danger. I yesterday passed a whole afternoon in the churchyard, the cloisters, and tho church, amusing myself with the tomustoucs and inscriptions tliat I nu>t with in those several regions of the dead. The minutest animal, exaniiued attentively, affords a thousand wonders. Ou learning the deft^at of Pembroke, Edward marched with an army towards Scotland, de- termined to be revenged on Bruce. 7th exercise. Vary the conatruction of tho participial independent phrase, converting it into a principal sentence. Order being obtained, the member addressed the House. In Palestine, tho cold of wi.nter not being severe, the ground is never ' .1 'i'i.iiJil i:::i!i! l)!l m •'',1' ' 300 HMULIMH UHAMMAM. froRcn. Thii olive tree is from twenty t<» thirty ft'ct liij^li, \if branolu'B bein^ iniinorons nud vory widoly extended. Perkirj'H affairii b«»in^ iiUogt'tlier ilenperaU', he oinl)iaocd thn king'n offer Mrithout heHitiitiiiu. The biitllu iuivin^ been euneluded, the com- loauder-inohief ordered an eHtinmto of hm Ioms tube made. The. rain bavin;^ pouretl in torrents, wo woro prevontod from setting out. lionl Cuthcart huviuuf taken tho oummuiid of the troopn they woro huided near Copenhiip;(M» without oppoHition. Tbo for tress baviofj surrendered, the kiuji; held a council witljin its w«\llh. hTir EXEROISR Vary the construction of one or more of tho principal claiisca in cuclii of tho following sontcuccH. And David put hid hand into big bap, and took thence a stoue. And fllaug it and omote the I'hiliHline in the forehead. Their int«n- tiouB were good; but they wanted prudence, and missed the mark at which they aimed. An the Arm.ulu advanced up the Cliatmel, th« Englis«h bUU followed and iut'cBted tho rear. Ab Hecket approached Suuthwark, the clergy, the laity, and men of all ranks and agCB, eamo forth to meet bim, and celebrated his triumphal entry with bynms of joy. A general aHsenibly of deputies was ilien summoned, and rhiladelphia, because it was tho mont een tral town, was lixed upon as the place of meeting. Tatriota have tolled, and in their eouniry's caiiHO bled nobly ; and their deeds, a^ Ihey deserve, receive proud recompeuBe. David, on reaching tht army of tho laraelites, found it in great confusion ; for a PbiliBtiut^ giant of enormouB stature had paraded boloro it duriopj forty days, and challenged the bravest to single combat. Ora EXEltCISR Vary the couHtriiction of the aentcncea iu tho follow- ing passages as much as possible, altering the position of the clauses as may bo found necessary. At the time of tlie French Revolution, there lived at Frankfort- on«the-Maine, in Germany, a Jewish banker, of limited means but good reputation, named Moses Rothaehild. When the Fr.encl. army invaded Germany, the prince of Iletiae-Cassel waa obliged to flee from his dominions. As he passed through Frankfort, he re> tpiested Moses Rothschild to take charge of a largo Bum of money and pome valuable jewels, which be feared might otherwise fall into the bands of the enemy. The Jew would have declined 8( great a charge ; but the prince was so much at a iosfs for the uieans of saving his property, that Mosos at length consented. He declined, however, giving a receipt for it, as in such dangerous eir- euniatances be could net be answerable for ita beio^j eafelv veatored. RN<»LI«II COMI'OHITION. 301 lOiu EXHRCISK. Subjjtitute nppropriftte words in tlu; t'ollowiufi; [jiiyau- gesfor thoso printed '\\\ italicH. Charlc'H, nftor H«mo delat/, (locoptod tho amdltlonn impoHcd upon liiin, and obtained leave to enter Scotland, where, U'h^ u kinq (Imn a prisoner, ho waH excluded from public affairn and the delihera- <Il woh recalled from Ireland, and nnsned ^'encral of the pRilian.cntary troops in tho place of Fairfax, whf) filt BOino religions Herujjleg about nttarkinf/ the Scotch. Ho imrnediateh/ set out at the htjatl of 10,000 men, and advanced vrWhowi obstacle a« far as Edinburgh. J^iCBly, who commanded the troops of th« Oovenanteri, was anxious to avoid a general 6a water-courses by the city is intersected, ind in trying to himself, his hat. The popuhice laughed, ami at the Euglishraan, expecting him to too. On the , be not only his composure, but promptl? to the spot where the hnd rolled, and it up, presented it with an of UDaiTected kindne^ss to its eon- fused The received it with a of sur- prise and gratitude, and to rejoio his company. Thert< was a of applause, and the passed on. Thimgh the of a monient, it ever^f heart : it was an of that genuine politeness which from kind and gentle feelings. On the being disndssud, the captain, who was ii young of rank, the cirtumstanc in terms to his colosel. The colonel immediately it to the genenil in ; and when the returned to his hotel, he an aid-de cnmo around lira, and struck tho ahiejd of joy. Hvory oilico «)f beniflcence and hnmauity Is a pleasure to him who in prompted by rirtuous sensi- bility. . call on you, ye horoes, who have lost so much blood fu til') Bervico of your country. He HtaDBonant sounds which itioreneed upon me to Buch a degree that I vrw utterly confounded and could compare the noise to nothing out the confusion of tongues at Babel after oonteniplating these things I turned my eyes towards the top of the mountain where the air was always pure and ''xhilarating where the path was shaded with laurels and other evergreens and the effulgence which beamed from the face of the goddess seemed to shed a glory round her votaries happy said I are those who are permitted to ascend the mountain while I was pronouncing this exclamation with uncommon ardour I saw stani^ing beside me a form of diviner features and a more benign radiance happier said she are those whom Virtue conducts to the mansions of Content what said I does Virtue then reside in the vale I am found said she in the Tale and I illuminate the mountain I cheer the cottftger at his toil and inspire the sage at his meditation I mingle in the crowd of cities and ble^s the hermit in his cell I have a temple la every heart that owns my influence and to him that wishes for m« I am already present Science may raiae you to eminence but I alone can guide to felicity while the goddess was thus speaking I stretched out my arms towards her with a vehemence which broke my slumbers the chill dews were falling around me and the shades of evening stretched over the landscape I hastened homeward and resigned the night to silence and meditation. DICTATION. 26th exercise. I. "Write to dictation the followiug narrative, insert- ing the points and capital letters, and forming the paragraphs. Edward III., after the battle of Cressy, laid siege to Calais, lie had fortified his camp in so impregnable a manner, that all the efforts of France proved ineffectual to raise the siege or throw suc- cors into the city. The citizens, under Count Vienna, their gallant governor, made an admirable defence. France had now put the sickle into her second harvest, since Edward, with his victorious army, sat down before t e town. The eyes of all Europe were intent on the issue. At length, famine did more for Edward than arras. After suffering the most dreadful culamilie«, they resolved to attempt the enemy's camp. They boldly sallied forth ; the English joined battle ; and, after a long and desperate engagement, Count Vienne was tnken prisoner, and the citizLMis who survived the slaughter retired within their gates. The command now devolving upon Eustace St. Pierre, a man of mean birth, but of ex.dtfd virtue, he offered to capitulate with Edward, provided he permitted them to depart with life and liberty. Edward, to Jivoid the imputation of cruelty, coaaeiited "(I n Ml! li < !! M I! Hi 11 'I; ii''l ll"l m 312 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. But no fl.t iJ cried St. Pierre ; " I am then twice sacrificed liut no , tliy years are few, but full, my son. The victim of vir cried jJhn de^ Aire^^'V^' \'"^' '^ ^^^'••^^•" "Y""^" kinsman,' ''Your kin Jnn .1^!'^ p7^^^^^ '^"^^ James Wissaut. loui kinsmau, cried Peter Wissaut. " Ah i" exclaimed Sir Wal CalaiV''°^Tbe^7;^ "l'^ ^^^"' >^^ -a rtTa'ciuL^of suDDlied ht Z f "^'^ '"' 'T '^^" ^^a'^^Jng. I'ut was quickly in|?a example. ""^^^''' ^^'^" ^^'"^ "°^ *'""^°^« °f «° ^"'^ot^ The keys of the city were then delivered to Sir Waif p.- TT« remXw"..V S^^«. «^^^g? ^o his attendants to conduct the Sn«h^R J''''".l '''^J' '^'^'^ ^^'«"'«« through the camp of he tofak. th« 1 T • "^ i^l^'-^'']' ^^^^^e''. the/desired pefmise on ^sceue ' Thp^ f''Y.^^^'' deliverers. wLt a parting I Wlmt Thev emhrn/i ^T^^^^^out St. Pierre and his feilow-prisonera. them- Sr„!^ they clung around; they fell prostrate before th^T'mtr^w!,rrJJi'7.:t,f -^ -J^^^^^ Ut damour of throughout the°Er^Ti"sh camp. ^" " '"' '"^' ""^ ^^-« i'^'^^d ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 313 are CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES TO ILLUSTRATE PUNCTUATION. 27th exercise. 1. Write six sentences in each of which a comma ia required. 2. Write six sentences in each of which two commas a required. 8. Write six sentencas in each of which three commas are required. 4. Write six sentences in each of which four commas are required. 5. Write six sentences in each of which a semicolon is re- quired. 6. Write six sentences in each of which two semicolons are required. 7. Write six sentences in each of which a colon is required. 8. Write six sentences in each of which a point of interrogation is required. 9. Write six sentences in each of which a point of exclamation is required, 10. Write from memory the Lord's Prayer, inserting the pointa. SIMPLE NARRATIVE. 28th exercise. FABLES. Write Eables from the following heads : 1. The Wolp and the Lamb. The meeting— the stream— the quarrel— the result— the moral. 2. The Fox and the Grapes, The vineyard— the grapes— the fox— the disappointment— the moral. 8. The Jackdaw in Borrowed Feathers. The discontent— the borrowed feathers— the discovery — the result— the moral . 4. The Farmer and his Sons. The death bed— th« sons— the treasure— the field— the produce— the profit— the moral. 5. Mercury and the Axe. The carnenter- -t.hfi Rvp«~.t}m piVor k\\a. ne.k\^\n.n *k«. honesty— the reward— the second carpenter— the dis- honesty—the disappointment— the moral. ■ Ml ' 11 1 '! ill ! i ! lit H. \ II: i '«» , su KSQLISH GRAMMAR. 2»TH EXERCISE. 8T0BIM, Write Stories from the following heads : ^'^''PKCT DLK TO Old Aob. 1. Bbuc« and'the Spider. tion-the moS "^ '•"■'-tl.e .ucoeM_tl„ Jeteriuin.. ihe battl«-t|,9 wound— the remoTal-.l,- «r— ImhitHtioii— w«)ii(lorful iriHtincl (liBplayoii in iU "ituation— con«tiuotiou — ili« lUrn— tlio (lifTt'ient upuitmonli— Ihouiore liou»o— value of tho biiivor. 6. TlIK FiAOLK. LaigoHt upooios— wltere foiin(l--lt'ngth--broa(lth— -beAk— talons— *jre—no(»t~food—8tienglb—aneo(iot«. ft. The Oak. Couiitriof) in which found — h«lght — oircumf«renuo — ago — durability— Htrongtii — principal uio — the fruit— th« bark. 7. DtiSTRUCTioN or Phauaoii The eacupo— the route— the guide— the Red Son— tlu^ en- cunipincnt — the |)urBuit— the terror — the niiruculoui paH««ge — the infatuation — the destruction. aiHT EXKU0I8E. SIMI'I.B NAKRATIVK8 KUOlf MKMOilY. Oivo orally, then write, the substunco of the follow ing parableu. 1. Thc'Ten ViigiuH. 2. The Good Samaritan, 8. The Prodigal Hon. 4. 'i'ho Rich Mun and IjazaruB. 6. Tjje Unjunt Judge. 6. 'J'lic Worklly Man. 7. Tho Unmerciful Servant. 8. The Taleata. y. The Labourer* Mired. 10. The Wedding Garment. Give orally, thou write, the Bubstance of the foUow- stories. » 'he Frtrm. r and the Lawyer. 2. The Old Man and his Asa. ^^oy who cried " Wolf." 4. The Robber Sparrow and tho .18. 6. Sinbad and tho Whale. 0. Alfred and the Cakea. Canute and the Waves. 8. Frederick the Great and the Miller, ilurigo Park and tho Negreee. 10. The Portuguese Brother*. Give orally, then write, the Bubstanco of daily lesBon. Give orally, then write, a short account of yeaterdaj*ii employment of time. 82ko EXEROISE. rOMSTKUOTIOlf or BIXPLK NAKBATITK. Write a short account of the following objects, de- scribing their constrtfction, materitls, form, and use. 7. Hi J:- "■y; , rr -•" li: 316 A Scythe. A Plough. A Harrow. ENGLISH GRAMMAR. A Cart. A Penknife. An Urabrello. Write a short account of Sowing, riouching. Reaping. A Carriage. A Balloon. A Steamboat. Hay-making. Thrashing. Malting. Write a short account of following substances. A Railroad. A Watch. A Bridge, the following operations. Brewing, Baking. Printing. Bookbindi Engraving. Dyeing. np. the process of making the Flour. Butter. Cheese. Salt. Soap. Olaas. Paper. Ink. Gae. Sealing-wax. Earthenware. Glue. 83aD EXERCISE. FOHMATION OF HBAD8 POa siMrLE NARRATIVS wrHtl"?nfrf f *^" Pr^'^^i^g narratives, when written, into heads, 8ugge4ive of the contents, thus :!^ The Crow and the Pitcher. Beads, J54TH EXERCISE. PAKAPHBASE OF POETICAL PASSAGES INTO PROSE NABEAT1V« narS'''' '^" ^'"°^^"^ ^''''''^ P^«««g«« ^^to prose The Ant and the Caterpillar wir^in- ' ""^ ^K.t^l^'^ts superiorly vain, A w'!:^"^°^^T'^^^ consequence, ofer the plain, - " viu;, iii liis progress remarkably slow, ENGLISH COVP05ITTO!C. 517 Railroad. Watch. Bridge. rationa. Iv-bliiijin^f. [raving, sing. 'king the aling-Tvnx. rthenware. ue. 8, when thus :— ' a pitcher » he found J stooping voured to t for this, them one the water strength, Cried : *' BleiB your good worship wherever you go ! I hope your (jreat raij,'htine8H won't take it ill, 1 pav my respeota with a hearty good-will." With a look of contempt, and impertinent pride, " Bego.e, you vile reptile I " his nntship replied : " Go — go, and lament your contemptible state. But first, look at me ; see my limbs how complete ; I guide all my motions with freedom and ease, Run backward and forward, and turn when I please. Of nature (grown weary) you shocking Qssay ! I spurn you thus from me — crawl out of my way." The reptile insuUoJ, and vexed to the soul, Crept onwards, and uid himself close in his hole ; But nature, determine d to end his distress. Soon sent him abroad in a Butterfly's dress. Ere long the proud Ant, as repassing the road (Fatigued from the harvest, and tugging his load), The beau on a violet-bank he beheld^ "Whose vesture in glorv a monarch's excelled ; His plumage expanded— 'twas rare to behold So lovely a mixture of purple and gold. The Ant, quite amazed at a figure so gay. Bowed low with respect, and was trudging away. " Stop friend," says the Butterfly ; " don't be surprised : I once was the reptile you spurned and despised ; But now I can mount ; m the sunbeams I play. While you must for ever drudge on in your way." The selections in Poetry,, page 267 to 282, will furnish suitable material for further exercises of thii kind. iMJl lent—the noraJ. TIVJB. prose ON riGUEES. (See Page 251 to 266.) EXAMINATION QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES ON FIGURES. 1 • ^**^V* °^®'^"^^ ^7 Figures in the use of Language f How many kmds of Figures are there ? What is a figure of etymology « iLnumerate the eight different kinds mentioned. Define and give an example of each. What is a figure of Syntax? Enumerate the fave different kinds mentioned. Define and give an example of each. "What is meant by a figure of Rhetoric ! Enumerate the fifteen mentioned. Define and give, select, or refer to an example of each. Repeat the eight particulars mentioned under the head of Poetic Science, and glve.an example illustrative of each." "" 11 M !i I ■11 i'. :. Ji !"»» ' • •■Tf-r^* 318 ENOM8I1 GRAMMAR shall inherit the earth. The robs himself. Who ehall aep DlSirNCTION OF FIGURES. 86th EXKRCISR KiaURKH OV ARRANaElfENT. AVrite from tho following paragraph the two exam- plea of Interrogation ; tlie two of Exclamation ; of Hyperbaton or Transposition ; of Pleonasm of Anti- theaia, and tho example of Climax. Ble9«e'1 aro the meek, for Ihej prodigal uAm his heir; the miser nrate us from the love of Ood f It ia highly criminal to bind'a Roman citizen; to ecourge him is enormous puilt; to kill hira is almost parricide ; but by what name aliall I deaij^nate the cruci- fying of him ? Then shook the hills, with thunder riven. Shall a man be more pure than his Maker f He heareth it with his ear*, and understftudeth it with his heart. How majestic are the starry heavens! The wise man considers what he wants; and the fool what he abounds ill. I saw it with these eyes. O tho dopth of the riches both of the wisdom and knowledge of Ood !* SStii exercise. riaoaxs or ooNvsasiox oa tropkh. Write from the following paragraph the two exam- ples of Simile ; the two of Metaphor ; of Allegory ; of Metonomy ; of Synecdoche ; of Hyperbole ; of Peraon- ification ; of Apostrophe ; of Irony. The sword has laid waste many a fertile tract of country. Moiat, bright, and green, the landscape laughs around. Lovo swells like the Solway, but ebbs like its tide. Saul hath slain his thousands, and David his ten thousands. I am tho true vine. Thou art sounding cui, thou mighty sea, for ever and the same! Mine eyes rundown rivers of water. Thou that destioyest the temple, and buildest it up in three days, save thyself. The groves poured forth their music . O Jonathan 1 thou wast slain in thine high places ! No useless coffin enclosed his breast. The moun- tains and the hills shall break forth before you into singing, and all the trees of the field shall clap their hands. The clouds were tinged with gold. Tho cotton manufacturo employs a great nnmber of hands. The righteous shall flourish as the pnlfti tree. No doubt but yo are the people, and wisdom shall die with you. And BOW also the axe is laid unto the root of the trees : therefore every tree which bringeth not forth good fruit is hewn down and cast into the tire. ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 310 vo exam- bion ; of of Anti- rth. The shall sep- to bind a ill him ig th« orucio m. Shall 1 bi> ear^» the starry 1 the fool (lopth of ) exain- ory ; of Peraon- country. 1. Lovo slaio bia rue vine, le same ! jyeat the le groves ia thioe le moun- ;ing, aud ids were a greafc xYfa tree, ith you. berefore owQ and 37tu exercise. FIOURKS or ARRANUEUENl. Write from Scripture three examploa of Interroga- tion ; three of Exclamation ; of Transpoaition ; of Ple- onaam ; of Antitheaia ; of Climax. 38th exercise. FiaOaKS OF OONVKEfllON OB TRUrES . Write from Scripture, or aelect from any aource three examplea of Simile; three of Metaphor; of Allegory; of Metonoray ; of Synecdoche ; of Hyperbole ; of Per- sonification ; of Apostrophe ; of Irony. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES ON FIGUilES- 39th exercise. Write a figurative expreasion for each of the follow- ing worda. * Example: Youth — the moioiag of life. San. Moon. Stars. Thunder. Lightning. Clouds. Sea Niffht. Sleep. Death. Grave. Sky. 40th exercise. Write sentences with a metaphorical application of each of the following words. EXAMPLE. Path— The paths of glory lead but to the grave. Fruit. Dark. Climb. Quickness. Pain. Deep. Build. Sweetneaa. Pillar. Strou''. Burn. Coolness . 41sT exercise. 1. Write the first twelve Similes in the first book of Milton. 2. Write the first twelve examples of Personification ia Thomson's Season of Summer. 42nd exercise. Distinguish the Figures in any passages of Poetry that may be selected, thus : ^r -=^55^ 320 ISNOLISH GRAMMAR. EXAMPLE. Sun of the s'eepless I nielancholj star ! "Whose tearful beam sliineB tremulously far ; That show'st the darkness thou caost not dispel ; How like tbou art to joy remembered well ! So memory gleams, the light of other days, That shiDes, but warms not with its powerless rays ; A night bram Sorrow watches to behold, Oistinct, but distant; clear, but oh ! how cold ! FIOUBES. The first four lines — apoBtrophe. "Sun" — metaphor. " Mel- ancholy star " — personification. " Tearful beam " — personifica- tion. "How like thou art to joy remembered well!" — simile. " So memory gleams, the ligjht of other days, that shines, but warms not with its powerless rays" — comparison. " Gleams" — metaphor. •• The light of other days "—metaphor. " Shioea "— metaphor. "Shines, but warms not" — antithesis. "Rays" metaphor. "Night beam"— metaphor. " Sorrow "—personifi- cation. "Distinct,' but distant ; clear, but eh! how cold!" antithesis. 43aD EXERCISE. Convert the following figurative expressions into plain language : ExampU — He bore away the palm. Changed — He obtained the prize. How beautiful is night ! The clouds of adversity soon pa8f< away. Who is like unto thee, God, in Heaven above, or in the earth beneath f He was one of the brightest luminaries of the age. Vain^ is the tree of knowledge without fruits. The waves rose to Heaven. She shed a flood of tears. The Emperor Cali- gula assumed the purple on the death of Tiberius. Have you read Pope ? Nature in spring is covered with a robe of light green. Night spreads her sable mantle over the earth. The vessel ploughs the deep. Alfred was a shining light in the midst of darkness. The Cross will at last triumph over the Crescent. ON ILLUSTEATIONS. 44th EXERCISE, EMBLEMS. Write a short illustration of the following emblems Winter— Old age River— Human life. Sleep— Death. Flower — Man, Liglit — Knowledge. Evening — Autumn. ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 321 45th exercise. Write ft short illustration of the following Scripture emblems : 1. The Righteous shall flourish as the Palm Tree. 2. The Harvest 13 the Edd of the World. 3. The Kingdom of Heaven is like unto a grain of Mustard Seed. 4. I (Christ) am the light of the World. 6. Te (Christians) are the Salt of the Earth. 6. Wicked men are like the troubled Sea. 46th EXERCISE. Write a short illustration of the following proverbs : 1, Better late shan never. 2. Look before you leap. S. A friend in need is a friend indeed. 4. A rolling Btone gathers no moss. 6. Many a slip between the cup and the lip. 6. Empty vessels make the most noise. 7. No rose without a thorn. 8. Strike •while, the iron is hot. 9. Prevention is better than cure. 10. A small spark makes a great fire. 11. Where there is a will there is a way. 1 2. The burnt child dreads the fire. « 47th EXERCISE. Write a short illustration of the following precepts : 1. Let not the sun go down upon your wrath. 2. Honor yourself, and you will" be honored. 3. Do as you would be done by. 4. Avoid extremes. 5. Deliberate slowly, execute promptly. 6. Never put off till to-morrow what can be done today. 7. Be just before you are generous. 48th EXERCISE. Write a short illustration of the nnalogies between the following subjects : 1. A Plant and an Animal. 2. A Bird aud a Fish. ti. A Seed and an Egg. 4. A Bee-hive and a Social Comrnuuity. 49th EXERCISE. Write a short illustration of the distinctions between the following subjects : 1. Reason and Interest. 2. A plant and an animal. S. Courage aud Rashness. ^ 50th EXERCISE Write a short illustration of the contrast between the following subjects : 1. Peace and War. 2. Civilization and Barbarism. ;>. Industry aud Idleness, 4. Selfishness and Benevolence. 322 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. DESCKIPTIVE EXERCISES. 5l8T EXERCISE. ' Write a short description of the following scenes : 1. The OfFeriner of laanc. 2. Nature in Autumn. ,3. rnasage of the Red Sen. 4.^ A Moonlight Scene. 5. The Destruction of the First Born of Egypt. 52nd exercise. Write a short outline or description of the subject of each of the following poems : 1. Pope's "Temple of Fame." 2. Goldsmith's " Deserted Vil- lage." 8. Scott's "Lady of the Lake." Shakespeare's play of the "Tempest." 5. Milton's "Comus." EPISTOLARY EXERCISES. i3RD EXERCISE. Write the following letters : 1. Write to a friend at a distance. 2. To a friend who.ia going abroad.- 3. Write to a friend, giving an account of a summer excursion. 4. Write to a business house, with a view of opeDiog a correspondence. 5. The reply to the last. 6. A letter contain- ing an order for geods, 7. Announcing that certain goods ordered bave been shipped. 8. Reply to the laist. 9. From a tradesman to another, for money. 10. Application to a merchant, soliciting a situation as clerk. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES. 54Tn EXERCISE. Write a short account of the lives of the following eminent characters : 1. John Milton. 2- Martin Luther. 3. Christopher Columbus. 4. Sir Isaac Newton. 5. John Howard, rt. Oliver Goldsmith. •7. Benjamin Iranklin. 8. Queen Elizabeth. 9. Lord Palmerston. 10. Richard Cobden. 11. Prince Albert. HISTORICAL SKETCHES. 55th EXERCISE. Write a short account of the following Bubjects con- nected with English history : 1. The Wars of the Roses. 2. The Norman Conquest. 3. The Spanish Armada. 4. Civil Wars in the reign of Charles I. ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 323 66tu exercise. Write a short account of the following subjects, con- nected with Eoman and Grecian history : 1. Hannibal's Campaign in Italy. 2. The Jugurtliine War. 8. The Reign of Auguatua Caesar. 4. Battle of Marathon, 6. Leoni- das at the Pass of Thermopylae. 6. The Thirty Tyrants. 7. Retreat of the Ten Thousand. IMAGINATIVE EXERCISES. 67Tn EXERCISE. Write an imaginary speech for each of the following occasions : 1. Pupils on Parting with a Teacher. 2. A Graduate on leaving College. 8. Harold at the Battle of Hastings. 4. Bruce at Ban- nockburu. 5. To a Missionary on his Departuie to labor amonc the H athen. ^ SUBJECTS FOR KEASONING. 68x11 EXERCISE, Write a short statement of the arguments in support of the following conclusions, &c. : 1. The Earth is round, 2. The Chriatian Sabbath a Divine Institution. 8. Our Duty and Interest are inseparable. 4. False- hood and Deception incompatible with true greatness of character. 5. It is as much the Duty and Interest of every country to provide and endow Institutions for the superior Education of Girls, as for the superior Education of Boys. THEMES. A theme is an exercise in which the subject is treated according to a set of Heads methodically arranged. In this respect it differs from an essay, wherein the writer is at liberty to follow his own inclination as to the arrangement of his ideas. Some systematic arrangement must be observed, but the nature of the Theme should determine what method in any particular case, would be mo3t suitable. The following methods are given as examples : FfRST MKTnOD, 1. Definition, 2. On 'a and Cause. 3. Antiquity or Novelty. 4. Universality or Loc^.Uty. '5. Effect. 6. Contrast. 7. Con- elusion. 3^4 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 8BC0ND iiErnoo. 1. Introduction. 2. Definition. 8. Nature. 1. Operation and '^'■•° 5. Examples. 6. Application. Effecte MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS EOH THEMES. 1. On Attention, 2. " Anger, Biogiapliy, Charity, Compaesiou, Oonpcience, Carelessness, Curiosity, Cheerfulness, Contentment, Diligence, Duplicity, Early Rising, Envy, Friendship, Fear, Forgiveness, Government, 3. " 4. " C. " 6. " 1. " 8. " 9. " 10. " 11. " 12. " 15. " 14. " U. " 16. " 11. " 18. '• 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30, 81. 82. 33. 34. 35. 36. " GreatneWjtrue " Genius, "^ Habit, Knowledge is power, Progress of Error, Progress of Truth, Government of the Tongue, " of the Temper, " of the Affections, Love of Country, The Power of Association, The Immortality of the S(»n, The Uses of Knowledge, Power of Conscience, The Power of Habit, Life is Short, Miseries of Idleness, Never too old to Learn, LIST or BOOKS TO BE CONSULTED BY STUDEXTS. Eor the guidance of those who wish to follow up the study of the Engliali Language, the following list of Text Books is appended : Latham's Hand Book of the English Language. Fowler's English Grammar (Revised and Enlarged 1 Trench's Study of Words. Whateley's English Synonymes. Alford's Queen's English. Trench's English Past and Present Jamieson's Grammar of Rhetoric,